Home

LTRT-65105 MediaPack H.323 User`s Manual Ver 4.6

1. DB 9 female for PC DB 9 male for MP 1xx Cabling the Lifeline Phone The Lifeline provides a wired analog POTS phone connection to any PSTN or PBX FXS port when there is no power or when the network connection fails Users can therefore use the Lifeline phone even when the MP 1xx is not powered on or not connected to the network With the MP 108 FXS and MP 104 FXS the Lifeline connection is provided on port 4 refer to Figure 3 11 With the MP 102 FXS the Lifeline connection is provided on port 2 Note The MP 124 and MP 10x FXO do not support the Lifeline The Lifeline s Splitter connects pins 1 and 4 to another source of an FXS port and pins 2 and 3 to the POTS phone Refer to the Lifeline Splitter pinout in Figure 3 10 Figure 3 10 Lifeline Splitter Pinout amp RJ 11 Connector for MP 10x FXS 1 Lifeline Tip 2 Tip 3 Ring 4 Lifeline Ring Version 4 6 33 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 gt Tocable the MP 10x FXS Lifeline phone take these 3 steps 1 Connect the Lifeline Splitter to port 4 on the MP 104 FXS or MP 108 FXS or to port 2 on the MP 102 FXS Connect the Lifeline phone to Port A on the Lifeline Splitter Connect an analog PSTN line to Port B on the Lifeline Splitter Note The use of the Lifeline on network failure can be disabled using the LifeLineType ini file parameter described in Table 5 37 on page 120 Figure 3 11 MP 104 FX
2. No Response parameters from BootP DHCP reply BootP DHCP reply contains firmware file name Download firmware via TFTP BootP DHCP reply contains ini file name Update network DHCP Response Reset from the Web Interface or SNMP No Response BootP DHCP reply contains ini file name Download configuration files via TFTP Preconfigured firmware URL Download firmware via TFTP Preconfigured ini file URL Version 4 6 Run operational software 187 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 10 5 Customizing the MediaPack Web Interface Customers incorporating the MediaPack into their portfolios can customize the Web Interface to suit their specific corporate logo and product naming conventions Customers can customize the Web Interface s title bar AudioCodes title bar is shown in Figure 10 4 a customized title bar is shown in Figure 10 6 Figure 10 4 User Customizable Web Interface Title Bar fa AudioCodes Product Name Figure 10 5 Customized Web Interface Title Bar idgets Inc Lila gt Tocustomize the title bar via the Web Interface take these 3 steps 1 Replace the main corporate logo refer to Section 10 5 1 below 2 Replace the title bar s background image file refer to Section 10 5 2 on page 190 3 Customize the product s name refer to Section 10 5 3 on page 191 10 5 1 Replacing the Main Corporate Logo The main corporate logo
3. Destination IP address is disallowed if no ping to the destination is available ping is continuously initiated every 7 seconds when an inappropriate level of QoS was detected or when DNS host name is not resolved The QoS level is calculated according to delay or packet loss of previously ended calls If no call statistics are received for two minutes the QoS information is reset The MediaPack gateway matches the rules starting at the top of the table For this reason enter the main IP route above any alternative route Determining the Availability of Destination IP Addresses To determine the availability of each destination IP address or host name in the routing table one or all of the following configurable methods are applied e Connectivity The destination IP address is queried periodically currently only by ping e QoS The QoS of an IP connection is determined according to RTCP statistics of previous calls Network delay in msec and network packet loss in percentage are separately quantified and compared to a certain configurable threshold If the calculated amounts of delay or packet loss exceed these thresholds the IP connection is disallowed e DNS resolution When host name is used instead of IP address for the destination route it is resolved to an IP address by a DNS server Connectivity and QoS are then applied to the resolved IP address Relevant Parameters The following parameters describ
4. Figure 12 3 Example of a Base64 Encoded X 509 Certificate MIIDkzCCAnugAwIBAgIEAgAAADANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQQOFADA MQswCOYDVQOGEwJG UjETMBEGAlUEChMKQ2VydGlwb3NOZTEDMBkGAl1UEAxMSQ2VydGlwb3NOZSBTZXJ2 ZXVyMB4XDTk4MDY yNDA4MDAWMF oXDTE4MDY yNDA4MDAWMF owP zELMAkGA1UEBhMC RlIxEzARBgNVBAoTCkNlcnRpcG9zdGUxGzAZBgNVBAMTEkNlonRpcG9zdGUgU2Vy dmV1cjCCASEwDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEBBOQADggEOADCCAQkCggEAPqd4MziRA4spWldGR x8bQrhZkonWnNm tYhb7 4067ecfljanH7GcN SXsfx7jJpreWULf7v7Cvpr4R7qI JcmdHIntmf7JPM5n6cDBvl7uSW63er7NkVnMFHwK1QaGFLMybFkzaeGrvFEm4k31R efiXDmuOe FhJgHYezYHf44LvPRPwhSrzi9 Aq3o8pWDguJuZDIUPIF1jMa LPwv REXfFCUWtw 6 Before continuing set the parameter HTTPSOnly 0 to ensure you have a method of accessing the device in case the new certificate doesn t work Restore the previous setting after testing the configuration In the SSLCertificateSR screen Figure 12 2 locate the server certificate loading section Click Browse and navigate to the cert txt file click Send File 9 When the operation is completed save the configuration Section 5 9 on page 152 and restart the MP 11x the Embedded Web Server uses the provided certificate Note 1 The certificate replacement process can be repeated when necessary e g the new certificate expires Note 2 Itis possible to use the IP address of the MP 11x e g 10 3 3 1 instead of a qualified DNS name in the Subject Name This practice is not recommended since the IP address is subject to cha
5. Version 4 6 Description Defines one of the following standards for detection FXO and generation FXS of Caller ID and detection FXO of MWI when specified signals Bellcore 0 Caller ID and MWI default ETSI 1 Caller ID and MWI NTT 2 British 4 DTMF ETSI 16 Denmark 17 Caller ID and MWI India 18 Brazil 19 Note 1 The Caller ID signals are generated detected between the first and the second rings Note 2 To select the Bellcore Caller ID sub standard use the parameter BellcoreCallerlDTypeOneSubStandard To select the ETSI Caller ID sub standard use the parameter ETSICallerlIDTypeOneSubStandard Note 3 To select the Bellcore MWI sub standard use the parameter BellcorevVMWITypeOneStandard To select the ETSI MWI sub standard use the parameter ETSIVMWITypeOnesStandard N A V 22 Modem Transport Type that the gateway uses You can select Transparent 0 Relay 1 N A Bypass 2 default V 23 Modem Transport Type that the gateway uses You can select Transparent 0 Relay 1 N A Bypass 2 default V 32 Modem Transport Type that the gateway uses You can select Transparent 0 Relay 1 N A Bypass 2 default Note This option applies to V 32 and V 32bis modems V 90 V 34 Modem Transport Type that the gateway uses You can select Transparent 0 Relay 1 N A Bypass 2 default Number of times that each fax relay payload is r
6. D s fesom p e Not Configured e NotConfigued Z Not Configured z Pee e NotConfigured NotContiguea Not Configured z piezo B p NotConfigured z NotConfguea z Not Configured z 2 Inthe Table Index drop down list select the range of entries that you want to edit up to 20 entries can be configured for Source Number Manipulation and 50 entries for Destination Number Manipulation Configure the Number Manipulation table according to Table 5 8 Click the Submit button to save your changes 5 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 72 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 8 Number Manipulation Parameters Parameter Description Destination Prefix Each entry in the Destination Prefix fields represents a destination telephone number prefix An asterisk represents any number Source Prefix Each entry in the Source Prefix fields represents a source telephone number prefix An asterisk represents any number Source IP Each entry in the Source IP fields represents the source IP address of the call obtained from the Setup message This column only applies to the Destination Phone Number Manipulation Table for IP to Tel Note The source IP address can include the x wildcard to represent single digits For example 10 8 8 xx
7. MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 16 Configuration Files 16 Configuration Files This section describes the configuration dat files that are loaded in addition to the ini file to the gateway The configuration files are e Call Progress Tones file refer to Section 16 1 on page 223 e Prerecorded Tones file refer to Section 16 2 on page 227 e FXS FXO coefficient files refer to Section 16 3 on page 228 To load either of the configuration files to the MediaPack use the Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 8 2 on page 150 or alternatively specify the name of the relevant configuration file in the gateway s ini file and load it the ini file to the gateway refer to Section 5 8 2 1 on page 151 16 1 Configuring the Call Progress Tones and Ringing File The Call Progress Tones and Ringing configuration file used by the MediaPack is a binary file with the extension dat that is comprised of two sections The first section contains the definitions of the Call Progress Tones levels and frequencies that are detected generated by the MediaPack The second section contains the characteristics of the ringing signal that is generated by the MediaPack Users can either use one of the supplied MediaPack configuration dat files or construct their own file To construct their own configuration file users are recommended to modify the supplied usa tone ini file in any standard text editor to suit their specific requirements and
8. Send Background Image file from your computer to the device Browse Send File Logo width 339 Set Logo Width This button restores the default images Important Use the Save Configuration Link in order to save loaded images to flash memory 4 Click the Browse button in the Send Logo Image file from your computer to the device box Navigate to the folder that contains the logo image file you want to load 5 Click the Send File button the file is sent to the device When loading is complete the screen is automatically refreshed and the new logo image is displayed 6 Note the appearance of the logo If you want to modify the width of the logo the default width is 339 pixels in the Logo Width field enter the new width in pixels and press the Set Logo Width button 7 To save the image to flash memory so it is available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 The new logo appears on all Web Interface screens Tip If you encounter any problem during the loading of the files or you want to restore the default images click the Restore Default Images button gt To replace the default logo with your own corporate image via the ini file take these 2 steps 1 Place your corporate logo image file in the same folder as where the device s ini file is located i e the same location defined in the BootP TFTP configuration utility For detailed information on the BootP TFTP refer
9. a Destination number prefix b Number of stripped digits from the left or if brackets are used from the right A combination of both options is allowed C String to add as prefix or if brackets are used as suffix A combination of both options is allowed d Number of remaining digits from the right e Not applicable set to f Not applicable set to g Source number prefix h Not applicable set to i Source IP address obtained from the Setup message The b to d manipulation rules are applied if the called and calling numbers match the a g and i conditions The manipulation rules are executed in the following order b d and c Parameters can be skipped by using the sign for example NumberMapIP2Tel 01 2 972 034 10 13 77 8 NumberMapIP2Tel 03 2 667 22 Note The Source IP address can include the x wildcard to represent single digits For example 10 8 8 xx represents all the addresses between 10 8 8 10 to 10 8 8 99 74 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 9 Number Manipulation ini File Parameters continues on pages 74 to 75 Parameter Name in ini File Parameter Format SourceNumberMapTel2IP SourceNumberMapTel2IP a b c d e f g h a Source number prefix b Number of stripped digits from the left or if in brackets are used from right A combination of bo
10. 1 Get the inifile from the gateway using the Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 6 3 on page 135 2 Open the file the file is open in Notepad or a Customer defined text file editor and modify the ini file parameters according to your requirements save and close the file 3 Load the modified ini file to the gateway using either the BootP TFTP utility or the Embedded Web Server This method preserves the programming that already exists in the device including special default values that were preconfigured when the unit was manufactured Before loading the ini file to the gateway verify that the extension of the ini file saved on your PC is correct Verify that the check box Hide file extension for known file types My computer gt Tools gt Folder Options View is unchecked Then confirm that the ini file name extension is xxx ini and NOT erroneously xxx ini ini or Xxx ini Version 4 6 155 July 2005 AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 6 3 The ini File Structure The ini file can contain any number of parameters The parameters are divided into groups by their functionality The general form of the ini file is shown in Figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 ini File Structure Sub Section Name Parameter Name Parameter Value Parameter Name Parameter Value REMARK Sub Section Name 6 3 1 6 3 2 The ini File Structure Rules e Lines beginning with a semi colon as the first character are ign
11. DTMFTxOptions DTMFRxOption and HookFlashOption Also ensure that neither of the obsolete parameters Is931MsgUsed and IsHookFlashUsed is configured set to No 2 Set parameter DTMFTransportType Transparent 8 2 1 Overview of In Band DTMF Transport Types The MediaPack gateway controls the way DTMF digits are transferred in band as part of the audio stream using the DTMFTransport configuration parameter Note that this parameter is automatically updated in the first four methods described in the previous section and therefore shouldn t be changed while for the fifth method in band DTMF it should normally be set to Transparent The following four modes are supported e DTMFTransportType 0 Mute DTMF In this mode DTMF digits are erased from the audio stream and are not relayed to the remote side Instead silence is sent in the RTP stream e DTMFTransportType 2 Transparent DTMF In this mode DTMF digits are left in the audio stream and the DTMF relay is disabled e DTMFTransportType 3 RFC 2833 DTMF Relay In this mode DTMF digits are relayed to the remote side using the RFC 2833 Relay syntax MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 164 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Telephony Capabilities 8 3 Fax amp Modem Transport Modes 8 3 4 Fax Modem Settings Users may choose to use one of the following transport methods for fax and for each modem type V 22 V 23 Bell V 32 V 34 e Fax relay dem
12. default Login Enable 1 When enabled logging to the gateway s Web and Telnet embedded servers is performed via a RADIUS server The gateway contacts a predefined server and verifies the given username and password pair against a remote database ina secure manner Note 1 The parameter EnableRADIUS must be set to 1 Note 2 RADIUS authentication requires HTTP basic authentication meaning the username and password are transmitted in clear text over the network Therefore users are recommended to set the parameter HttpsOnly 1 to force the use of HTTPS since the transport is encrypted RADIUSAuthServerlP RADIUS Authentication Server IP IP address of the RADIUS authentication server Address RADIUSAuthPort RADIUS Authentication Server Port number of the RADIUS authentication server The default value is 1645 Port SharedSecret Secret used to authenticate the gateway to the RADIUS server Should be a RADIUS Shared Secret cryptographically strong password Version 4 6 119 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 6 1 9 Advanced Configuration ini File Parameters Table 5 37 describes the board parameters that can only be configured via the ini file Table 5 37 Board ini File Parameters continues on pages 120 to 123 ini File Parameter Name Valid Range and Description LifeLineType The Lifeline is activated on 0 Power down default 1 Power down or when link is down physical discon
13. e ACD with software and documentation may be included e The MP 11x Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 6 35 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 3 2 3 19 inch Rack Installation Package Additional option is available for installing the MP 11x in a 19 inch rack The 19 inch rack installation package contains a single shelf shown in Figure 3 12 below and eight shelf to device screws Figure 3 12 19 inch Rack Shelf 3 2 4 Mounting the MP 11x The MP 11x can be mounted on a desktop refer to Section 3 2 4 1 below on a wall refer to Section 3 2 4 2 or installed in a standard 19 inch rack refer to Section 3 2 4 2 Figure 3 13 below describes the design of the MP 11x base Figure 3 13 View of the MP 11x Base Table 3 4 View of the MP 11x Base Item Functionality 1 Square slot used to attach anti slide bumpers for desktop mounting 2 Oval notch used to attach the MP 11x to a wall 3 Screw opening used to attach the MP 11x to a 19 inch shelf rack MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 36 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 3 Installing the MediaPack 3 2 4 4 Mounting the MP 11x on a Desktop Attach the four supplied anti slide bumpers to the base of the MP 11x refer to item 1 in Figure 3 13 and place it on the desktop in the position you require 3 2 4 2 Mounting the MP 11x on a Wall To mount the MP 11x on a wall take these 4 steps 1 Drill four holes according to the followin
14. indeterminate when the crossing is above the threshold and cleared when it falls bellow the threshold The source varbind in the trap indicates the object for which the threshold is being crossed MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 212 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 15 SNMP Based Management 15 5 Supported MIBs The MediaPack contains an embedded SNMP Agent supporting the following MIBs Standard MIB MIB 2 The various SNMP values in the standard MIB are defined in RFC 1213 The standard MIB includes various objects to measure and monitor IP activity TCP activity UDP activity IP routes TCP connections interfaces and general system indicators RTP MIB The RTP MIB is supported in conformance with the IETF RFC 2959 It contains objects relevant to the RTP streams generated and terminated by the device and to RTCP information related to these streams NOTIFICATION LOG MIB This standard MIB RFC 3014 iso org dod internet mgmt mib 2 is supported as part of our implementation of carrier grade alarms ALARM MIB This is an IETF proposed MIB also supported as part of our implementation of carrier grade alarms This MIB is still not standard and is therefore under the audioCodes acExperimental branch SNMP TARGET MIB This MIB is partially supported RFC 2273 It allows for the configuration of trap destinations and trusted managers only SNMP Research International Enterprise MIBs MediaPack support
15. screen Protocol Management menu gt Protocol Definition submenu gt Coders option the Coders screen is displayed Figure 5 5 Coders Screen Coders 1st Coder 2nd Coder 3rd Coder 4th Coder 5th Coder Version 4 6 From the coder drop down list select the coder you want to use For the full list of available coders and their corresponding ptimes refer to Table 5 3 Note Each coder can appear only once From the drop down list to the right of the coder list select the size of the Voice Packet ptime used with this coder in milliseconds Selecting the size of the packet determines how many coder payloads are combined into one RTP voice packet Note 1 The ptime packetization period depends on the selected coder name Note 2 If not specified the ptime gets a default value Note 3 The ptime specifies the maximum packetization time the gateway can receive Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the second to fifth coders optional Click the Submit button to save your changes To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 57 July 2005 AudioCodes bi Parameter CoderName MediaPack H 323 Table 5 3 ini File Coder Parameter Description Enter the coders in the format CoderName lt Coder gt lt ptime gt For example CoderName g711Alaw64k 20 CoderName g711Ulaw64k 40 CoderName g7231 90 Note 1 This parameter CoderName can
16. to be used for telephone numbers dialed by a user or entered for the endpoint telephone number Note The and can always be used as first digit of a dialed number even if you select Disable for this parameter 61 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 2 5 5 2 1 Configuring the Advanced Parameters Use this submenu to configure the gateway s advanced control protocol parameters General Parameters Use this screen to configure general control protocol parameters To configure the general parameters under Advanced Parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the General Parameters screen Protocol Management menu gt Advanced Parameters submenu gt General Parameters option the General Parameters screen is displayed Figure 5 7 Advanced Parameters General Parameters Screen General Parameters Signaling DiffServ o iP Security Disable Filter Calls to IP Dont Filter ii Enable Digit Delivery to Tel Disable Enable Digit Delivery to IP Disable MS Enable DID Wink Disable Re answer Time fo Disconnect and Answer Supervision Enable Polarity Reversal Disable Enable Current Disconnect Disable i Disconnect on Broken Connection Yes Y Broken Connection Timeout 100 msec 100 Disconnect Call on Silence Detection No M Silence Detection Period sec 120 Silence Detection Method Voice Energy Detectors CDR and Debut CDR Serve
17. 1 4 DHCP packets 2 5 DHCP packets 3 6 DHCP packets default 4 7 DHCP packets 5 8 DHCP packets 6 9 DHCP packets Use bs 1 to enable the Selective BootP mechanism Use bs 0 to disable the Selective BootP mechanism The Selective BootP mechanism available from Boot version 1 92 enables the gateway s integral BootP client to filter unsolicited BootP DHCP replies accepts only BootP replies that contain the text AUDC in the vendor specific information field This option is useful in environments where enterprise BootP DHCP servers provide undesired responses to the gateway s BootP requests Use be 1 for the device to send device related initial startup information such as board type current IP address software version in the vendor specific information field in the BootP request This information can be viewed in the main screen of the BootP TFTP under column Client Info refer to Figure B 1 showing BootP TFTP main screen with the column Client Info on the extreme right For a full list of the vendor specific Information fields refer to Section 7 3 on page 158 Note This option is not available on DHCP servers 246 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual B The BootP TFTP Configuration Utility B 12 Managing Client Templates Templates can be used to simplify configuration of clients when most of the parameters are the same Figure B 5 Templates Screen Templates Templa
18. 1 Hard Note 1 Some Caller ID signals use reversal polarity and or wink signals In these cases it is recommended to set PolarityReversalType to 1 Hard Note 2 Applicable only to FXS gateways Duration of the current disconnect pulse in msec The default is 900 msec The range is 200 to 1500 msec Applicable for both FXS and FXO gateways Note The FXO gateways detection range is 200 msec of the parameter s value 100 For example if CurrentDisconnectDuration 200 the detection range is 100 to 500 msec Determines the line voltage threshold which when reached is considered a current disconnect detection Note Applicable only to MP 10x FXO gateways The valid range is 0 to 20 Volts The default value is 4 Volts Determines a digit pattern that when received from the Tel side indicates the gateway to disconnect the call The valid range is a 25 character string Determines the frequency at which the analog line voltage is sampled after offhook for detection of the current disconnect threshold Note Applicable only to MP 10x FXO gateways The valid range is 100 to 2500 msec The default value is 1000 msec 0 Caller ID is generated between the first two rings default 1 The gateway attempts to find an optimized timing to generate the Caller ID according to the selected Caller ID type Note that when used with distinctive ringing the Caller ID signal doesn t change the distinctive ringing timing N
19. 31 to O dB The default value is 11 dB Enable Answer Detector EnableAnswerDetector NA Answer Detector Activity Delay N A AnswerDetectorActivityDelay Answer Detector Silence Time N A AnswerDetectorSilenceTime Answer Detector Redirection N A AnswerDetectorRedirection Answer Detector Sensitivity Determines the Answer Detector sensitivity AnswerDetectorSensitivity The range is 0 most sensitive to 2 least sensitive The default is 0 Version 4 6 127 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 6 2 2 Configuring the Fax Modem CID Settings To configure the Fax Modem CID Settings parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the Fax Modem CID Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Channel Settings Fax Modem CID Settings option the Fax Modem CID Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 37 Fax Modem CID Settings Screen Fax Modem CID Settings Fax Transport Mode T3eRelay Caller ID Transport Type Mte x Caller ID Type Belcoe sj V 21 Modem Transport Type Disable s V 22 Modem Transport Type Enable Bypass v V 23 Modem Transport Type Enable Bypass v V 32 Modem Transport Type Enable Bypass 4H V 34 Modem Transport Type Enable Bypass 4A Fax Relay Redundancy Depth Do es at Fax Relay Enhanced Redundancy Depth Fax Relay ECM Enable Enbe v Fax Relay Max Rate bps han x Fax Modem Bypass Coder Type oraaw sj Fax Mode
20. 8 1 4 Call Transfer There are two types of call transfers e Consultation Transfer e Blind Transfer The common way to perform a consultation transfer is as follows In the transfer scenario there are three parties Party A transferring Party B transferred Party C transferred to 1 A Calls B 2 Banswers 3 A presses the hook flash and puts B on hold party B hears a hold tone 4 Adials C 5 After A completed dialing C he can perform the transfer by onhook the A phone 6 After the transfer is completed B and C parties are engaged in a call The transfer can be initiated at any of the following stages of the call between A to C a Just after completing dialing C phone number Transfer from setup b While hearing Ringback Transfer from alert c While speaking to C Transfer from active Blind transfer is performed after we have a call between A and B and A party decides to transfer the call to C immediately without speaking with C The result of the transfer is a call between B and C just like consultation transfer only skipping the consultation stage MediaPack gateways can t initiate a blind transfer but they can participate in such transfer as B and C parties Call Forward Five forms of forwarding calls are available 1 Immediate Any incoming call is forwarded immediately and unconditionally 2 Busy Incoming call is forwarded if the endpoint is busy 3 No reply The incoming call
21. Channel Settings RTP Parameters Parameter Dynamic Jitter Buffer Minimum Delay DJBufMinDelay Dynamic Jitter Buffer Optimization Factor DJBufOptFactor RTP Redundancy Depth RTPRedundancyDepth Packing Factor RTPPackingFactor Basic RTP Packet Interval BasicRTPPacketlnterval Note This parameter should not be used Use the Coders screen under Protocol Definition instead RTP Directional Control RTPDirectionControl RFC 2833 TX Payload Type RFC2833TxPayloadType RFC 2833 RX Payload Type RFC2833RxPayloadType RFC 2198 Payload Type RFC2198PayloadType Fax Bypass Payload Type FaxBypassPayloadType Enable RFC 3389 CN Payload Type EnableStandardSIDPayloadType Analog Signal Transport Type AnalogSignalTransportType Version 4 6 Description Minimum delay for the Dynamic Jitter Buffer The valid range is 0 to 150 milliseconds The default delay is 70 milliseconds Note For more information on the Jitter Buffer refer to Section 8 7 on page 169 Dynamic Jitter Buffer frame error delay optimization factor The valid range is 0 to 13 The default factor is 7 Note 1 Set to 13 for data fax amp modem calls Note 2 For more information on the Jitter Buffer refer to Section 8 7 on page 169 Enter 0 to disable the generation of redundant packets default Enter 1 to enable the generation of RFC 2198 redundancy packets N A Controlled internally by the gateway accordi
22. Disconnect on Busy Tone MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Description Sets the number of rings before the gateway starts detection of Caller ID FXO only 0 0 Before first ring 1 1 After first ring default 2 2 After second ring No 0 Disabled default Yes 1 FXO gateways send a metering tone Facility message to IP on detection of 12 16 kHz metering pulse FXS gateways generate the 12 16 kHz metering tone on reception of a metering message Note Suitable 12 kHz or 16 kHz coeff file must be used for both FXS and FXO gateways The MeteringType parameter must be defined in both FXS FXO gateways No 0 Call isn t released FXO gateway Yes 1 Call is released on FXO gateways if busy or reorder fast busy tones are detected on the gateway s FXO port default 106 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 11 Protocol Management ini File Parameters Table 5 28 describes the H 323 Protocol management parameters that can only be configured via the ini file Table 5 28 Protocol Definition ini File Parameters continues on pages 107 to 108 Parameter FarEndDisconnectSilence Threshold EnableDID EnableDID_X RasDestPort RasSourcePort IsHookFlashUsed Note It is recommended to use HookFlashOption parameter instead H245lnitTimeOut DisableAutoDTMFMute T38UseRTPPort MeteringType Version 4 6 Description Threshold o
23. EnableHold parameter must be enabled on both the calling and the called sides For information on the Call Waiting feature refer to Section 8 1 5 on page 163 For information on the Call Progress Tones file refer to Section 16 1 on page 223 Enable Name Identification Disable 0 Disable the name identification service default EnableNameldentification Enable 1 Enable name identification on FXS gateways If enabled for Tel IP calls the Calling Party Name identification string is sent as Calling Party Name in the H 450 8 part of the Setup message For IP gt Tel calls the Calling Party Name identification string is obtained from the Calling Name field in the H 40 8 message Note The Calling Party Name is handled as calling ID information For detailed information on the name identification option refer to Section 8 8 4 on page 170 Number of Call Waiting Number of waiting indications that are played to the receiving side of the call FXS only Indications for Call Waiting PAE The default value is 2 Time Between Call Waiting Indications Difference in seconds between call waiting indications FXS only for Call Waiting TimeBetweenWaitingIndicat The default value is 10 seconds ions Time before Waiting Indication Defines the interval in seconds before a call waiting indication is played to the port that TimeBeforeWaitinglIndicatio is currently in a call FXS only n The valid range is 0 to 100 The defau
24. Figure 5 44 Tel gt IP Call Counters Screen Tel to IP Calls Count Number of Attempted Calls 10 Number of Established Calls 5 Percentage of Successful Calls 50 000000 Number of Failed Calls due to a Busy Line Number of Failed Calls due to No Answer Number of Failed Calls due to No Route Number of Failed Calls due to No Matched Capabilities Number of Failed Calls due to Other Failures Average Call Duration sec Attempted Fax Calls Counter Successful Fax Calls Counter Oo 0 0 gt Table 5 46 Call Counters Description continues on pages 140 to 141 Counter Number of Attempted Calls Number of Established Calls Number of Failed Calls due to a Busy Line Number of Failed Calls due to No Answer Number of Failed Calls due to No Route Description This counter indicates the number of attempted calls It is composed of established and failed calls The number of established calls is represented by the Number of Established Calls counter The number of failed calls is represented by the five failed call counters Only one of the established failed call counters is incremented every time This counter indicates the number of established calls It is incremented as a result of one of the following release reasons if the duration of the call is bigger then zero GWAPP_REASON_NOT_RELEVANT 0 GWAPP_NORMAL_CALL_CLEAR 16 GWAPP NORMAL UNSPECIFIE
25. For available notations that represent multiple numbers refer to Section 5 5 3 1 on page 75 Destination IP Address In each of the IP Address fields enter the IP address that is assigned to these prefixes Domain names such as domain com can be used instead of IP addresses To discard outgoing IP calls enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Note When using domain names you must enter a DNS server IP address or alternatively define these names in the Internal DNS Table Profile ID Enter the number of the IP profile that is assigned to the destination IP address defined in the Destination IP Address field Status A read only field representing the quality of service of the destination IP address N A Alternative Routing feature is disabled OK IP route is available Ping Error No ping to IP destination route is not available QoS Low Bad QoS of IP destination route is not available DNS Error No DNS resolution only when domain name is used instead of an IP address MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 80 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Paramete Parameter Prefix 5 5 4 3 Version 4 6 Table 5 12 Tel to IP Routing Table r Description Name in ini File Parameter Format Prefix Destination Phone Prefix gt lt IP Address gt lt Source Phone Prefix gt lt Profile ID For example Prefix 20 10 2 10 2 202 1 Prefix 10 340 451 xxx 10 2 10 6 1 Pr
26. If an IP to Tel call is assigned to a hunt group the call is routed to the channel or channels that correspond to the hunt group ID You can configure the Hunt Group Settings table to determine the method in which new calls are assigned to channels within the hunt groups refer to Section 5 5 9 on page 102 Note If you enter a hunt group ID you must configure the IP to Hunt Group Routing Table assigns incoming IP calls to the appropriate hunt group If you do not configure the IP to Hunt Group Routing Table calls don t complete For information on how to configure the IP to Hunt Group Routing Table refer to Section 5 5 4 3 on page 81 Enter the number of the Tel profile that is assigned to the endpoints defined in the Channel s field Parameter Format TrunkGroup Hunt Group ID Starting channel Ending channel Phone Number gt Tel Profile ID For example TrunkGroup 1 1 4 100 TrunkGroup 2 5 8 200 1 Note 1 The numbering of channels starts with 1 Note 2 Hunt Group ID can be set to any number in the range 1 to 99 Note 3 When x Hunt Group ID is omitted the functionality of the TrunkGroup parameter is similar to the functionality of ChannelList and Channel2Phone parameters Note 4 This parameter can appear up to 8 times for MP 108 gateways and up to 24 times for MP 124 gateways Note 5 An optional Tel ProfilelD 1 to 4 can be applied to each group of channels List of phone numb
27. Locate the auxiliary files you want to load and the ini file in the same directory 3 Invoke a BootP TFTP session the ini and auxiliary files are loaded onto the MediaPack Table 5 50 below describes the ini file parameters that are associated with the configuration files Table 5 50 Configuration Files ini File Parameters ini File Parameter Name Description CallProgressTonesFileName The name and path of the file containing the Call Progress Tones definition FXSLoopCharacteristicsFileName The name and path of the file providing the FXS line characteristic parameters FXOLoopCharacteristicsFileName The name and path of the file providing the FXO line characteristic parameters PrerecordedTonesFileName The name and path of the file containing the Prerecorded Tones SaveConfiguration Determines if the gateway s configuration parameters and files is saved to flash non volatile memory 0 Configuration isn t saved to flash memory 1 Configuration is saved to flash memory default Version 4 6 151 July 2005 my bi AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 9 Save Configuration The Save Configuration screen enables users to save the current parameter configuration and the loaded auxiliary files to the non volatile memory so they are available after a power fail Parameters that are only saved to the volatile memory revert to their previous settings after hardware reset Note that when performing a software reset i e via W
28. To control when number manipulation is done set the IP to Tel Routing Mode described in Table 5 13 and the Tel to IP Routing Mode described in Table 5 12 parameters Possible uses for number manipulation can be as follows e To strip add dialing plan digits from to the number For example a user could dial 9 in front of each number in order to indicate an external line This number 9 can be removed here before the call is setup e Assignment of NPI TON to Tel gt IP calls The VoIP gateway can use a single global setting for NPI TON classification or it can use the setting in this table on a call by call basis Control for this is done using Protocol Management gt Protocol Definition gt Destination Source Number Encoding Type e Allow disallow Caller ID information to be sent according to destination source prefixes For detailed information on Caller ID refer to Section 5 5 8 3 on page 98 gt To configure the Number Manipulation tables take these 5 steps 1 Open the Number Manipulation screen you want to configure Protocol Management menu gt Manipulation Tables submenu the relevant Manipulation table screen is displayed Figure 5 10 shows the Source Phone Number Manipulation Table for Tel gt IP calls Figure 5 10 Source Phone Number Manipulation Table for Tel gt IP Calls Num of Prefix Suffix to Number of Add Dest Prefix Source Prefix Stripped Digits to NPI Presentation igits Leave
29. and Regional Settings Disabling the Embedded Web Server Access to the Embedded Web Server can be disabled by using the ini file parameter DisableWebTask 1 The default is access enabled Accessing the Embedded Web Server gt To access the Embedded Web Server take these 4 steps 1 Open a standard Web browsing application such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator 2 Inthe Uniform Resource Locator URL field specify the IP address of the MediaPack e g http 10 1 10 10 the Embedded Web Server s Enter Network Password screen appears shown in Figure 5 1 Figure 5 1 Embedded Web Server Login Screen This secure Web Site at 10 8 202 1 requires you to log on Please type the User Name and Password that you use for Realm User Name Password IV Save this password in your password list Cancel 3 Inthe User Name and Password fields enter the username default Admin and password default Admin Note that the username and password are case sensitive 4 Click the OK button the Quick Setup screen is accessed shown in Figure 4 1 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 46 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 3 1 Using Internet Explorer to Access the Embedded Web Server Internet explorer s security settings may block access to the gateway s Web browser if they re configured inco
30. clear they don t appear in the alarm history or active tables One log trap that does send clear is acPerformanceMonitoringThresholdCrossing Alarm OID Default Severity Event Type Probable Cause Alarm Text Status Changes Condition Trap status Table E 8 acPerformanceMonitoringThresholdCrossing Log Trap acPerformanceMonitoringThresholdCrossing 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 27 Indeterminate other 0 other 0 Performance Threshold alarm was set with source name of performance counter which caused the trap A performance counter has crossed the high threshold Indeterminate Condition A performance counter has crossed the low threshold Trap status cleared MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 264 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual E SNMP Traps E 1 5 Other Traps The following are provided as SNMP traps and are not alarms Table E 9 coldStart Trap Trap Name coldStart OID 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 MIB SNMPv2 MIB Note This is a trap from the standard SNMP MIB Table E 10 authenticationFailure Trap Trap Name authenticationFailure OID 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 MIB SNMPv2 MIB Table E 11 acBoardEvBoardStarted Trap Trap Name acBoardEvBoardStarted OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 4 MIB AcBoard Severity cleared Event Type equipmentAlarm Probable Cause Other 0 Alarm Text Initialization Ended Note This is the AudioCodes Enterprise application cold start trap E 1 6 Trap Var
31. format refer to the note below gt NPI TON and H323 ID 4 The gateway registers the prefixes using Type of Number and H323 ID formats refer to the note below The H323 ID functionality is identical to the functionality explained in option 2 Note If GWRegistrType parameter contains NPI TON options 3 or 4 the gateway uses the prefixes defined in the Registration Prefixes Table to register as PartyNumber In this registration mode the Type of Number columns are used to define the prefix s TON In other modes options 0 1 or 2 the TON column is ignored Version 4 6 167 July 2005 3 AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 6 Registration with H 323 ID The gateway registers with a Gatekeeper using a single descriptive name To register with H 323 ID 1 Setthe Gateway Registration Type parameter to H 323 ID GwRegistrType 1 2 Configure the H 323 ID H323IDString parameter Registration with Endpoints The gateway registers with the Gatekeeper using the numbers defined in the Endpoint Phone Numbers Table normally used with FXS gateways To register with endpoints 1 Don t configure the Registration Prefixes Table 2 Set the GWRegistrType parameter according to your requirements gt E 164 0 The gateway registers the endpoints using E 164 format gt H323 ID 1 The gateway registers the endpoints with the port IDs specified in the H 323 Port ID table if the H 323 P
32. if not defined a default ringing pattern is applied This pattern configures the ringing tone frequency and up to 4 ringing cadences The same ringing frequency is used for all the ringing pattern cadences The ringing frequency can be configured in the range of 10 Hz to 200 Hz with a 5 Hz resolution The ringing pattern cadence is specified by the following parameters Version 4 6 225 July 2005 r fA AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Burst Ring On Time Configures the cadence to be a burst cadence in the entire ringing pattern The burst relates to On time and the Off time of the same cadence It must appear between First Second Third Fourth string and the Ring On Off Time This cadence rings once during the ringing pattern Otherwise the cadence is interpreted as cyclic it repeats for every ringing cycle Ring On Time specifies the duration of the ringing signal Ring Off Time specifies the silence period of the cadence The ringing section of the ini file format contains the following strings NUMBER OF DISTINCTIVE RINGING PATTERNS Contains the following key Number of Ringing Patterns must be set to 1 Ringing Pattern 0 Contains the ringing pattern definition using the following keys Ring Type must be set to 0 Freq Hz Frequency in hertz of the ringing tone First Burst Ring On Time 10 msec Ring On period in 10 msec units for the first cad
33. spaced intervals The MediaPack uses a dynamic jitter buffer that can be configured using two parameters e Minimum delay DJBufMinDelay 0 msec to 150 msec Defines the starting jitter capacity of the buffer For example at 0 msec there is no buffering at the start At the default level of 70 msec the gateway always buffers incoming packets by at least 70 msec worth of voice frames e Optimization Factor DJBufOptFactor 0 to 12 13 Defines how the jitter buffer tracks to changing network conditions When set at its maximum value of 12 the dynamic buffer aggressively tracks changes in delay based on packet loss statistics to increase the size of the buffer and doesn t decays back down This results in the best packet error performance but at the cost of extra delay At the minimum value of 0 the buffer tracks delays only to compensate for clock drift and quickly decays back to the minimum level This optimizes the delay performance but at the expense of a higher error rate The default settings of 70 msec Minimum delay and 7 Optimization Factor should provide a good compromise between delay and error rate The jitter buffer holds incoming packets for 70 msec before making them available for decoding into voice The coder polls frames from the buffer at regular intervals in order to produce continuous speech As long as delays in the network do not change jitter by more than 70 msec from one packet to the next there is
34. walk through all SNMP values of a device via the get next request to determine all names and values that an operant device supports This is accomplished by beginning with the first SNMP object to be fetched fetching the next name with a get next and repeating this operation e Set Request The SNMP standard provides a method of effecting an action associated with Version 4 6 a device via the set request to accomplish activities such as disabling interfaces disconnecting users clearing registers etc This provides a way of configuring and controlling network devices via SNMP 209 July 2005 r I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 e Trap Message The SNMP standard furnishes a mechanism by which devices can reach out to a Network Manager on their own via a trap message to notify or alert the manager of a problem with the device This typically requires each device on the network to be configured to issue SNMP traps to one or more network devices that are awaiting these traps The above message types are all encoded into messages referred to as Protocol Data Units PDUs that are interchanged between SNMP devices 15 1 2 SNMP MIB Objects The SNMP MIB is arranged in a tree structured fashion similar in many ways to a disk directory structure of files The top level SNMP branch begins with the ISO internet directory which contains four main branches e The mgmt SNMP branch Contains the standa
35. when a MWI is received The tone is composed of a Confirmation tone that is played for StutterToneDuration followed by a Stutter tone Both tones are defined in the CPT file Note This parameter is applicable only to FXS gateways For detailed information on Message Waiting Indication MWI refer to Section 8 1 6 on page 163 69 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 2 3 Keypad Features The Keypad Features screen applicable only to FXS gateways enables you to activate deactivate the following features directly from the connected telephone s keypad e Call Forward refer to Section 5 5 8 4 on page 100 e Caller ID Restriction refer to Section 5 5 8 3 on page 98 e Hotline refer to Section 5 5 8 2 on page 97 Toconfigure the keypad features take these 4 steps 1 Open the Keypad Features screen Protocol Management menu Advanced Parameters submenu Keypad Features option the Keypad Features screen is displayed Figure 5 9 Keypad Features Screen Keypad Features Forward Unconditional No Answer On Busy On Busy or No Answer Do Not Disturb Deactivate Caller ID Restriction Activate Deactivate Hotline Activate Deactivate Configure the Keypad Features according to Table 5 7 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Not
36. window opens Navigate to the folder where you want to save the ini file Bx Be oc oy Click the Save button the VoIP gateway copies the ini file into the folder you selected To restore the ini file take these 4 steps Click the Browse button Navigate to the folder that contains the ini file you want to load p gt y Click the file and click the Open button the name and path of the file appear in the field beside the Browse button 4 Click the Send ini File button and click OK in the prompt the gateway is automatically reset from the cmp version stored on the flash memory Version 4 6 135 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 6 4 Regional Settings The Regional Settings screen enables you to set and view the gateway s internal date and time and to load to the gateway the following configuration files Call Progress Tones coefficient different files for FXS and FXO gateways and Voice Prompts currently not applicable to MediaPack gateways For detailed information on the configuration files refer to Section 7 on page 157 Toconfigure the date and time of the MediaPack take these 3 steps 1 Open the Regional Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Regional Settings the Regional Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 41 Regional Settings Screen Regional Settings Send Call Progress Tones file from your computer to the device Browse Send File S
37. 00 Number of digits to leave Enter the number of digits that you want to leave from the right Note The manipulation rules are executed in the following order 1 Num of stripped digits 2 Number of digits to leave 3 Prefix suffix to add Figure 5 10 on the previous page exemplifies the use of these manipulation rules in the Source Phone Number Manipulation Table for Tel gt IP Calls e When destination number equals 035000 and source number equals 20155 the source number is changed to 97220155 e When source number equals 1001876 it is changed to 587623 e Source number 1234510012001 is changed to 20018 e Source number 3122 is changed to 2312 NPI Select the H 225 Q 931 Number Plan assigned to this entry You can select Unknown 0 Private 9 or E 164 Public 1 The default is Unknown For a detailed list of the available NPI TON values refer to Section 5 5 3 2 on page 76 TON Select the H 225 Q 931 Number Type assigned to this entry e If you selected Unknown as the Number Plan you can select Unknown 0 e f you selected Private as the Number Plan you can select Unknown 0 Level 2 Regional 1 Level 1 Regional 2 PSTN Specific 3 or Level 0 Regional Local 4 e f you selected E 164 Public as the Number Plan you can select Unknown 0 International 1 National 2 Network Specific 3 Subscriber 4 or Abbreviated 6 The default is Unknown Presentation Select Allowed to send Caller ID information whe
38. 152 Version 4 6 199 July 2005 t i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 8 Resetthe gateway Click the Reset button on the main menu bar the Reset screen is displayed Click the button Reset After reset when accessing the Web or Telnet servers use the username and password you configured in the RADIUS database The local system password is still active and is used when the RADIUS server is down gt To configure RADIUS support on the MP 11x using the ini file e Add the following parameters to the ini file For information on modifying the ini file refer to Section 6 2 on page 155 gt EnableRADIUS 1 WebRADIUSLogin 1 RADIUSAuthServerlP IP address of RADIUS server RADIUSAuthPort port number of RADIUS server usually 1812 SharedSecret your shared secret HTTPSOnly 1 VV ON ON WV MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 200 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 12 3 Network Port Usage The following table lists the default TCP UDP network port numbers used by the MediaPack Where relevant the table lists the ini file parameters that control the port usage and provide source IP address filtering capabilities Port Number 2 23 68 80 161 443 500 1719 1720 1720 4000 4010 and up 4001 4011 and up 4002 4012 and up random 32767 random 32767 random 32767 random 32767 random 32767 random 32767 12 Security MP 11x Only Table 12 1 Default TCP UDP
39. 245 connection Default 30 seconds Enables disables the automatic mute of DTMF digits when out of band DTMF transmission is used 0 Auto mute is used default 1 No automatic mute of in band DTMF When DisableAutoDTMFMute 1 the DTMF transport type is set according to the parameter DTMFTransportType and the DTMF digits aren t muted if out of band DTMF mode is selected This enables the sending of DTMF digits in band transparent of RFC 2833 in addition to out of band DTMF messages Note Usually this mode is not recommended Defines that the T 38 packets are sent received using the same port as RTP packets 0 Use the RTP port 2 to send receive T 38 packets default 1 Use the same port as the RTP port to send receive T 38 packets Defines the metering tone 12 kHz or 16 kHz that is detected by FXO gateways and generated by FXS gateways 0 12 kHz metering tone default 1 16 kHz metering tone Note Suitable 12 kHz or 16 KHz coeff file must be used for both FXS and FXO gateways 107 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 28 Protocol Definition ini File Parameters continues on pages 107 to 108 Parameter PolarityReversalType CurrentDisconnectDuratio n CurrentDisconnectDefault Threshold TelDisconnectCode TimeToSampleAnalogLine Voltage AnalogCallerIDTimimgMo de Description Defines the voltage change slope during polarity reversal or wink 0 Soft default
40. 95 xyz CON INIT QOS UNKNOWN PL percent 0 DELAY msec 0 DNS UNRESOLVED UNUSED ENTRY UNUSED ENTRY MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 138 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Column Name IP Address Host Name Connectivity Method Connectivity Status Quality Status Quality Info DNS Status Table 5 45 IP Connectivity Parameters Description IP address defined in the destination IP address field in the Tel to IP Routing table or IP address that is resolved from the host name defined in the destination IP address field in the Tel to IP Routing table Host name or IP address defined in the destination IP address field in the Tel to IP Routing table The method according to which the destination IP address is queried periodically currently only by ping Displays the status of the IP address connectivity according to the method in the Connectivity Method field Can be one of the following e OK Remote side responds to periodic connectivity queries e Lost Remote side didn t respond for a short period e Fail Remote side doesn t respond e init Connectivity queries not started e g IP address not resolved e Disable The connectivity option is disabled AltRoutingTel2IPMode equals 0 or 2 Determines the QoS according to packet loss and delay of the IP address Can be one of the following e Unknown Recent qua
41. Address Note Delete all rows to allow access from any IP address Add a new IP address authorized to connect to the device s web and telnet interfaces i New Authorized IP Address 2 Toadd anew authorized IP address in the New Authorized IP Address field enter the required IP address refer to Note 1 below and click the button Add New Address the IP address you entered is added as a new entry to the Web amp Telnet Access List table 3 Todelete authorized IP addresses check the Delete Row checkbox in the rows of the IP addresses you want to delete refer to Note 2 below and click the button Delete Selected Addresses the IP addresses are removed from the table and can no longer access the Web amp Telnet interfaces 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 The first authorized IP address you add must be your own terminal s IP address If it isn t further access from your terminal is denied Delete your terminal s IP address from the Web amp Telnet Access List last If it is deleted before the last access from your terminal is denied from the point of its deletion on Table 5 32 Web amp Telnet Access List ini File Parameter Parameter Name in ini File Parameter Format WebAccessList x WebAccessList 0 10 13 2 66 WebAccessList 1 10 13 77 7 The default value is 0 0 0 0 the gateway can be accessed from any IP address Note This parameter ca
42. Alarm OID Default Severity Event Type Probable Cause Alarm Text Status Changes Condition Alarm Status Note Condition Alarm Status Alarm OID Default Severity Event Type Probable Cause Alarm Text Status Changes Condition Alarm Status Additional Info MediaPack H 323 Table E 2 acBoardEvResettingBoard Alarm Trap User resetting board When a soft reset is triggered via the Web interface or SNMP Critical After raise Status stays critical until reboot A clear trap is not sent A network administrator has taken action to reset the device No corrective action is required Table E 3 acBoardCallResourcesAlarm Alarm Trap acBoardCallResourcesAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 8 Major processingErrorAlarm softwareError 46 Call resources alarm Number of free channels exceeds the predefined RAI high threshold Major To enable this alarm the RAI mechanism must be activated EnableRAI 1 Number of free channels falls below the predefined RAI ow threshold Cleared Table E 4 acBoardControllerFailureAlarm Alarm Trap acBoardControllerFailureAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 9 Minor processingErrorAlarm softwareError 46 Controller failure alarm Gatekeeper has not been found Major The IP address of the lost Gatekeeper Describes the configuration of the gateway FallBack to internal routing used and or RedundantGK enabled Condition Gatekeeper
43. Auto Negotiate default For detailed information on Ethernet interface configuration refer to Section 9 1 on page 179 Enables disables the Network Address Translation NAT mechanism 0 Enabled 1 Disabled default Note The compare operation that is performed on the IP address is enabled by default and is controlled by the parameter EnablelPAdarTranslation The compare operation that is performed on the UDP port is disabled by default and is controlled by the parameter EnableUDPPortTranslation 0 1 2 0 Disable IP address translation 1 Enable IP address translation for RTP and T 38 packets default When enabled the gateway compares the source IP address of the first incoming packet to the remote IP address stated in the opening of the channel If the two IP addresses don t match the NAT mechanism is activated Consequently the remote IP address of the outgoing stream is replaced by the source IP address of the first incoming packet Note The NAT mechanism must be enabled for this parameter to take effect DisableNAT 0 0 Disable UDP port translation default 1 Enable UDP port translation When enabled the gateway compares the source UDP port of the first incoming packet to the remote UDP port stated in the opening of the channel If the two UDP ports don t match the NAT mechanism is activated Consequently the remote UDP port of the outgoing stream is replaced by the source UDP port of th
44. Bellcore Caller ID sub standard use the parameter BellcoreCaller DTypeOneSubStandard To select the ETSI Caller ID sub standard use the parameter ETSICallerIDT ypeOneSubStandard Note 3 To select the Bellcore MWI sub standard use the parameter BellcoreVMWITypeOneStandard To select the ETSI MWI sub standard use the parameter ETSIVMWITypeOneStandard Message Waiting Indication MWI Parameters Enable MWI EnableMWI MWI Analog Lamp MWIAnalogLamp MWI Display MWIDisplay Stutter Tone Duration StutterToneDuration Version 4 6 Disable 0 Disabled default Enable 1 H 450 7 MWI service is enabled This parameter is applicable only to FXS gateways Note The MediaPack only supports reception of MWI Disable 0 Disable default Enable 1 Enable visual Message Waiting Indication supplies line voltage of approximately 100 VDC to activate the glow lamp on a phone that is equipped with an MWI lamp This parameter is applicable only to FXS gateways Disable 0 Disabled default Enable 1 Enable digital MWI using Caller ID Interface If enabled the gateway generates an MWI FSK message that is displayed on the MWI display This parameter is applicable only to FXS gateways Duration in msec of the played stutter dial tone that indicates waiting message s The default is 2000 2 seconds The range is 1000 to 60000 The Stutter tone is played instead of a regular Dial tone
45. Board ini File Parameters continues on pages 120 to 123 ini File Parameter Name HTTPSRootFileName HTTPSCertFileName BootP and TFTP Parameters Valid Range and Description Defines the name of the HTTPS trusted root certificate file to be loaded via TFTP The file must be in base64 encoded PEM Privacy Enhanced Mail format The valid range is a 47 character string Note This parameter is only relevant when the gateway is loaded via BootP TFTP For information on loading this file via the Embedded Web Server refer to the Security section in the User s Manual Defines the name of the HTTPS server certificate file to be loaded via TFTP The file must be in base64 encoded PEM format The valid range is a 47 character string Note This parameter is only relevant when the gateway is loaded via BootP TFTP For information on loading this file via the Embedded Web Server refer to the Security section in the User s Manual The BootP parameters are special Hidden parameters Once defined and saved in the flash memory they are used even if they don t appear in the ini file BootPRetries BootPSelectiveEnable BootPDelay MediaPack H 323 User s Manual This parameter is used to Note This parameter only takes effect from the next reset of the gateway Set the number of BootP requests the Set the number of DHCP packets the gateway sends during start up The gateway sends gateway stops sending BootP requests After all packe
46. Canada approved the equipment Network Compatibility The products support the Telecom networks in EU that comply with TBR21 Telecommunication Safety The safety status of each port is declared and detailed in the table below Ports Safety Status Ethernet 100 Base TX SELV FXO TNV 3 TNV 3 Circuit whose normal operating voltages exceeds the limits for an SELV circuit under normal operating conditions and on which over voltages from Telecommunication Networks are possible SELV Safety extra low voltage circuit Version 4 6 269 July 2005 my bi AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 MediaPack FXO Notice The MediaPack FXO Output Tones and DTMF level should not exceed 9 dBm AudioCodes setting 23 in order to comply with FCC 68 TIA EIA IS 968 and TBR 21 The maximum allowed gain between any 2 ports connected to the PSTN should be set to 0 dB in order to comply with FCC 68 TIA EIA IS 968 Signal power limitation FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference
47. Configuring the MediaPack 5 6 3 Restoring and Backing Up the Gateway Configuration The Configuration File screen enables you to restore load a new ini file to the gateway or to back up make a copy of the VoIP gateway ini file and store it in a directory on your computer the current configuration the gateway is using Back up your configuration if you want to protect your VoIP gateway programming The backup ini file includes only those parameters that were modified and contain other than default values Restore your configuration if the VoIP gateway has been replaced or has lost its programming information you can restore the VoIP gateway configuration from a previous backup or from a newly created ini file To restore the VoIP gateway configuration from a previous backup you must have a backup of the VoIP gateway information stored on your computer gt Torestore or back up the ini file e Open the Configuration File screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Configuration File the Configuration File screen is displayed Figure 5 40 Configuration File Screen Configuration File Get the ni file from the device to your computer Send the ini file from your computer to the device Browse The device will perform a Reset after sending the ini file To back up the ini file take these 4 steps Click the Get ini File button the File Download window opens Click the Save button the Save As
48. FXS FXO ports 5 FXS FXS FXO label 6 RS 232 9 pin RS 232 status port for Cable Wiring of the RS 232 refer to Figure 3 9 on page 33 Table 2 4 Indicator LEDs on the MP 10x Rear Panel Label Type Color State Meaning Yelow ON Ethernet port receiving data ETH 1 Ethernet Status Read o ON Collision Note that the Ethernet LEDs are located within the RJ 45 socket Version 4 6 23 July 2005 r fA AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 2 1 2 2 MP 124 Rear Panel Figure 2 4 illustrates the rear panel layout of the MP 124 For descriptions of the MP 124 rear panel components refer to Table 2 5 For the functionality of the MP 124 rear panel LEDs refer to Table 2 6 Figure 2 4 MP 124 FXS Rear Panel Connectors aL ae LTT Ts ANALOG LINES 1 24 Table 2 5 MP 124 Rear Panel Component Descriptions Item Label Component Description 1 Protective earthing screw mandatory for all installations 100 250 V 2 50 60 Hz 2A AC power supply socket 3 ANALOG LINES 1 24 50 pin Telco for 1 to 24 analog lines Data Cntrl Ready LED indicators described in Table 2 6 5 RS 232 9 pin RS 232 status port for Cable Wiring of the RS 232 refer to Figure 3 9 on page 33 6 Eth 1 Eth 2 Dual 10 100 Base TX Ethernet connections Note The Dual In line Package DIP switch located on the MP 124 rear panel supplied with some of the units is not functional and should not be used The Ethernet LEDs are located within ea
49. FaxModemBypassBasicRtpPacketinterval NSE payload type for Cisco Bypass compatible mode The valid range is 96 127 The default value is 105 Note Cisco gateways usually use NSE payload type of 100 Determines the Bell modem transport method 0 Transparent default 2 Bypass 3 Transparent with events Selects the Bellcore Caller ID sub standard 0 Between rings default 1 Not ring related Selects the ETSI Caller ID Type 1 sub standard FXS only 0 ETSI between rings default 1 ETSI before ring DT AS 2 ETSI before ring RP AS 3 ETSI before ring LR DT AS 4 ETSI not ring related DT AS 5 ETSI not ring related RP AS 6 ETSI not ring related LR DT AS Selects the ETSI Visual Message Waiting Indication VMWI Type 1 sub standard 0 ETSI VMWI between rings default 1 ETSI VMWI before ring DT AS 2 ETSI VMWI before ring RP AS 3 ETSI VMWI before ring LR DT AS 4 ETSI VMWI not ring related DT AS 5 ETSI VMWI not ring related RP AS 6 ETSI VMWI not ring related LR DT AS 133 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 44 Channel Settings ini File Parameters continues on pages 132 to 134 ini File Parameter Name BellcoreVMWITypeOneS Selects the Bellcore VMWI sub standard tandard 0 Between rings default 1 Not ring related Valid Range and Description MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 134 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5
50. Figure 5 56 Cancel The MediaPack resets utilizing the files previously stored in flash memory Note that these are NOT the files you loaded in the previous Wizard steps Figure 5 55 FINISH Screen CMP file INI file file You have finished the upgrade process Now click the Reset button to burn the configuration to the device flash memory and restart the device or click the Cancel button to restart the device with the previously flash burned configuration Version 4 6 149 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Figure 5 56 End Process Screen CMP Version ID 440 0 0 Call Progress Tone File Name call progress congestion analog dat FXS Coeficient File Name fxs dat 9 Click the End Process button the Quick Setup screen appears and the full Web application is reactivated 5 8 2 Auxiliary Files The Auxiliary Files screen enables you to load to the gateway the following files Call Progress Tones coefficient and Prerecorded Tones PRT The Voice Prompts file is currently not applicable to the MediaPack For detailed information on these files refer to Section 7 on page 157 For information on deleting these files from the MediaPack refer to Section 5 7 4 on page 145 Table 5 49 presents a brief description of each auxiliary file Table 5 49 Auxiliary Files Descriptions File Type Description Coefficient This file different file for FXS and FXO gateways contains
51. Gatekeeper Redundancy the gateway can work with up to three Gatekeepers If there is no response from the current Gatekeeper the gateway tries to communicate with the other Gatekeepers When a new Gatekeeper is found the gateway continues working with it until the next Gatekeeper failure To use Gatekeeper Redundancy you must enter an IP address in the Second Gatekeeper IP Address field If you are using three Gatekeepers you also need to enter an IP address in the Third Gatekeeper IP Address field IP address or domain name of the first redundant Gatekeeper you are using Enter the IP address in dotted format notation for example 192 10 1 255 Note 1 This parameter is available only if you select Yes in the Gatekeeper Redundancy field Note 2 When using a domain name you must enter a Primary DNS server or alternatively define this name in the Internal DNS Table ini file note 1 The IP address of the first redundant Gatekeeper is defined by the second repetition of the ini file parameter GatekeeperlP ini file note 2 Use this parameter to define the ID of the first redundant Gatekeeper GatekeeperlP IP ID String used to identify the first redundant Gatekeeper Used in Registration Request RRQ messages The default value is an empty string Note This parameter is available only if you select Yes in the Gatekeeper Redundancy field ini file note The ID of the first redundant Gatekeeper is defined by the
52. ID to Tel Gateway Port Caller ID Port 1 Disable Port 2 Enable Port 3 Enable Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 2 Inthe Caller ID field select one of the following gt Enable Enables Caller ID generation FXS or detection FXO for the specific port gt Disable Caller ID generation FXS or detection FXO for the specific port is disabled gt Empty Caller ID generation FXS or detection FXO for the specific port is determined according to the parameter EnableCallerlD described in Table 5 6 Repeat step 2 for each port Click the Submit button to save your changes 5 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 24 Authentication ini File Parameter Parameter Name in ini File EnableCallerlID X MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Parameter Format EnableCallerlD Port Caller ID Caller ID 0 Disabled default 1 Enabled If not configured use the global parameter EnableCallerID Note 1 The numbering of ports starts with O Note 2 This parameter can appear up to eight times for MP 108 and up to 24 times for MP 124 100 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 8 5 Call Forward The VoIP gateway allows you to forward incoming IP gt Tel calls based on the VoIP gateway port to which the call is route
53. IP address of the gateway is not known e The Web browser has been inadvertently turned off e The Web browser password has been forgotten e The gateway has encountered a fault that cannot be recovered using the Web browser The BootP is normally used to configure the device s initial parameters Once this information has been provided the BootP is no longer needed All parameters are stored in non volatile memory and used when the BootP is not accessible B 2 An Overview of BootP BootP is a protocol defined in RFC 951 and RFC 1542 that enables an internet device to discover its own IP address and the IP address of a BootP on the network and to obtain the files from that utility that need to be loaded into the device to function A device that uses BootP when it powers up broadcasts a BootRequest message on the network A BootP on the network receives this message and generates a BootReply The BootReply indicates the IP address that should be used by the device and specifies an IP address from which the unit may load configuration files using Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP described in RFC 906 and RFC 1350 B 3 Key Features e Internal BootP supporting hundreds of entities e Internal TFTP e Contains all required data for our products in predefined format e Provides a TFTP address enabling network separation of TFTP and BootP utilities e Tools to backup and restore the local database e Templates e User define
54. MP 10x FXO gateways respectively This adaptation is performed by modifying the telephony interface characteristics such as DC and AC impedance feeding current and ringing voltage The coeff dat configuration file is produced specifically for each market after comprehensive performance analysis and testing and can be modified on request The current file supports US line type of 600 ohm AC impedance and for FXS 40 V RMS ringing voltage for REN 2 To load the coeff dat file to the MediaPack use the Embedded Web Server Section 5 8 2 on page 150 or alternatively specify the FXS FXO coeff dat file name in the gateway s ini file refer to Section 5 8 2 1 on page 151 The Coeff dat file consists of a set of parameters for the signal processor of the loop interface devices This parameter set provides control of the following AC and DC interface parameters e DC battery feed characteristics e AC impedance matching e Transmit gain e Receive gain e Hybrid balance e Frequency response in transmit and receive direction e Hook thresholds e Ringing generation and detection parameters This means for example that changing impedance matching or hybrid balance doesn t require hardware modifications so that a single device is able to meet requirements for different markets The digital design of the filters and gain stages also ensures high reliability no drifts over temperature or time and simple variations between different line typ
55. MWI Parameters Disable Bellcore Enable MAI Disable MWI Analog Lamp Disable MWI Display Disable Stutter Tone Duration 2000 Configure the supplementary services parameters according to Table 5 6 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page T52 Version 4 6 July 2005 bi AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 6 Supplementary Services Parameters continues on pages 68 to 69 Parameter Description Enable Hold Disable 0 Disable the Hold service default EnableHold Enable 1 Enable the Hold service H 450 4 If the Hold service is enabled a user can activate Hold or Unhold using the hook flash On receiving a Hold request the remote party is put on hold and hears the hold tone Note To use the H 450 Supplementary Services the gateways at both ends must support these services Enable Transfer Disable 0 Disable the Call Transfer service default EnableTransfer Enable 1 Enable the Call Transfer service H 450 2 If the Transfer service is enabled the user can activate Transfer using hook flash signaling If this service is enabled the remote party performs the call transfer Note To use the H 450 Supplementary Services the gateways at both ends must support these services Transfer Prefix Defined string that is added as a prefix to the transferred for
56. MediaPack refer to Section 3 on page 27 2 1 MP 1xx Physical Description 2 1 1 MP 1xx Front Panel Figure 2 1 and Figure 2 2 illustrate the front layout of the MP 108 almost identical on MP 104 and MP 102 and MP 124 respectively Refer to Section 2 1 1 1 for meaning of the front panel buttons refer to Section 2 1 1 2 for functionality of the front panel LEDs Figure 2 1 MP 108 Front Panel Figure 2 2 MP 124 Front Panel Version 4 6 41 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 2 1 1 1 MP 1xx Front Panel Buttons Table 2 1 lists and describes the front panel buttons on the MP 1xx Table 2 1 Front Panel Buttons on the MP 1xx Type Function Comment Press the reset button with a paper clip or any other similar Reset the MP Ue pointed object until the gateway is reset Reset button Restore the MP 1xx parameters to their factory default values Refer to Section 10 1 on page 183 2 1 1 2 MP 1xx Front Panel LEDs Table 2 2 lists and describes the front panel LEDs on the MP 1xx Note MP 1xx FXS FXO media gateways feature almost identical front panel LEDs they only differ in the number of channel LEDs that correspond to the number of channels Table 2 2 Indicator LEDs on the MP 1xx Front Panel Label Type Color State Function ON Device Powered self test OK Ready Device Status Blinking Software Loading Initialization ON Malfunction Ethernet Link ON Valid 10 100 Base TX Ethernet connection
57. Play Tone type Dial Tone Analyze recorded tone v Play through Status The gateway detected Dial Tone Tones analyzed Dial Tone auto Busy Tone aut Ringing Tone Reorder Tone ei AudioCodes Cancel Check the play through check box to hear the tones through your PC speakers Press the Go offhook button enter a number to dial in the Dial field and press the Dial button When you re ready to record press the Start Recording button when the desired tone is complete press Stop Recording The recorded tone is saved as cpt manual tone pcm Note Due to some PC audio hardware limitations you may hear clicks in play through mode It is safe to ignore these clicks 4 Selectthe tone type from the drop down list and press Analyze recorded tone the analyzed tone is added to the Tones analyzed list at the bottom of the screen It is possible to record and analyze several different tones for the same tone type e g different types of busy signal Repeat the process for more tones as necessary When you re finished adding tones to the list press Next to generate a Call Progress Tones ini file and terminate the wizard D 2 6 The Call Progress Tones iniFile After the Call Progress Tones detection is complete a text file named call progress tones ini is created in the same directory as the directory in which the CPTWizard exe is located This file contains e Inform
58. Section 14 on page 205 and to receive error notification messages gt To establish a serial communications link with the MediaPack via the RS 232 port take these 2 steps 1 Connect the RS 232 port to your PC For the MP 1xx refer to Section 3 1 4 1 on page 33 For the MP 11x refer to Section 3 2 5 1 on page 38 Version 4 6 183 July 2005 r 10 3 AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 2 Use a serial communication software e g HyperTerminal with the following communications port settings gt Baud Rate 115 200 bps MP 1xx 9 600 bps MP 11x gt Data bits 8 gt Parity None Stop bits 1 gt Flow control Hardware Note that after resetting the gateway the information shown in Figure 10 1 below appears on the terminal screen This information can be used to determine possible MediaPack initialization problems such as incorrectly defined or undefined local IP address subnet mask etc Figure 10 1 RS 232 Status and Error Messages MAC address 00 90 8F 01 00 9E Local IP address ID 1 37 6 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway IP address 10 1 1 5 TFTP server IP address 10 1 1 167 Boot file name ram35136 cmp INI file name mpl08 ini Call agent IP address 10 1 1 18 Log server IP address 0 0 0 0 Full Half Duplex state HALF DUPLEX Flash Software Burning state OFF Serial Debug Mode OFF Lan Debug Mode OFF BootLoad Version 1 75 Starting TFTP download Done MP108 Versio
59. The Product Name text string can be modified according to OEMs specific requirements e To replace AudioCodes default product name with a text string via the Web Interface modify the two ini file parameters in Table 10 4 according to the procedure described in Section 10 5 4 on page 192 e To replace AudioCodes default product name with a text string via the ini file add modify the two ini file parameters in Table 10 4 according to the procedure described in Section 6 2 on page 155 Table 10 4 Web Appearance Customizable ini File Parameters Parameter Description UseProductName 0 Don t change the product name default 1 Enable product name change UserProductName Text string that replaces the product name The default is MediaPack The string can be up to 29 characters Version 4 6 191 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 10 5 4 Modifying ini File Parameters via the Web AdminPage To modify inifile parameters via the AdminPage take these 6 steps 1 Access the MediaPack Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 3 on page 46 2 Inthe URL field append the suffix AdminPage note that it s case sensitive to the IP address e g http 10 1 229 17 AdminPage 3 Click the INI Parameters option the INI Parameters screen is displayed shown in Figure 10 7 Figure 10 7 INI Parameters Screen Parameter name Enter value Parameter name Enter value 3GDelErorSDU Apply new value OUTPUT W
60. To enable Call Waiting e Set EnableCallWaiting 1 e Set HookFlashOption 0 e Set EnableHold 1 e Define the Call Waiting indication and Call Waiting Ringback tones in the Call Progress Tones file e Toconfigure the Call Waiting indication tone cadence modify the following parameters NumberOfWaitingIndications WaitingBeepDuration and TimeBetweenWaitingIndications e Toconfigure a delay interval before a Call Waiting Indication is played to the currently busy port use the parameter TimeBeforeWaitingIndication This enables the caller to hang up before disturbing the called party with Call Waiting Indications Applicable only to FXS gateways Both the calling and the called sides are supported by FXS gateways the FXO gateways support only the calling side 8 1 6 Message Waiting Indication MWI MediaPack FXS gateways can accept an H 450 7 message that indicates on waiting messages Users are informed of these messages by a stutter dial tone The stutter and confirmation tones are defined in the CPT file refer to Section 16 1 on page 223 If the MWI display is configured the number of waiting messages is also displayed If MWI lamp is configured the phone s lamp on a phone that is equipped with an MWI lamp is lit To configure MWI set the following parameters e EnableMWI e StutterToneDuration e MWIAnalogLamp e MWIDisplay e CallerlDType determines the standard for detection of MWI si
61. Type of Number The Type of Number parameter is composed of two columns Number Plan and Number Type Select the H 225 Q 931 Number Plan assigned to this entry You can select Unknown 0 Private 9 or E 164 Public 1 The default is Unknown Select the H 225 Q 931 Number Type assigned to this entry Note that the values available for the Number Type column are determined according to the value selected in the Number Plan column e Ifyou selected Unknown as the Number Plan you can select Unknown 0 e f you selected Private as the Number Plan you can select Unknown 0 Level 2 Regional 1 Level 1 Regional 2 PISN Specific 3 or Level 0 Regional Local 4 e Ifyou selected E 164 Public as the Number Plan you can select Unknown 0 International 1 National 2 Network Specific 3 Subscriber 4 or Abbreviated 6 The default is Unknown For a detailed list of the available NPI TON values refer to Section 5 5 3 2 on page 76 Note The Type of Number information is used only if the gateway is configured to register with PartyNumber Prefixes GwRegistrType 3 or 4 Parameter Name in ini File Parameter Format RegistrationPrefix RegistrationPrefix lt Gatekeeper Registration Prefix gt lt Number Plan gt lt Number Type gt For example RegistrationPrefix 10 1 3 Note 1 This parameter can appear up to 10 times Note 2 The registration prefixes can be entered as a single value or as a range of numb
62. Use four standard rack screws to attach the device to the rack These screws are not provided with the device Version 4 6 29 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 Figure 3 3 MP 124 with Brackets for Rack Installation 3 1 3 4 Mounting the MP 10x on a Wall The MP 10x is mounted on a wall by the addition of two short equal length supplied brackets The MP 102 with brackets for wall mount is shown in Figure 3 4 gt 1 Bos m amp To mount the MP 10x on a wall take these 7 steps Remove the screw on the side of the device that is nearest the bottom and the front panel Insert the peg on the bracket into the third air vent down on the column of air vents nearest the front panel Swivel the bracket so that the side of the bracket is aligned with the base of the device and the hole in the bracket line up with the empty screw hole Attach the bracket using one of the screws provided in the device package Repeat steps 1 to 4 to attach the second bracket to the other side of the device Position the device on the wall with the base of the device next to the wall Use four screws to attach the device to the wall These screws are not provided with the device Figure 3 4 MP 102 Wall Mount MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 30 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 3 Installing the MediaPack 3 1 4 Cabling the MP 1xx Verify that you have the cables listed under column Cable in Table 3 1 before beginning to c
63. activity LEDs Lifeline Special order option Automatic cut through of a single analog line in case of power failure Connectors amp Switches Rear Panel 8 Analog Lines MP 118 8 RJ 11 connectors 4 Analog Lines MP 114 4 RJ 11 connectors 2 Analog Lines MP 112 2 RJ 11 connectors MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 232 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual AC power supply socket Ethernet RS 232 Reset Button Physical Dimensions HxWxD Environmental Mounting Electrical Type Approvals Safety and EMC Management Configuration Management and Maintenance All specifications in this document are subject to change without prior notice Version 4 6 100 240 0 3A max 10 100 Base TX RJ 45 Console PS 2 port Resets the MP 11x 42 x 172 x 220 mm Operational 5 to 40 C 41 to 104 F Storage 25 to 70 C 77 to 158 F Humidity 10 to 90 non condensing Rack mount Desktop Wall mount 100 240 VAC Nominal 50 60 Hz UL 60950 FCC part 15 Class B CE Mark EN 60950 EN 55022 EN 55024 Gateway configuration using Web browser CLI or ini files SNMP v2c Syslog per RFC 3164 Local RS 232 terminal Web Management via HTTP or HTTPS Telnet 233 17 Selected Technical Specifications July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 234 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual A MediaPack H 323 Software Kit Appendix A Medi
64. always a sample in the buffer for the coder to use If there is more than 70 msec of delay at any time during the call the packet arrives too late The coder tries to access a frame and is not able to find one The coder must produce a voice sample even if a frame is not available It therefore compensates for the missing packet by adding a Bad Frame Interpolation BFI packet This loss is then flagged as the buffer being too small The dynamic algorithm then causes the size of the buffer to increase for the next voice session The size of the buffer may decrease again if the gateway notices that the buffer is not filling up as much as expected At no time does the buffer decrease to less than the minimum size configured by the Minimum delay parameter Special Optimization Factor Value 13 One of the purposes of the Jitter Buffer mechanism is to compensate for clock drift If the two sides of the VoIP call are not synchronized to the same clock source one RTP source generates packets at a lower rate causing under runs at the remote Jitter Buffer In normal operation optimization factor O to 12 the Jitter Buffer mechanism detects and compensates for the clock drift by occasionally dropping a voice packet or by adding a BFI packet Fax and modem devices are sensitive to small packet losses or to added BFI packets Therefore to achieve better performance during modem and fax calls the Optimization Factor should be set to 13 In this special mode t
65. appear up to 5 times Note 2 The coder name is case sensitive You can select the following coders g711Alaw64k G 711 A law g711Ulaw64k G 711 u law 97231 G 723 1 6 3 kbps default 9g7231r53 G 723 1 5 3 kbps g 26 G 726 ADPCM 16 kbps Payload Type 35 g 26r16 G 726 ADPCM 16 kbps Cisco mode PT 23 g 26r24 G 726 ADPCM 24 kbps g 26r32 G 726 ADPCM 32 kbps PT 2 g 26r40 G 726 ADPCM 40 kbps g 29 G 729A g729 AnnexB G 729 Annex B The RTP packetization period ptime in msec depends on the selected coder name and can have the following values G 711 family 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 default 20 G 729 family 10 20 30 40 50 60 default 20 G 723 family 30 60 90 default 30 G 726 family 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 default 20 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 58 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 1 4 DTMF amp Dialing Parameters Use this screen to configure parameters that are associated with DTMF and dialing gt Toconfigure the dialing parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the DTMF amp Dialing screen Protocol Management menu gt Protocol Definition submenu gt DTMF amp Dialing option the DTMF amp Dialing parameters screen is displayed Figure 5 6 DTMF amp Dialing Parameters Screen DTMF amp Dialing Rx DTMF Option H 245 User Input 1st Tx D
66. as shown on the diagram below MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 174 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Telephony Capabilities Figure 8 1 MediaPack FXS amp FXO Remote IP Extension FXO MediaPack 10 1 10 2 FXS MediaPack 10 1 10 3 8 12 4 1 Dialing from Remote Extension Phone connected to MP 108 FXS gt 1 of ge amp To configure the call take these 6 steps Lift the handset to hear the dial tone coming from PBX as if the phone was connected directly to PBX MP 108 FXS and MP 108 FXO establish a voice path connection from the phone to the PBX immediately the phone handset is raised Dial the destination number the DTMF digits are sent over IP directly to the PBX All tones heard are generated from the PBX such as Ringback busy or fast busy tones There is one to one mapping between MP 108 FXS ports and PBX lines The call is disconnected when the phone connected to the MP 108 FXS goes onhook 8 12 4 2 Dialing from other PBX Line or from PSTN Version 4 6 To configure the call take these 5 steps Dial the PBX subscriber number the same way as if the user s phone was connected directly to PBX Immediately as PBX rings into MP 108 FXO the ring signal is send to phone connected to MP 108 FXS Once the phone s handset connected to MP 108 FXS is raised the MP 108 FXO seizes the PBX line and the voice path is established between the phone and the PBX line There
67. be changed on the fly and requires a gateway reset Note All gateways that participate in the same ThroughPacket session must use the same L1L1ComplexRxUDPPort 5 6 1 6 Configuring the IP Routing Table The IP routing table is used by the gateway to determine IP routing rules Before sending an IP packet the gateway searches this table for an entry that matches the requested destination host network If such entry is found the gateway sends the packet to the indicated router If no explicit entry is found the packet is sent to the default gateway configured in Network Settings gt IP Settings screen Up to 50 routing entries are available gt Toconfigure the IP Routing table take these 3 steps 1 Open the IP Routing Table screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings gt IP Routing Table option the IP Routing Table screen is displayed MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 116 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Figure 5 33 IP Routing Table Screen Routing Table Delete Row Destination IP Address Destination Mask Gateway IP Address Hop Count Network Type TIL O 0 33 0 0 255 255 0 0 8 le p ow E Add a new table entry Destination IP Address Destination Mask Gateway IP Address Hop Count Network Type L wn 2 5 0 928 7 o Note All fields should have a value 2 Use the Add a new table entry pane to
68. call If the remote party doesn t answer the call and the ringing signal stops for Ring Detection Timeout the FXO gateway Releases the IP call Usually set to a value between 5 to 8 The default is 8 seconds Reorder Tone Duration Busy or Reorder tone duration seconds the FXO gateway plays before releasing TimeForReorderTone the line The valid range is 0 to 100 The default is 10 seconds Usually after playing a Reorder Busy tone for the specified duration the FXS gateway starts playing an Offhook Warning tone Note 1 Selection of Busy or Reorder tone is performed according to the release cause received from IP Note 2 Refer also to the parameter CutThrough described in Table 5 5 Answer Supervision Yes 1 FXO gateway sends Connect message when speech fax modem is EnableVoiceDetection detected No 0 Connect is sent immediately after the FXO gateway finishes dialing default Note 1 To activate this feature set DSPVersionTemplateNumber parameter to 2 or 3 Usually this feature is used only with Fast Connect to establish voice path before the call is answered Note 2 This feature is applicable only to One Stage dialing Version 4 6 105 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 27 FXO Parameters continues on pages 104 to 106 Parameter Rings before Detecting Caller ID RingsBeforeCallerID Send Metering Message to IP SendMetering2IP DisconnectOnBusyTone
69. can be replaced either with a different logo image file refer to Section 10 5 1 1 below or with a text string refer to Section 10 5 1 2 on page 190 Note that when the main corporation logo is replaced AudioCodes logo on the left bar refer to Figure 5 2 and in the Software Upgrade Wizard refer to Section 5 8 1 on page 146 disappear Also note that the browser s title bar is automatically updated with the string assigned to the WebLogoText parameter when AudioCodes default logo is not used 10 5 1 1 Replacing the Main Corporate Logo with an Image File Note Use a gif jpg or jpeg file for the logo image It is important that the image file has a fixed height of 59 pixels the width can be configured The size of the image files logo and background is limited each to 64 kbytes gt To replace the default logo with your own corporate image via the Web Interface take these 7 steps 1 Access the MediaPack Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 3 on page 46 2 Inthe URL field append the suffix AdminPage note that it s case sensitive to the IP address e g http 10 1 229 17 AdminPage 3 Click Image Load to Device the Image load screen is displayed shown in Figure 10 6 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 188 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 10 Advanced System Capabilities Figure 10 6 Image load Screen Send Logo Image file from your computer to the device Browse Send File
70. characters for H 235 security The password string is used for the registration and authentication process with a Gatekeeper Don t Play 0 Ringback tone isn t played to the IP side of the call default Play 1 Ringback tone is played to the IP side of the call When you select Play 1 the PI Indicator is set to 8 in the H 225 Alert message PI 8 Don t Play 0 Ringback Tone isn t played Play Local 1 Local Ringback Tone is played to the Tel side of the call when H 225 Alert message is received Prefer IP 2 Ringback Tone is played to the Tel side of the call only if Progress Indicator PI is Not received in H 225 Alert message default According to Fast Start 3 Ringback tone is played either for H 323 Normal connect or when fast start confirmation is received for the first time in Connect message The gateway plays Ringback tone after an H 225 Alert is received but only in H 323 Normal connect procedure For Fast Start procedure the gateway doesn t play Ringback tone MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 52 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 5 1 2 Gatekeeper Parameters 5 Configuring the MediaPack Use this screen to configure parameters that are associated with Gatekeepers gt Toconfigure the Gatekeeper parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the Gatekeeper parameters screen Protocol Management menu gt Protocol Definition submenu gt Gatekeeper option the Gat
71. cmp ini and all other configuration files that were previously stored in flash memory Note that these are NOT the files you loaded in the previous Wizard steps gt Click Reset the MediaPack resets utilizing the new cmp and ini file you loaded up to now as well as utilizing the other configuration files gt Click Back the Load a cmp file screen is reverted to refer to Figure 5 51 Click Next the Load a CPT File screen opens refer to Figure 5 54 Loading a new CPT file or any other auxiliary file listed in the Wizard is optional MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 148 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Figure 5 54 Load a CPT File Screen Load a CPT file from your computer to the device Browse Senario Call Progress Tone File 7 Follow the same procedure you followed when loading the ini file refer to Step 6 The same procedure applies to the Load a VP file not applicable to the MediaPack gateway screen and Load a coefficient file screen 8 Inthe FINISH screen refer to Figure 5 55 the Next button is disabled Complete the upgrade process by clicking Reset or Cancel Reset The MediaPack burns the newly loaded files to flash memory The Burning files to flash memory screen appears Wait for the burn to finish When it finishes the End Process screen appears displaying the burned configuration files refer to
72. denied refer to Section 5 6 1 4 on page 114 e Use HTTPS when accessing the Web interface Set HTTPSOnly to 1 to allow only HTTPS traffic and block port 80 If you don t need the Web interface disable the Web server DisableWebTask e f you use Telnet do not use the default port 23 Use SSL mode to protect Telnet traffic from network sniffing e f you use SNMP do not leave the community strings at their default values as they can be easily guessed by hackers refer to Section 15 7 1 on page 215 e Use a firewall to protect your VoIP network from external attacks Network robustness may be compromised if the network is exposed to Denial of Service DoS attacks DoS attacks are mitigated by Stateful firewalls Do not allow unauthorized traffic to reach the MediaPack 12 5 Legal Notice By default the MediaPack supports export grade 40 bit and 56 bit encryption due to US government restrictions on the export of security technologies To enable 128 bit and 256 bit encryption on your device contact your AudioCodes representative This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 202 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 13 Diagnostics 13 Diagnostics Several diagnostic tools are provided enabling you to identify correct f
73. dns name corp customer com This name is used to access the device and should therefore be listed in the server certificate 2 Access the following URL case sensitive https dns name corp customer com SSLCertificateSR Note that you should use the DNS name provided by your network administrator The Certificate Signing Request screen is displayed Figure 12 2 Figure 12 2 Certificate Signing Request Screen SSL Certificate Signing Request Subject Name Copy the certificate signing request and send it to your Certification Authority for signing Send SSL Server Certificate file from your computer to the device Browse Send File Send SSL Trusted Root Certificate Store file from your computer to the device Browse Send file 3 Inthe Subject Name field enter the DNS name and click Generate CSR A textual certificate signing request that contains the SSL device identifier is displayed MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 196 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 12 Security MP 11x Only 4 Copy this text and send it to your security provider the security provider also known as Certification Authority or CA signs this request and send you a server certificate for the device 5 Save the certificate in a file e g cert txt Ensure the file is a plain text file with the BEGIN CERTIFICATE header The figure below is an example of a Base64 Encoded X 509 Certificate
74. equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading Circuit Overloading Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern Reliable Earthing Reliable earthing of rack mounted equipment should be maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit e g use of power strips 3 1 3 2 Installing the MP 10x in a 19 inch Rack The MP 10x is installed into a standard 19 inch rack by the addition of two supplied brackets 1 short 1 long The MP 108 with brackets for rack installation is shown in Figure 3 2 Toinstall the MP 10x in a 19 inch rack take these 9 steps 1 Remove the two screws on one side of the device nearest the front panel 2 Insert the peg on the short bracket into the third air vent down on the column of air vents nearest the front panel 3 Swivel the bracket until the holes in the bracket line up with the two empty screw holes on the device 4 Use the screws found in the devices package to attach the short bracket to the side of the device MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 28 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 3 Insta
75. example tftp 192 168 0 1 filename Note 1 When this parameter is set in the ini file the gateway always loads the cmp file after it is reset Note 2 The cmp file is validated before it is burned to flash The checksum of the cmp file is also compared to the previously burnt checksum to avoid unnecessary resets Specifies the name of the ini file and the location of the server IP address or FQDN from which the gateway loads the ini file The ini file can be loaded using TFTP HTTP or HTTPS MP 11x only For example tftp 192 168 0 1 filename http 192 8 77 13 config lt MAC gt https lt username gt lt password gt lt IP address gt lt file name gt Note 1 When using HTTP or HTTPS the date and time of the ini file are validated Only more recently dated ini files are loaded Note 2 The optional string lt MAC gt is replaced with the gateway s MAC address Therefore the gateway requests an ini file name that contains its MAC address This option enables loading different configurations for specific gateways Specifies the name of a second ini file in addition to IniFileURL and the location of the server IP address or FQDN from which it is loaded http server_nameffile https server_name file Specifies the name of the Prerecorded Tones file and the location of the server IP address or FQDN from which it is loaded http server_nameffile https server_name file Specifies the name of the CPT fi
76. exe supplied with the software package the utility s main screen opens shown in Figure D 1 Click the Process Call Progress Tones File s button the Call Progress Tones screen shown in Figure D 2 opens Figure D 2 Call Progress Tones Conversion Screen Call Progress Tones E x 10 Call Progress Tones File ios Select File a Using File CAM edia Gateway usa_tones ini Output File media gateway usa tones dat User Data Vendor coy Version f 0 Version description Call Progress Tones File CPT version Version 2 v Use dBm units for Tone Levels Make File Click the Select File button that is in the Call Progress Tone File box Navigate to the folder that contains the CPT ini file you want to convert Click the ini file and click the Open button the name and path of both the ini file and the output dat file appears in the fields below the Select File button Enter the Vendor Name Version Number and Version Description in the corresponding required fields under the User Data section Set CPT Version to Version 1 only if you use this utility with a version released before version 4 4 of the device software this field is used to maintain backward compatibility Check the Use dBm units for Tone Levels check box Note that the levels of the Call Progress Tones in the CPT file must be in dBm units Click the Make File button you re prompted that the operatio
77. file contains a set of prerecorded tones to be played by the MediaPack during operation Up to 40 tones totaling approximately one minute can be stored in a single file in flash memory The prerecorded tones raw data PCM or L8 files are prepared offline using standard recording utilities such as CoolEdit and combined into a single file using the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion utility refer to Section D 1 3 on page 254 The raw data files must be recorded with the following characteristics e Coders G 711 A law G 711 p law or Linear PCM e Rate 8 kHz e Resolution 8 bit e Channels mono The generated PRT file can then be loaded to the MediaPack using the BootP TFTP utility refer to Section 5 8 2 1 on page 151 or via the Embedded Web Server Section 5 8 2 on page 150 The prerecorded tones are played repeatedly This enables you to record only part of the tone and play it for the full duration For example if a tone has a cadence of 2 seconds on and 4 seconds off the recorded file should contain only these 6 seconds The PRT module repeatedly plays this cadence for the configured duration Similarly a continuous tone can be played by repeating only part of it Version 4 6 227 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 16 3 The Coefficient Configuration File The Coeff FXS dat and Coeff FXO dat files are used to provide best termination and transmission quality adaptation for different line types for MediaPack FXS and
78. following headings refers to the string that is provided in the acBoardTrapGlobalsSource trap varbind To clear a generated alarm the same notification type is sent but with the severity set to cleared E 1 1 Component Board lt n gt lt n gt is the slot number when the gateway resides in a chassis and is 1 when it is a stand alone device Table E 1 acBoardFatalError Alarm Trap Alarm acBoardFatalError OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 1 Default Severity Critical Event Type equipmentAlarm Probable Cause underlyingResourceUnavailable 56 Alarm Text Board Fatal Error lt text gt Status Changes Condition Any fatal error Alarm status text value Condition Alarm status Corrective Action Alarm OID Default Severity Event Type Probable Cause Version 4 6 Critical A run time specific string describing the fatal error After fatal error Status stays critical until reboot A clear trap is not sent Capture the alarm information and the Syslog clause if active Contact your first level support group The support group will likely want to collect additional data from the device and perform a reset Table E 2 acBoardEvResettingBoard Alarm Trap acBoardEvResettingBoard 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 5 critical equipmentAlarm outOfService 71 261 July 2005 X AudioCodes Alarm Text Status Changes Condition Alarm status Condition Alarm status Corrective Action
79. for Alternative Routing Screen Reasons for Redundant Routing P to Tel Reasons Reason 1 Reason 2 Reason 3 Reason 4 el to IP Reasons Reason 1 Reason 2 Reason 3 Reason 4 2 Inthe IP to Tel Reasons table from the drop down list select up to 4 different call failure reasons that invoke an alternative IP to Tel routing 3 Inthe Tel to IP Reasons table from the drop down list select up to 4 different call failure reasons that invoke an alternative Tel to IP routing 4 Click the Submit button to save your changes 5 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 15 Reasons for Alternative Routing ini File Parameter Parameter Name in ini File Parameter Format AltRouteCauseTel2IP AltRouteCauseTel2lP H 323Call failure reason from IP For example AltRouteCauseTel2IP 2 3 No route to destination AltRouteCauseTel2IP 18 User doesn t respond AltRouteCauseTel2IP 17 User is busy Note This parameter can appear up to 4 times AltRouteCauselP2Tel AltRouteCauselP2Tel Call failure reason from Tel For example AltRouteCauselP2Tel 34 No circuit is available AltRouteCauselP2Tel 21 Call rejected AltRouteCauselP2Tel 27 Destination out of order Note This parameter can appear up to 4 times Version 4 6 85 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 5 Configuring the Profile Definitions Utilizing the Profiles feature the MediaPack provides high lev
80. for information on accessing the Quick Setup screen Figure 4 1 Quick Setup Screen Quick Setup IP Address 10 33 45 63 NAT IP Address pooo Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway IP Address 03301 H 323 Parameters Working with Gatekeeper Yes m Gatekeeper IP Address 10 8 8 80 Enable Annex D T 38 FAX Relay Yes Coder Name KM 1st Coder Tel to IP Routing Table Endpoint Phone Numbers gt To configure basic H 323 parameters take these 7 steps 1 If the MediaPack is connected to a router with Network Address Translation NAT enabled perform the following procedure If it isn t leave the NAT IP Address field undefined gt Determine the public IP address assigned to the router by using for instance router Web management Enter this public IP address in the NAT IP Address field Enable the DVZ Demilitarized Zone configuration on the residential router for the LAN port where the MediaPack gateway is connected This enables unknown packets to be routed to the DMZ port 2 When working with a Gatekeeper under H 323 Parameters set Working with Gatekeeper field to Yes and enter the IP address of the primary Gatekeeper in the field Gatekeeper IP Address When no Gatekeeper is used the internal routing table is used to route the calls 3 Leave parameter Enable Annex D T 38 FAX Relay at its default unless your technical requirements diff
81. for that client display in the parameter fields on the right side of the window Make the changes required for each parameter Click Apply to save the changes or click Apply amp Reset to save the changes and send a reset message to that gateway to immediately implement the settings Note To use Apply amp Reset you must enable ARP Manipulation in the Preferences window Also you must have administrator privileges for the computer you are using Testing the Client There should only be one BootP utility supporting any particular client MAC active on the network at any time Tocheckif other BootP utilities support this client take these 4 steps 1 Select the client that you wish to test by clicking on the client name in the main area of the Client Configuration Window Click the Test Selected Client button Examine the Log Window on the Main Application Screen If there is another BootP utility that supports this client MAC there is a response indicated from that utility showing the status Listed At along with the IP address of that utility 4 If there is another utility responding to this client you must remove that client from either this utility or the other one MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 244 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual B The BootP TFTP Configuration Utility B 11 5 Setting Client Parameters Client parameters are listed on the right side of the Client Configuration Window Versio
82. gateway This provides the enterprise with a telephone connection e g RJ 11 and the capability to transmit the voice and telephony signals over a packet network Version 4 6 15 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 The layout diagram Figure 1 1 illustrates a typical MediaPack VoIP application Figure 1 1 Typical MediaPack VoIP Application Router F a FXS MediaPack Ja Gatekeeper 1 3 MediaPack Features This section provides a high level overview of some of the many MediaPack supported features 1 3 1 General Features e Superior high quality Voice Data and fax over IP networks e Toll quality voice compression e Enhanced capabilities including MWI long haul metering CID and out door protection e Proven integration with leading PBXs IP PBXs Softswitches and H 323 Gatekeepers e Spans arange of 2 to 24 analog ports e Supports analog telephone sets or analog PSTN PBX trunk lines FXS FXO e Selectable G 711 or Low Bit Rate LBR coders per channel e 1 38 fax with superior performance handling a round trip delay of up to nine seconds MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 16 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 1 Overview Echo Canceler Jitter Buffer Voice Activity Detection VAD and Comfort Noise Generation CNG support Comprehensive support for supplementary services Web management for easy configuration and installation EMS for comprehensive management oper
83. gateway is configured correctly with a Call Progress Tones dat file loaded to the gateway all four Call Progress Tones are detected by the gateway By noting whether the gateway detects the tones or not you can determine how well the Call Progress Tones dat file matches your PBX During the first run of the CPTWizard it is likely that the gateway doesn t detect any tones Note 2 Some tones cannot be detected by the MP 10x gateway hardware such as 3 frequency tones and complex cadences CPTWizard is therefore limited to detecting only those tones that can be detected on the MP 10x gateway At this stage you can either press Next to generate a Call Progress Tones ini file and terminate the wizard or continue to manual recording mode D 2 5 Recording Screen Manual Mode In manual mode you can record and analyze tones included in the Call Progress Tones ini file in addition to those tones analyzed when in automatic mode MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 258 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual D Accessory Programs and Tools gt To start recording in manual mode take these 6 steps 1 Press the Manual tab at the top of the recording screen the manual recording screen is displayed Figure D 9 Recording Screen Manual Mode lll AudioCodes Call Progress Tones Wizard 2 x Automatic Manual m Manual tone recording and analysis Dial Go on hook pares Start Recording Stop Recording
84. gt Close the File Data window press the Esc key to cancel your changes you are returned to the Prerecorded Tones File s screen Figure D 5 File Data Window x Type i coder Description Default msec In the Output field specify the output directory in which the PRT file is generated followed by the name of the PRT file the default name is prerecordedtones dat Alternatively use the Browse button to select a different output file Navigate to the desired file and select it the selected file name and its path appear in the Output field Click the Make File s button the Progress bar at the bottom of the window is activated The dat file is generated and placed in the directory specified in the Output field A message box informing you that the operation was successful indicates that the process is completed 255 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 D 2 Call Progress Tones Wizard This section describes the Call Progress Tones Wizard CPTWizard an application designed to facilitate the provisioning of an MediaPack FXO gateway by recording and analyzing Call Progress Tones generated by any PBX or telephone network D 2 1 About the Call Progress Tones Wizard The Call Progress Tones wizard helps detect the Call Progress Tones generated by your PBX or telephone exchange and creates a basic Call Progress Tones ini file containing definitions for all relevant Call Progress Tones pr
85. in seconds that the gateway waits for a RAS response from the Gatekeeper When this time expires the gateway retransmits the RAS message The range is 0 to 2 0 The default time is 1 second Number of times that the gateway retransmits the RAS message to the Gatekeeper before the gateway determines that the Gatekeeper is not responding If you have enabled Gatekeeper Redundancy the gateway tries the next Gatekeeper If none of the Gatekeepers are responding and you have enabled Fallback to internal routing the gateway starts using the internal Tel to IP Routing table The default number of retransmissions is 6 Note This setting must match the configuration settings on your Gatekeeper Time in seconds before the gateway tries to contact the list of Gatekeepers again The default time is 60 seconds Note This setting must match the configuration settings on your Gatekeeper MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 56 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 1 3 Coders From the Coders screen you can configure the first to fifth preferred coders and their corresponding ptimes for the gateway The first coder is the highest priority coder and is used by the gateway whenever possible If the far end gateway cannot use the coder assigned as the first coder the gateway attempts to use the next coder and so forth gt Toconfigure the Gateway s coders take these 6 steps 1 Open the Coders
86. in the Time for No Reply Forward field On busy or No reply 4 Forward incoming calls when the port is busy or when calls are not answered after a configurable period of time Do Not Disturb 5 Immediately reject incoming calls Enter the telephone number to which the call is forwarded Note When a Gatekeeper isn t used the forward to phone number must be specified in the Tel to IP Routing table of the forwarding gateway If you have set the Forward Type for this port to no reply enter the number of seconds the VoIP gateway waits before forwarding the call to the phone number specified Parameter Format Fwdlnfo Gateway Port Number Forward Type Forward to Phone Number gt Time for No Reply Forward For example Fwadlnfo 0 1 1001 Fwadlnfo 1 1 2003 Fwdlnfo 2 3 2005 30 Note 1 The numbering of gateway ports starts with O Note 2 This parameter can appear up to 24 times for MP 124 101 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 9 Configuring the Hunt Group Settings Table The Hunt Group Settings is used to determine the method in which new calls are assigned to channels within each hunt group If such a rule doesn t exist for a specific hunt group the global rule defined by the Channel Select Mode parameter Protocol Definition General Parameters applies Toconfigure the Hunt Group Settings table take these 7 steps 1 Open the Hunt Group Settings scree
87. is a one to one mapping between PBX lines and MP 108 FXS ports Each PBX line is routed to the same phone connected to MP 108 FXS The call is disconnected when phone connected to MP 108 FXS goes onhook 175 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 8 12 4 3 MP 108 FXS Configuration Using the Embedded Web Server To configure the MP 108 FXS take these 3 steps 1 3 In the Endpoint Phone Numbers screen assign the phone numbers 100 to 107 for the gateway s endpoints Channel s Phone Number Hunt Group ID EH No 205 M 3 In the Automatic Dialing screen enter the phone numbers of the MP 108 FXO gateway in the Destination Phone Number fields When a phone connected to port 1 goes offhook the FXS gateway automatically dials the number 200 Automatic Dialing Gateway Port Destination Phone Number Auto Dial Status Port 1 200 Enable Port 2 201 Enable Port 3 202 Enable Port 4 203 Enable 7 Port 5 204 Enable Port 5 205 Enable Port 7 205 Enable Port 8 207 Enable In the Tel to IP Routing screen enter 20 in the Destination Phone Prefix field and the IP address of the MP 108 FXO gateway 10 1 10 2 in the field IP Address Dest Phone Prefix Source Phone Prefix Dest IP Address 1 20 i fi 0 1 10 2 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 176 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Te
88. is forwarded if it isn t answered for a specified time 4 On busy or No reply Forward incoming calls when the port is busy or when calls are not answered after a configurable period of time 5 Do Not Disturb Immediately reject incoming calls Three forms of forwarding calls are available 1 Served party the party that is configured to forward the call MediaPack FXS 2 Originating party the party that initiated the first call MediaPack FXS or FXO 3 Diverted party the new destination of the forwarded call MediaPack FXS or FXO The served party MediaPack FXS can be configured from Web browser refer to Section 5 5 8 4 on page 100 or ini file to activate one of the call forward modes per each of the gateway s endpoint including forwarded destination phone number and no answer timeout for No reply forward MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 162 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Telephony Capabilities 8 1 5 Call Waiting The Call Waiting feature enables FXS gateways to accept an additional second call on busy endpoints If an incoming IP call is designated to a busy port the called party hears a call waiting tone several configurable short beeps and for Bellcore and ETSI Caller IDs can view the Caller ID string of the incoming call The calling party hears a Call Waiting Ringback Tone Called party can accept the new call using hook flash and can toggle between the two calls
89. is found The clear message includes the IP address of this Gatekeeper Alarm Status Cleared MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 262 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Alarm OID Default Severity Event Type Probable Cause Alarm Text Status Changes Condition Alarm Status Condition Alarm Status Table E 5 acBoardOverloadAlarm Alarm Trap acBoardOverloadAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 11 Major processingErrorAlarm softwareError 46 Board overload alarm An overload condition exists in one or more of the system components Major The overload condition passed Cleared E 1 2 Component AlarmManager 0 Alarm OID Default Severity Event Type Probable Cause Alarm Text Status Changes Condition Alarm status Condition Alarm status Note Corrective Action Table E 6 acActiveAlarmTableOverflow Alarm Trap acActiveAlarmTableOverflow 1 3 6 1 4 15003 9 10 1 21 2 0 12 Major processingErrorAlarm resourceAtOrNearingCapacity 43 Active alarm table overflow Too many alarms to fit in the active alarm table major After raise Status stays major until reboot A clear trap is not sent The status stays major until reboot as it denotes a possible loss of information until the next reboot If an alarm is raised when the table is full it is possible that the alarm is active but does not appear in the active alarm table Some alarm information may have
90. manual modes 10 Base T Half Duplex 10 Base T Full Duplex 100 Base TX Half Duplex 100 Base TX Full Duplex or Auto Negotiate mode can be used Auto Negotiation falls back to Half Duplex mode when the opposite port is not Auto Negotiate but the speed 10 Base T 100 Base TX in this mode is always configured correctly Note that configuring the gateway to Auto Negotiate mode while the opposite port is set manually to Full Duplex either 10 Base T or 100 Base TX is invalid as it causes the gateway to fall back to Half Duplex mode while the opposite port is Full Duplex It is also invalid to set the gateway to one of the manual modes while the opposite port is either Auto Negotiate or not exactly matching both in speed and in duplex mode Users are encouraged to always prefer Full Duplex connections to Half Duplex ones and 100 Base TX to 10 Base T due to the larger bandwidth It is strongly recommended to use the same mode in both link partners Any mismatch configuration can yield unexpected functioning of the Ethernet connection Note that when remote configuration is performed the gateway should be in the correct Ethernet setting prior to the time this parameter takes effect When for example the gateway is configured using BootP TFTP the gateway must perform many Ethernet based transactions prior to reading the ini file containing this gateway configuration parameter To work around this problem the gateway always uses the last Ether
91. not apply to MP 102 and MP 124 Short or Long Haul Includes lightning and high voltage protection for outdoor operation Programmable Line Characteristics AC impedance matching hybrid balance Tx amp Rx frequency response Tx amp Rx Gains ring detection threshold DC characteristics Caller ID detection Bellcore GR 30 CORE Type 1 using Bell 202 FSK modulation ETSI Type 1 NTT Denmark India Brazil British and DTMF ETSI CID ETS 300 659 1 Voice amp Tone Characteristics Voice Compression Silence Suppression Packet Loss Concealment Echo Canceler DTMF Transport in band DTMF Detection and Generation Call Progress Tone Detection and Generation Output Gain Control Input Gain Control Version 4 6 G 711 PCM at 64 kbps p law A law G 723 1 MP MLQ at 5 3 or 6 3 kbps G 726 at 16 to 40 kbps ADPCM G 729 CS ACELP 8 Kbps Annex A B G 723 1 Annex A G 729 Annex B PCM and ADPCM Standard Silence Descriptor SID with Proprietary Voice Activity Detection VAD and Comfort Noise Generation CNG G 711 appendix 1 G 723 1 G 729 alb G 165 and G 168 2000 25 msec with extension to 40 msec Mute transfer in RTP payload or relay in compliance with RFC 2833 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 msec 30 60 90 msec 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 msec 10 20 30 40 50 60 msec Dynamic range 0 to 25 dBm compliant with TIA 464B and Bellcore TR NWT 000506 16 tones single tone or dual tone
92. not known define them in the CPT file the tone produced by the PBX CO must be recorded and its frequencies analyzed This method is slightly less reliable than the previous one You can use the CPTWizaed described in Section D 1 3 on page 254 to analyze Call Progress Tones generated by any PBX or telephone network Relevant parameter TimeForReorderTone e Detection of silence The call is disconnected after silence is detected on both call directions for a specific configurable amount of time The call isn t disconnected immediately therefore this method should only be used as a backup Relevant parameters EnableSilenceDisconnect and FarEndDisconnectSilencePeriod with DSP templates number 2 or 3 e Aspecial DTMF code A digit pattern that when received from the Tel side indicates the gateway to disconnect the call Relevant ini file parameter TelDisconnectCode e Interruption of RTP stream Relevant parameters BrokenConnectionEventTimeout and DisconnectOnBrokenConnection Note that this method operates correctly only if silence suppression is not used e Protocol based termination of the call from the IP side 8 10 Mapping PSTN Release Cause to H 323 Response The MediaPack FXO gateway is used to interoperate between the H 323 network and the PSTN PBX This interoperability includes the mapping of PSTN PBX Call Progress Tones to H 323 Release Causes for IP Tel calls The converse is also true For Tel gt IP calls th
93. of Active Calls MaxActiveCalls Version 4 6 Description Silence detection method None 0 Silence detection option is disabled Packets Count 1 According to packet count Voice Energy Detectors 2 According to energy and voice detectors default All 3 According to packet count and energy voice detectors Destination IP address for CDR logs Enter the IP address in dotted format notation for example 192 10 1 255 The default value is null string that causes the CDR messages to be sent with all Syslog messages Note The CDR messages are sent to UDP port 514 default Syslog port None 0 Call Detail Recording CDR information isn t sent to the Syslog server default End Call 1 CDR information is sent to the Syslog server at end of each Call Start amp End Call 2 CDR information is sent to the Syslog server at the start and at the end of each Call The CDR Syslog message complies with RFC 3161 and is identified by Facility 17 local1 and Severity 6 Informational Syslog logging level One of the following debug levels can be selected 0 0 Debug is disabled default 1 1 Flow debugging is enabled 2 2 Flow and device interface debugging are enabled 3 3 Flow device interface and stack interface debugging are enabled 4 4 Flow device interface stack interface and session manager debugging are enabled 5 5 Flow device interface stack interface session manag
94. of Equipment Analog VoIP System Model Numbers MediaPack FXS xx may represent 02 04 08 the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards gt 11 February 2005 Airport City Lod Israel Signature Date Day Month Year Location I Zusmanovich Compliance Engineering Manager Czech AudioCodes Ltd t mto prohla uje Ze tento MediaPack FXS series je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Danish Undertegnede AudioCodes Ltd erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr MediaPack FXS Series overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Dutch Hierbij verklaart AudioCodes Ltd dat het toestel MediaPack FXS Series in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC English Hereby AudioCodes Ltd declares that this MediaPack FXS Series is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Estonian K esolevaga kinnitab AudioCodes Ltd seadme MediaPack FXS Series vastavust direktiivi 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele Finnish AudioCodes Ltd vakuuttaa t ten ett MediaPack FXS Series tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC oleellisten vaa
95. on page 237 for detailed information on using the BootP TFTP configuration utility to access the device 6 Disconnect your PC from the MediaPack or from the hub switch depending on the connection method you used in step 1 7 Reconnect the MediaPack and your PC if necessary to the network 8 Restore your PC s IP address amp subnet mask to what they originally were If necessary restart your PC and re access the MediaPack via the Embedded Web Server with its new assigned IP address 4 2 2 Assigning an IP Address Using BootP Note BootP procedure can also be performed using any standard compatible BootP server Tip You can also use BootP to load the auxiliary files to the MediaPack refer to Section 5 8 2 1 on page 151 gt To assign an IP address using BootP take these 3 steps 1 Open the BootP application supplied with the MediaPack software package MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 42 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 4 Getting Started 2 Add client configuration for the MediaPack refer to Section B 11 1 on page 243 3 Use the reset button to physically reset the gateway causing it to use BootP the MediaPack changes its network parameters to the values provided by the BootP 4 3 Configuring the MediaPack Basic Parameters To configure the MediaPack basic parameters use the Embedded Web Server s Quick Setup screen shown in Figure 4 1 below Refer to Section 5 3 on page 46
96. preamble signal is detected by the answering side Some gateways do not support the detection of this fax signal on the answering side For these cases it is possible to configure the MediaPack gateways to start the T 38 fax session when the CNG tone is detected by the originating side However this mode is not recommended 5 6 2 3 Configuring the RTP Settings gt Toconfigure the RTP Settings parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the RTP Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Channel Settings gt RTP Settings option the RTP Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 38 RTP Settings Screen RTP Settings Dynamic Jitter Buffer Minimum Delay Dynamic Jitter Buffer Optimization Factor RTP Redundancy Depth Packing Factor Basic RTP Packet Interval Default RTP Directional Control Transmit Recewe A RFC 2833 TX Payload Type pa 0 RFC 2833 RX Payload Type pa 0 2 RFC 2198 Payload Type 104 Fax Bypass Payload Type o O Enable RFC 3389 CN Payload Type Disable x Analog Signal Transport Type ignore analog signals 2 Configure the RTP Settings according to Table 5 42 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 130 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 3 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 42
97. resets the MediaPack without burning the current configuration to flash discards all modifications to the configuration 3 Click the Reset button If the Burn option is selected all configuration changes are saved to flash memory If the Don t Burn option is selected all configuration changes are discarded The MediaPack is shut down and re activated A message about the waiting period is displayed The screen is refreshed Note When Gatekeeper is used the gateway issues an Unregister request before it is reset either from the Embedded Web Server SNMP or BootP Version 4 6 153 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 154 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 6 ini File Configuration of the MediaPack 6 6 1 6 2 ini File Configuration of the MediaPack As an alternative to configuring the VoIP gateway using the Web Interface refer to Section 5 on page 45 it can be configured by loading the ini file containing Customer configured parameters The ini file is loaded via the BootP TFTP utility refer to Appendix B on page 237 or via any standard TFTP server It can also be loaded through the Web Interface refer to Section 5 6 3 on page 135 The ini file configuration parameters are stored in the MediaPack non volatile memory after the file is loaded When a parameter is missing from the ini file a default value is assigned to that parameter according to
98. same subnet When ARP Manipulation is enabled on this screen the BootP Tool creates an ARP cache entry on your computer when it receives a BootP BootRequest from the VolP gateway Your computer uses this information to send messages to the VolP gateway without using ARP again This is particularly useful when the gateway does not yet have an IP address and therefore cannot respond to an ARP Because this feature creates an entry in the computer ARP cache Administrator Privileges are required If the computer is not set to allow administrator privileges ARP Manipulation cannot be enabled e ARP Manipulation Enabled Enable ARP Manipulation to remotely reset a gateway that does not yet have a valid IP address If ARP Manipulation is enabled the following two commands are available e Reply Type Reply to a BootRequest can be either Broadcast or Unicast The default for the BootP Tool is Broadcast In order for the reply to be set to Unicast ARP Manipulation must first be enabled This then enables the BootP Tool to find the MAC address for the client in the ARP cache so that it can send a message directly to the requesting device Normally this setting can be left at Broadcast Version 4 6 241 July 2005 i AudioCodes B 10 2 MediaPack H 323 ARP Type The type of entry made into the ARP cache on the computer once ARP Manipulation is enabled can be either Dynamic or Static Dynamic entries expire after a period of time keepin
99. screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Channel Settings gt Voice Settings option the Voice Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 36 Voice Settings Screen Voice Settings Voice Volume 32 to 31 dB Input Gain 32 to 31 dB Silence Suppression Disable Echo Canceler On m DTMF Transport Type RFC2833 Relay DTMF MF Transport Type RFC2833 RelayMF x DTMF Volume 31 to 0 dB ne Enable Answer Detector Disable x Answer Detector Activity Delay OO Answer Detector Silence Time DO Answer Detector Redirection Dsabe s Answer Detector Sensitivity co 2 Configure the Voice Settings according to Table 5 40 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 126 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 40 Channel Settings Voice Settings Parameters Parameter Description Voice Volume Voice gain control in dB This parameter sets the level for the transmitted IP gt Tel VoiceVolume signal The valid range is 32 to 31 dB The default value is 0 dB Input Gain PCM input gain control in dB This parameter sets the level for the received Tel gt IP InputGain signal The valid range is 32 to 31 dB The default value is 0 dB Note This parameter is intended for advanced users Changing it affects
100. servers by using a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS to store numerous usernames and passwords allowing multiple user management on a centralized platform RADIUS RFC 2865 is a standard authentication protocol that defines a method for contacting a predefined server and verifying a given name and password pair against a remote database in a secure manner When accessing the Web and Telnet servers users must provide a valid username and password When RADIUS authentication isn t used the username and password are authenticated with the Embedded Web Servers Administrator or Monitoring usernames and passwords refer to Section 5 2 1 on page 45 or with the Telnet servers username and password stored internally in the gateway s memory When RADIUS authentication is used the gateway doesn t store the username and password but simply forwards them to the pre configured RADIUS server for authentication acceptance or rejection The internal Web Telnet passwords are used as a fallback mechanism in case the RADIUS server is down Note that when RADIUS authentication is performed the Web Telnet servers are blocked until a response is received with a timeout of 5 seconds RADIUS authentication requires HTTP basic authentication meaning the username and password are transmitted in clear text over the network Therefore users are recommended to set the parameter HttpsOnly 1 to force the use of HTTPS since the transport is
101. the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 After a ring signal is detected on an Enabled FXO port the gateway initiates a call to the destination number without seizing the line The line is seized only after the call is answered After a ring signal is detected on a Disabled or Hotline FXO port the gateway seizes the line Version 4 6 97 July 2005 my Xi AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 22 Automatic Dialing ini File Parameter Parameter Name in ini File Parameter Format TargetOfChannelX TargetOfChannel lt Port gt lt Phone gt lt Mode gt For example TargetOfChannelO 1001 1 TargetOfChannel3 911 2 Note 1 The numbering of channels starts with 0 Note 2 Define this parameter for each gateway port you want to use for Automatic Dialing Note 3 This parameter can appear up to 8 times for MP 108 gateways and up to 24 times for MP 124 gateways 5 5 8 3 Caller ID Use the Caller Display Information screen to send to IP Caller ID information when a call is made using the VoIP gateway relevant to both FXS and FXO The person receiving the call can use this information for caller identification The information on this table is sent in the H 225 Setup message sent to the remote party For information on Caller ID restriction according to destination source prefixes refer to Section 5 5 3 on page 72 Note If Caller ID name is detected on an FXO l
102. the cmp file loaded on the MediaPack and stored in the non volatile memory thereby overriding the value previously defined for that parameter Therefore to restore the default configuration parameters use the ini file without any valid parameters or with a semicolon preceding all lines in the file Some of the MediaPack parameters are configurable through the ini file only and not via the Web These parameters usually determine a low level functionality and are seldom changed for a specific application Note For detailed explanation of each parameter refer to Section 5 on page 45 Secured ini File The ini file contains sensitive information that is required for the functioning of the MediaPack It is loaded to or retrieved from the device via TFTP or HTTP These protocols are unsecured and vulnerable to potential hackers Therefore an encoded ini file significantly reduces these threats You can choose to load an encoded ini file to the MediaPack When you load an encoded ini file the retrieved ini file is also encoded Use the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility to encode or decode the ini file before you load it to or retrieve it from the device Note that the encoded ini file s loading procedure is identical to the regular ini file s loading procedure For information on encoding decoding an ini file refer to Section D 1 2 on page 253 Modifying an ini File gt To modify the ini file take these 3 steps
103. to 32767 0 CoderLoopback encoder decoder loopback inside DSP 1 PCMLoopback loopback the incoming PCM to the outgoing PCM 2 Tonelnjection generates a 1000 Hz tone to outgoing PCM 3 NoLoopback default Modem Bypass dynamic payload type The valid range is 0 to 127 The default value is 103 0 Starts T 38 procedure on detection of V 21 preamble default 1 Starts T 38 Procedure on detection of CED fax answering tone 0 set internally default 1 25 msec 2 10 msec 3 20 msec Cisco compatible fax and modem bypass mode 0 NSE disabled default 1 NSE enabled Note 1 This feature can be used only if VxxModemTransportType 2 Bypass Note 2 To use this feature e The Cisco gateway must include the following definition modem passthrough nse payload type 100 codec g711alaw e Set the Modem transport type to Bypass mode VxxModemTransportType 2 for all modems e Configure the gateway parameter NSEPayloadType 100 In NSE bypass mode the gateway starts using G 711 A Law default or G 711 u Law according to the parameter FaxModemBypassCoderType The payload type used with these G 711 coders is a standard payload type 8 for G 711 A Law and 0 for G 711 u Law The parameters defining payload type for the old AudioCodes Bypass mode FaxBypassPayloadType and ModemBypassPayloadType are not used with NSE Bypass The bypass packet interval is selected according to the parameter
104. to Appendix B on page 237 2 Add modify the two ini file parameters in Table 10 1 according to the procedure described in Section 6 2 on page 155 Note that loading the device s ini file via the Configuration File screen in the Web Interface doesn t load the corporate logo image files as well Version 4 6 189 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Parameter LogoFileName LogoWidth Table 10 1 Customizable Logo ini File Parameters Description The name of the image file containing your corporate logo Use a gif jpg or jpeg image file The default is AudioCodes logo file Note The length of the name of the image file is limited to 47 characters Width in pixels of the logo image Note The optimal setting depends on the resolution settings The default value is 339 which is the width of AudioCodes displayed logo 10 5 1 2 Replacing the Main Corporate Logo with a Text String The Parameter UseWebLogo WebLogoText main corporate logo can be replaced with a text string To replace AudioCodes default logo with a text string via the Web Interface modify the two ini file parameters in Table 10 2 according to the procedure described in Section 10 5 4 on page 192 To replace AudioCodes default logo with a text string via the ini file add modify the two ini file parameters in Table 10 2 according to the procedure described in Section 6 2 on page 155 Table 10 2 Web Appearance Customizable ini
105. used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help printed on recycled paper nd available on CD or Web site THE STANDARDS INSTITUTION OF ISRAEL Version 4 6 273 July 2005 AudioCodes CPE amp Access Gateway Products MediaPack Analog VoIP Gateways MP 102 104 108 124 Series MP 112 114 118 ra AudioCodes www audiocodes com
106. views of the active alarm table are supported by the agent e acActiveAlarmTable in the enterprise acAlarm e alarmActiveTable and alarmActiveVariableTable in the IETF standard ALARM MIB rooted in the AC tree The acActiveAlarmTable is a simple one row per alarm table that is easy to view with a MIB browser The ALARM MIB is currently a draft standard and therefore has no OID assigned to it In the current software release the MIB is rooted in the experimental MIB subtree In a future release after the MIB has been ratified and an OID assigned it is to move to the official OID 15 2 2 Alarm History The device maintains a history of alarms that have been raised and traps that have been cleared to allow a manager to recover any lost raised or cleared traps Two views of the alarm history table are supported by the agent e acAlarmHistoryTable in the enterprise acAlarm e nlmLogTable and nimLogVariableTable in the standard NOTIFICATION LOG MIB As with the acActiveAlarmTable the acAlarmHistoryTable is a simple one row per alarm table that is easy to view with a MIB browser 15 3 Cold Start Trap MediaPack technology supports a cold start trap to indicate that the device is starting This allows the manager to synchronize its view of the device s active alarms Two different traps are sent at start up e The standard coldStart trap iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 snmpV2 6 snmpModules 3 snmpMIB 1 snmpMIBObjects 1 snmpTr
107. will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help F 3 MP 124 Declaration of Conformity Application of Council Directives 73 23 EEC including amendments 89 336 EEC including amendments Standards to which Conformity is Declared EN55022 1998 Class A EN55024 1998 EN61000 3 2 1995 including amendments A1 1998 A2 1998 A14 2000 EN61000 3 3 1995 EN60950 1992 Including amendments 1 2 3 4 and 11 Manufacturer s Name AudioCodes Ltd Manufacturer s Address 1 Hayarden Street Airport City Lod 70151 Israel Type of Equipment Analog VoIP System Model Numbers MP 124 FXS the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards 11 February 2005 Airport City Lod Israel Signature Date Day Month Year Location I Zusmanovich Compliance Engineering Manager Czech AudioCodes Ltd t mto prohla uje Ze tento MP 124 je ve sh
108. 1 1 0 E Subnet 255 255 o o Iu Gateway fio e o E mi TFTP Server IP fio e E E Boot File o cmp v ie INI File o ini Y 7 Apply Apply t Beset B 11 1 Adding Clients Adding a client creates an entry in the BootP Tool for a specific gateway gt To add a client to the list without using a template take these 3 steps 1 Click on the Add New Client Icon gy a client with blank parameters is displayed 2 Enter values in the fields on the right side of the window using the guidelines for the fields in Section B 11 5 on page 245 3 Click Apply to save this entry to the list of clients or click Apply amp Reset to save this entry to the list of clients and send a reset message to that gateway to immediately implement the settings Note To use Apply amp Reset you must enable ARP Manipulation in the Preferences window Also you must have administrator privileges for the computer you are using An easy way to create several clients that use similar settings is to create a template For information on how to create a template refer to Section B 12 on page 247 Version 4 6 243 July 2005 r B 11 2 B 11 3 B 11 4 fA AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 To add a client to the list using a template take these 5 steps Click on the Add New Client Icon gy a client with blank parameters is displayed In the field Template located on the right side of the Client Configuration Window click on the down ar
109. 1 and not exceeding the number of Call Progress Tones defined in the first section using the following keys Tone Type Call Progress Tone type Figure 16 1 Call Progress Tone Types Dial Tone Ringback Tone Ele 2 3 BUSY LONE 7 Reorder Tone 9 Confirmation Tone 9 Call Waiting Tone 15 Stutter Dial Tone 16 Off Hook Warning Tone 17 Call Waiting Ringback Tone 23 Hold Tone Tone Modulation Type Either Amplitude Modulated 1 or regular 0 gt Tone Form The tone s format can be one of the following 1 Continuous 2 Cadence 3 Burst Low Freq Hz Frequency in hertz of the lower tone component in case of dual frequency tone or the frequency of the tone in case of single tone not relevant to AM tones gt High Freq Hz Frequency in hertz of the higher tone component in case of dual frequency tone or zero 0 in case of single tone not relevant to AM tones gt Low Freq Level dBm Generation level 0 dBm to 31 dBm in dBm not relevant to AM tones gt High Freq Level Generation level 0 to 31 dBm The value should be set to 32 in the case of a single tone not relevant to AM tones gt First Signal On Time 10 msec Signal On period in 10 msec units for the first cadence on off cycle For be continuous tones this parameter defines the detection period For burst tones it defines the tone s duration MediaPack H 323 User
110. 164 H323 ID and PartyNumber Supports H 235 Security Annex D Procedure 1 authentication with a Gatekeeper Call Setup Can use the Normal Connect procedure Can use the Fast Connect procedure with or without immediately opening H 245 channel Can use Tunneling Can negotiate a coder from a list of given coders for Normal or Fast Connect procedures Can open an H 245 channel when using Fast Connect Supports Early H 245 procedure enabling opening of an H 245 channel before a Connect message is received Can be used for sending out of band Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF digits before a call is answered Can represent SourceNumber and DestinationNumber through E 164 H323 ID and PartyNumber Can configure in the manipulation tables or map according to H 225 V 4 Table 18 the representation of the Src Dest number types in H 323 messages Supports collecting Digits from POTS Plain Old Telephone Service for FXS gateways or from PBX PSTN for FXO gateways using predefined digit map Supports one or two stage dialing for network to PBX PSTN calls using MP 10x FXO gateway Supports answer supervision FXO using detection of either polarity reversal or human voice Supports disconnect supervision FXO using polarity reversal current disconnect detection of Busy Reorder tones or detection of silence Supports configuration of calling number screening indication in H 225 Setup Supports Pre Grant ARQ enabling the gatewa
111. 168 2000 25 msec with extension to 40 msec Gain Control Programmable DTMF Transport in band Mute transfer in RTP payload or relay in compliance with RFC 2833 DTMF Detection and Dynamic range 0 to 25 dBm compliant with TIA 464B and Bellcore TR NWT 000506 Generation 32 tones single tone dual tones or AM tones programmable frequency amp amplitude 64 frequencies in the range 300 to 1980 Hz 1 to 4 cadences per tone up to 4 sets of ON OFF periods Output Gain Control 32 dB to 31 dB in steps of 1 dB Input Gain Control 32 dB to 31 dB in steps of 1 dB Fax Modem Relay Call Progress Tone Detection and Generation Group 3 fax relay up to 14 4 kbps with auto fallback Fax Relay T 38 compliant real time fax relay Tolerant network delay up to 9 seconds round trip Modem Transparency Auto switch to PCM or ADPCM on V 34 or V 90 modem detection Protocols VoIP Signaling Protocol H 323 ITU Version 4 RTP RTCP packetization Communication Protocols IP stack UDP TCP RTP Remote Software load TFTP HTTP and HTTPS Line Signaling Protocols Loop start Processor Control Processor Motorola PowerQUICC 870 Control Processor Memory SDRAM 32 MB Signal Processors AudioCodes AC482 VoIP DSP Interfaces FXS Telephony Interface 2 4 or 8 Analog FXS phone or fax ports loop start RJ 11 Network Interface 10 100 Base TX RS 232 Interface RS 232 Terminal Interface requires a DB 9 to PS 2 adaptor Indicators Channel status and
112. 2 FaxModemBypass Vxx can be one of the following V32 V22 Bell V34 Fax then on detection of fax modem the channel automatically switches from the current voice coder to a high bit rate coder as defined by the user with the FaxModemBypassCoderType configuration parameter During the bypass period the coder uses the packing factor by which a number of basic coder frames are combined together in the outgoing WAN packet set by the user in the FaxModemBypassM configuration parameter The network packets generated and received during the bypass period are regular voice RTP packets per the selected bypass coder but with a different RTP Payload type When fax modem transmission ends the reverse switching from bypass coder to regular voice coder is carried out Version 4 6 165 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 8 3 4 8 3 4 1 Supporting V 34 Faxes V 34 faxes don t comply with the T 38 relay standard We therefore provide the optional modes described under Sections 8 3 4 1 and 8 3 4 2 Note that the CNG detector is disabled CNGDetectorMode 0 in all the following examples Using Bypass Mechanism for V 34 Fax Transmission In this proprietary scenario the media gateway uses a high bit rate coder to transmit V 34 faxes enabling the full utilization of its speed Refer to the following configurations FaxTransportMode 2 Bypass V34ModemTransportType 2 Modem bypass V32ModemTransportType 2 V23ModemTran
113. 23 User s Manual 268 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual F Regulatory Information Czech AudioCodes Ltd t mto prohla uje Ze tento MediaPack FXO je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Danish Undertegnede AudioCodes Ltd erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr MediaPack FXO overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Dutch Hierbij verklaart AudioCodes Ltd dat het toestel MediaPack FXO in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG English Hereby AudioCodes Ltd declares that this MediaPack FXO is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Estonian K esolevaga kinnitab AudioCodes Ltd seadme MediaPack FXO vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele Finnish AudioCodes Ltd vakuuttaa t ten ett MediaPack FXO tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen French Par la pr sente AudioCodes Ltd d clare que l appareil MediaPack FXO est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE German Hiermit erkl rt AudioCodes Ltd dass sich dieser diese dieses MediaPack FXO in bereinstimmung mi
114. 235Security H 235 User Name UserName H 235 Password Password Play Ringback Tone to IP PlayRBTone2IP Play Ringback Tone to Tel PlayRBTone2Tel Description Starting Transmission Control Protocol TCP User Datagram Protocol UDP transport port for H 225 H 245 messages used for RAS H 225 and H 245 protocols The MediaPack gateways uses 500 dynamic ports except RTP ports starting from this port If you enter O or if not specified the default ports are used The default port range is 32000 to 65000 For example If H323 Base Port 10000 then the H 323 gateway uses dynamic ports in the range 10000 to 10500 TCP port number on which the gateway expects to receive H 225 Setup messages The default port number is 1720 TCP port number on which the gateway sends H 225 Setup messages The default port number is 1720 Disable Enable The time period in seconds for generating H 245 round trip delay requests The range is 0 to 3600 The default time is 0 seconds H 245 round trip delay requests are not generated Disable 0 Disabled default Enable 1 H 235 Security Annex D Procedure 1 is enabled Username string up to 20 characters for H 235 security The username string is used for the registration and authentication process with a Gatekeeper 0 H 225 Reason is sent in H 323 Release Complete message 1 Q 931 Cause is sent in H 323 Release Complete message default Password string up to 20
115. 3 EEC Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas sios direktyvos nuostatas Maltese Hawnhekk AudioCodes Ltd jiddikjara li dan MediaPack FXS Series jikkonforma mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Norwegian Dette produktet er i samh righet med det Europeiske Direktiv 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Polish AudioCodes Ltd deklarujemy z pelna odpowiedzialnoscia ze wyr b MediaPack FXS Series spelnia podstawowe wymagania i odpowiada warunkom zawartym w dyrektywie 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Portuguese AudioCodes Ltd declara que este MediaPack FXS Series est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Slovak AudioCodes Ltd t mto vyhlasuje e MediaPack FXS Series sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Slovene iuo AudioCodes Ltd deklaruoja kad is MediaPack FXS Series atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Direktyvos nuostatas Spanish Por medio de la presente AudioCodes Ltd declara que el MediaPack FXS Series cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Swedish H rmed intygar AudioCodes Ltd att denna MediaPack FXS Series star verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 8
116. 30 on page 111 2 Use the parameter SyslogServerlP to define the IP address of the Syslog server you use refer to Table 5 30 on page 111 3 To determine the Syslog logging level use the parameter GWDebugLevel refer to Table 5 5 on page 63 4 To view changes made on the fly to parameters via Web or SNMP set the parameter EnableParametersMonitoring to 1 refer to Table 5 37 on page 120 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 204 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 14 Embedded Command Line Interface 14 Embedded Command Line Interface An embedded Command Line Interface CLI is available on the MediaPack The CLI or CommandShell can be accessed via Telnet RS 232 and the Embedded Web Server You can use the CLI for diagnostics and basic configuration such as to modify most of the ini file parameters and to change the network settings IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP address of the gateway refer to Section 14 2 1 on page 207 Note In the current version H 323 parameters cannot be configured via CLI 14 1 Accessing the CLI You can access the CLI via Telnet RS 232 refer to Section 10 2 on page 183 and the Embedded Web Server gt To access the CLI via the Embedded Telnet Server take these 4 steps 1 Enable the Embedded Telnet Server gt When using the ini file set the parameter TelnetServerEnable to 1 standard mode or 2 SSL mode When using the Embedded W
117. 323 ports use the parameter H323BasePort This parameter is the starting TCP UDP transport port for H 225 H 245 messages used for RAS H 225 and H 245 protocols MediaPack gateways use 500 dynamic ports except for RTP ports starting from this port If H323BasePort 0 or if a value isn t specified the default ports are used The default port range is 32000 to 65000 For example If H323BasePort 10000 the H 323 gateway uses dynamic ports in the range 10000 to 10500 Version 4 6 201 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 12 4 Recommended Practices To improve network security the following guidelines are recommended when configuring the MediaPack e Set the Administrator password refer to Section 5 2 1 on page 45 to a unique hard to hack string Do not use the same password for several devices as a single compromise may lead to others Keep this password safe at all times and change it frequently e f possible use a RADIUS server for authentication RADIUS allows you to set different passwords for different users of the MP 11x with centralized management of the password database Both Web and Telnet interfaces support RADIUS authentication refer to Section 12 2 on page 198 e If the number of users that access the Web and Telnet interfaces is limited you can use the Web and Telnet Access List to define up to ten IP addresses that are permitted to access these interfaces Access from an undefined IP address is
118. 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 20 Endpoint Phone Numbers Table Parameter Description Channel s The numbers 1 8 in the Channel s fields represent the ports on the back of the VoIP gateway To enable a VoIP gateway channel you must enter the port number on this screen n m represents a range of ports For example enter 1 4 to specify the ports from 1 to 4 Phone Number In each of the Phone Number fields enter the telephone number that is assigned to that channel For a range of channels enter the first number in an ordered sequence These numbers are also used for port allocation for IP to Tel calls if the hunt group s Channel Select Mode is set to By Phone Number MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 94 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Parameter Hunt Group ID Profile ID Parameter Name in ini File TrunkGroup x ChannelList Note TrunkGroup x parameter can be used instead Channel2Phone Version 4 6 Table 5 20 Endpoint Phone Numbers Table Description In each of the Hunt Group ID fields enter the hunt group ID 1 99 assigned to the channel s The same hunt group ID can be used for more than one channel and in more than one field The hunt group ID is an optional field that is used to define a group of common behavior channels that are used for routing IP to Tel calls
119. 4 3 IPNetworking Ping Folder Description Pings a remote IP address Gets the status of active ping sessions Stops active ping sessions Table 14 4 TPApp Folder Description Displays the gateway s general information Displays the current software version number Displays the system s date and time of day Table 14 5 BSP EXCeption Folder Description Displays information on the last software exception Displays the software exceptions history 206 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 14 Embedded Command Line Interface 14 2 1 Changing the Networking Parameters Version 4 6 You can use the CLI to change the network settings IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP address of the MediaPack gt 1 To change the network settings via the CLI take these 4 steps At the prompt type conf and press enter the configuration folder is accessed To check the current network parameters at the prompt type GCP IP and press enter the current network settings are displayed Change the network settings by typing SCP IP ip address subnet mask default gateway e g SCP IP 10 13 77 7 255 255 0 0 10 13 0 1 the new settings take effect on the fly Connectivity is active at the new IP address Note This command requires you to enter all three network parameters each separated by a space To save the configuration at the prompt type SAR and press enter the MediaPack r
120. 56 Service Type Login User 3 Record and retain the IP address port number and shared secret used by the RADIUS server 4 Configure the MP 11x relevant parameters according to Section 12 2 2 below 12 2 2 Configuring RADIUS Support For information on the RADIUS parameters refer to Table 5 36 on page 119 To configure RADIUS support on the MP 11x via the Embedded Web Server take these 8 steps Access the Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 3 on page 46 2 Open the Security Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings gt Security Settings option the Security Settings screen is displayed 3 Under section RADIUS Settings in the field Enable RADIUS Access Control select Enable the RADIUS application is enabled 4 Inthe field Use RADIUS for Web Telnet Login select Enable RADIUS authentication is enabled for Web and Telnet login Enter the RADIUS server IP address port number and shared secret in the relevant fields In the field Require Secured Web Connection HTTPS select HTTPS only It is important you use HTTPS secure Web server when connecting to the gateway over an open network since the password is transmitted in clear text Similarly for Telnet use SSL TelnetServerEnable 2 refer to Section 12 1 on page 195 7 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to refer to Section 5 9 on page
121. 9 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Version 4 6 267 July 2005 my AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Safety Notice Installation and service of this card must only be performed by authorized qualified service personnel The protective earth terminal on the back of the MediaPack must be permanently connected to protective earth Telecommunication Safety The safety status of each port on the gateway is declared and detailed in the table below Ports Safety Status Ethernet 100 Base TX SELV FXS ODP P N s TNV 3 FXS TNV 2 TNV 3 Circuit whose normal operating voltages exceeds the limits for an SELV circuit under normal operating conditions and on which over voltages from Telecommunication Networks are possible TNV 2 Circuit whose normal operating voltages exceeds the limits for an SELV circuit under normal operating conditions and is not subjected to over voltages from Telecommunication Networks SELV Safety extra low voltage circuit FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that inter
122. 95 July 2005 my Gl AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 12 1 2 12 1 3 Figure 12 1 Example of a Host File This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows Location C WINDOWS SYSTEM32 DRIVERS ETC hosts 3 2522 2 10 O gal localhost 10 31 4 47 ACL 280152 Secured Telnet To enable the embedded Telnet server on the MP 11x set the parameter TelnetServerEnable described in Table 5 30 on page 111 to 1 standard mode or 2 SSL mode no information is transmitted in the clear when SSL mode is used If the Telnet server is set to SSL mode a special Telnet client is required on your PC to connect to the Telnet interface over a secured connection examples include C Kermit for UNIX Kermit 95 for Windows and AudioCodes acSSL Telnet utility for Windows that requires prior installation of the free OpenSSL toolkit Contact AudioCodes to obtain the acSSLTelnet utility Server Certificate Replacement The MP 11x is supplied with a working SSL configuration consisting of a unique self signed server certificate When the MP 11x is upgraded to firmware version 4 6 a unique self signed server certificate is created If an organizational Public Key Infrastructure PKI is used you may wish to replace this certificate with one provided by your security administrator Toreplace the MP 11x self signed certificate take these 9 steps 1 Your network administrator should allocate a unique DNS name for the MP 11x e g
123. Address field in the IP to Hunt Group Routing table for a match with the incoming call If such a match is found the call is routed If a match is not found an Admission request is sent to the Gatekeeper Note When a release reason that is defined in the Reasons for Alternative IP to Tel Routing table is received for a specific IP gt Tel call an alternative hunt group for that call is available To associate an alternative hunt group to an incoming IP call assign it with an additional entry in the IP to Hunt Group Routing table repeat the same routing rules with a different hunt group ID For detailed information on the Reasons for Alternative Routing Tables refer to Section 5 5 4 5 on page 85 To use hunt groups you must also do the following e You must assign a hunt group ID to the VoIP gateway channels on the Endpoint Phone Number screen For information on how to assign a hunt group ID to a channel refer to Section 5 5 7 on page 94 e You can configure the Hunt Group Settings table to determine the method in which new calls are assigned to channels within the hunt groups a different method for each hunt group can be configured For information on how to enable this option refer to Section 5 5 9 on page 102 If a Channel Select Mode for a specific hunt group isn t specified then the global Channel Select Mode parameter defined in General Parameters screen under Advanced Parameters applies 81 J
124. AudioCodes CPE amp Access Gateway Products MediaPack Analog VoIP Gateways MP 102 104 108 124 Series MP 112 114 118 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Version 4 6 Document LTRT 65105 fa AudioCodes Notice This document describes the AudioCodes MediaPack series Voice over IP VoIP gateways Information contained in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable at the time of printing However due to ongoing product improvements and revisions AudioCodes cannot guarantee accuracy of printed material after the Date Published nor can it accept responsibility for errors or omissions Updates to this document and other documents can be viewed by registered Technical Support customers at www audiocodes com under Support Product Documentation Copyright 2005 AudioCodes Lid All rights reserved This document is subject to change without notice Date Published Jul 13 2005 Date Printed Jul 27 2005 MediaPack H 323 User Manual Contents Table of Contents 1 DONE Lec ODORE RM EE M E EMI DM a ee AU 1 1 Introduction TREE E EET EA ELETA ature sealer NR E CERES E 2 ing the MediaPack REREEEERERRERE WEL EEEGERERCHUTEDERVEERREEE P AE RRE T AA E T E AE A 3 1 Installing the MP 1xx 4 Version 4 6 3 July 2005 is 4 3 weld 5 5 1 2 G skeeper Pau S 5 1 2 ice MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 4 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack
125. Configuration Protocol DHCP to obtain its networking parameters and configuration automatically after it is reset BootP and DHCP are also used to provide the IP address of a TFTP server on the network and files cmp and ini to be loaded into memory DHCP is a communication protocol that automatically assigns IP addresses from a central point BootP is a protocol that enables a device to discover its own IP address Both protocols have been extended to enable the configuration of additional parameters specific to the MediaPack A BootP DHCP request is issued after a power reset refer to the flow chart in Figure 10 3 on page 187 or after a device exception Note BootP is normally used to initially configure the MediaPack Thereafter BootP is no longer required as all parameters can be stored in the gateway s non volatile memory and used when BootP is inaccessible BootP can be used again to change the IP address of the MediaPack for example BootP DHCP Server Parameters BootP DHCP can be used to provision the following parameters included in the BootP DHCP reply Note that only the IP address and subnet mask are mandatory e IP address subnet mask These mandatory parameters are sent to the MediaPack every time a BootP DHCP process occurs e Default gateway IP address An optional parameter that is sent to the MediaPack only if configured in the BootP DHCP server e TFTP server IP address An optional parameter that c
126. D 31 And the internal reasons RELEASE BECAUSE UNKNOWN REASON RELEASE BECAUSE REMOTE CANCEL CALL RELEASE BECAUSE MANUAL DISC RELEASE BECAUSE SILENCE DISC RELEASE BECAUSE DISCONNECT CODE Note When the duration of the call is zero the release reason GWAPP NORMAL CALL CLEAR increments the Number of Failed Calls due to No Answer counter The rest of the release reasons increment the Number of Failed Calls due to Other Failures counter This counter indicates the number of calls that failed as a result of a busy line It is incremented as a result of the following release reason GWAPP USER BUSY 17 This counter indicates the number of calls that weren t answered It is incremented as a result of one of the following release reasons GWAPP NO USER RESPONDING 18 GWAPP NO ANSWER FROM USER ALERTED 19 And when the call duration is zero as a result of the following GWAPP NORMAL CALL CLEAR 16 This counter indicates the number of calls whose destinations weren t found It is incremented as a result of one of the following release reasons GWAPP UNASSIGNED NUMBER 1 GWAPP NO ROUTE TO DESTINATION 3 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 140 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 46 Call Counters Description continues on pages 140 to 141 Counter Number of Failed Calls due to No Matched Capabilities Number of Failed Calls due to Other Failures Percentag
127. Defines a FQDN of a remote host that is used as an SNMP Manager The resolved SNMPTrapManagerHostName IP address replaces the last entry in the trap manager table defined by the parameter SNMPManagerTablelP_x and the last trap manager entry of snmpTargetAddrTable in the snmpTargetMIB For example mngr corp mycompany com The valid range is a 99 character string Telnet Settings Embedded Telnet Server Enables or disables the embedded Telnet server Telnet is disabled by default for TelnetServerEnable security reasons Disable 0 default Enable Unsecured 1 Enable Secured SSL 2 N A Telnet Server TCP Port Defines the port number for the embedded Telnet server TelnetServerPort The valid range valid port numbers The default port is 23 Telnet Server Idle Timeout Sets the timeout for disconnection of an idle Telnet session in minutes When set to TelnetServerldleDisconnect zero idle sessions are not disconnected The valid range is any value The default value is O 5 6 1 3 Configuring the SNMP Managers Table The SNMP Managers table allows you to configure the attributes of up to five SNMP managers Toconfigure the SNMP Managers Table take these 6 steps 1 Access the Application Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings Application Settings option the Application Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 29 2 Open the SNMP Managers Table screen by clicki
128. File Parameters Description 0 Logo image is used default 1 Text string is used instead of a logo image Text string that replaces the logo image The string can be up to 15 characters 10 5 2 Replacing the Background Image File The background image file is duplicated across the width of the screen The number of times the image is duplicated depends on the width of the background image and screen resolution When choosing your background image keep this in mind Note Use a gif jog or jpeg file for the background image It is important that the image file has a fixed height of 59 pixels The size of the image files logo and background is limited each to 64 kbytes To replace the background image via the Web take these 6 steps Access the MediaPack Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 3 on page 46 In the URL field append the suffix AdminPage note that it s case sensitive to the IP address e g http 10 1 229 17 AdminPage Click the Image Load to Device the Image load screen is displayed shown in Figure 10 6 Click the Browse button in the Send Background Image File from your computer to gateway box Navigate to the folder that contains the background image file you want to load Click the Send File button the file is sent to the device When loading is complete the screen is automatically refreshed and the new background image is displayed To save the image to flash memory so it is av
129. H 323 Analog Gateways Release Notes LTRT 614xx MP 1xx Fast Track Installation Guide LTRT 615xx MP 11x Fast Track Installation Guide Note 1 MP 1xx refers to the MP 124 24 port MP 108 8 port MP 104 4 port and MP 102 2 port VoIP gateways having similar functionality except for the number of channels the MP 124 and MP 102 support only FXS Note 2 MP 11x refers to the MP 118 8 port MP 114 4 port and MP 112 2 port VoIP gateways having similar functionality except for the number of channels Note 3 MP 10x refers to MP 108 8 port MP 104 4 port and MP 102 2 port gateways Note 4 MP 1xx FXS refers only to the MP 124 FXS MP 108 FXS MP 104 FXS and MP 102 FXS gateways Note 5 MP 10x FXO refers only to MP 108 FXO and MP 104 FXO gateways In the current version MP 11x devices only support FXS References to FXO only apply to MP 1xx devices The MP 112 differs from the MP 114 and MP 118 Its configuration excludes the RS 232 connector the Lifeline option and outdoor protection Where network appears in this manual it means Local Area Network LAN Wide Area Network WAN etc accessed via the gateway s Ethernet interface Version 4 6 13 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 Note FXO Foreign Exchange Office is the interface replacing the analog telephone and connects to a Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN line from the Central Office CO or to a Private Branch Exchange PBX The FXO is designed to receive line voltage a
130. H 323 User Manual Contents Gatewa 5 4 3 tary Services 8 10 Paika PSTN Release nues to H3 3 Resp Version 4 6 5 July 2005 t i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 9 1 1 A Kopiita PPPOE rrr rrr 1 93 31 1 Tones 13 2 2 Operation 04 14 Embedded Command Line Interface eese 205 14 Hi LONE the CLI 15 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 6 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User Manual Contents 17 Selected Technical Saa HIM 1 17 4 MP 1xx S 17 2 MP 11x t jT AO EENE EN EENE N E E 247 B 12 Managing Clie Version 4 6 T July 2005 t i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 mmmmmm ren F pni iler cis ENTRE F 1 MP 1xx FXS MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User Manual Contents sani of Figures Figt e 1 1 pne MediaPack VoIP Applic igure 2 1 int Pa Hm Liu 3 E Security Settings eM cs Version 4 6 9 July 2005 t i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Figure 5 36 Voice Figure B D EE Th Figure Fig ure MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 1 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User Manual Contents List of Tables ons on the MP Aas Froi D Table 51 Table 5 1 Table 5 17 Table 5 D ble a Table 5 24 A Table Table Table 5 Table 5 Table Table Table 5 Table 5 Table 5 Table Table 5 39 Table 5 4 Tabl
131. INDOW In the Parameter Name dropdown list select the required ini file parameter In the Enter Value field to the right enter the parameter s new value Click the Apply new value button to the right the INI Parameters screen is refreshed the parameter name with the new value appears in the fields at the top of the screen and the Output Window displays a log displaying information on the operation Note You cannot load the image files e g logo background image files to the device by choosing a file name parameter in this screen MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 192 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 11 Special Applications 11 Special Applications 11 1 Metering Tones Relay The MediaPack FXS and FXO gateways can be used to relay standard 12 or 16 kHz metering tones over the IP network as illustrated in Figure 11 1 below Figure 11 1 Metering Tone Relay Architecture PSTN MP 1xx MP 1xx FXO FXS p wmm i After a call is established between the FXS and FXO gateways the PSTN generates 12 or 16 kHz metering tones towards the FXO gateway The FXO gateway detects these pulses and relays them over IP to the FXS gateway using a non standard data in an H 225 Facility message The FXS gateway generates the same pulses to the connected phone The parameter MeteringType described in Table 5 28 is used to determine the frequency of the metering tone 12 kHz default or 16 kHz In addition
132. ING PATTERNS Number of Ringing Patterns 1 Ringing Pattern 0 Ringing Pattern 0 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 226 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 16 Configuration Files Third Ring Off Time 10msec 400 TEN SO 0M0 OI Rang EROS mole miei gemis o mare ve eri gam gem eS ca thine ringing bursts followed by repeated ringing of 1 sec on and 3 sec off NUMBER OF DISTINCTIVE RINGING PATTERNS Number of Ringing Patterns 1 Ringing Pattern 0 Ring Type 0 Freq Hz 25 First Burst Ring On Time 10msec 30 First Burst Ring Off Time 10msec 30 Second Burst Ring On Time 10msec 30 Second Burst Ring Off Time 10msec 30 Third Burst Ring On Time 10msec 30 Third Burst Ring Off Time 10msec 30 Fourth Ring On Time 10msec 100 Fourth Ring Off Time 10msec 400 16 2 Prerecorded Tones PRT File The Call Progress Tones mechanism has several limitations such as a limited number of predefined tones and a limited number of frequency integrations in one tone To work around these limitations and provide tone generation capability that is more flexible the PRT file can be used If a specific prerecorded tone exists in the PRT file it takes precedence over the same tone that exists in the CPT file and is played instead of it Note that the prerecorded tones are used only for generation of tones Detection of tones is performed according to the CPT file 16 2 1 PRT File Format The PRT dat
133. IP address of the MediaPack FXO gateway you are using Select the gateway s ports that are connected to your PBX and specify the phone number of each extension MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 256 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual D Accessory Programs and Tools 4 Inthe Invalid phone number field enter a number that generates a fast busy tone when dialed Usually any incorrect phone number should cause a fast busy tone 5 Press Next The CPTWizard communicates with the MP 10x FXO gateway via TPNCP TrunkPack Network Control Protocol If this protocol has been disabled in the gateway configuration the CPTWizard doesn t display the next screen and an error is reported D 2 4 Recording Screen Automatic Mode After the connection to the MediaPack FXO gateway is established the recording screen is displayed Figure D 7 Recording Screen Automatic Mode AudioCodes Call Progress Tones Wizard 2 xj Automatic Manual r Automatic tone detection and analysis Start Automatic Configuration Status idle m Tones analyzed Tone Type Lo reg Hi Freg 1stOn 1stOtf 2nd On 2nd Of Detected ra AudioCodes a i Cancel gt To start recording in automatic mode Press the Start Automatic Configuration button the wizard starts the following Call Progress Tones detection sequence the operation takes approximately 60 seconds to complete Sets por
134. India Brazil British and DTMF ETSI CID ETS 300 659 1 Programmable Line Characteristics Battery feed line current hook thresholds AC impedance matching hybrid balance Tx amp Rx frequency response Tx amp Rx Gains Programmable ringing signal Up to three cadences and frequency 15 to 200 Hz Drive up to 4 phones per port total 32 phones simultaneously in offhook and Ring states MP 11x Ring Equivalent Number REN 5 Over temperature protection for abnormal situations as shorted lines Loop backs for testing and maintenance Immediate or smooth to prevent erroneous ringing 231 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Metering Tones 12 16 KHz sinusoidal bursts Distinctive Ringing By frequency 15 100 Hz and cadence patterns Message Waiting Indication pn generation TIA EIA 464 B V23 FSK data Stutter dial tone and DTMF Voice amp Tone Characteristics G 711 PCM at 64 kbps p law A law 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 msec G 723 1 MP MLQ at 5 3 or 6 3 kbps 30 60 90 msec G 726 at 16 to 40 kbps ADPCM 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 msec G 729 CS ACELP 8 Kbps Annex A B 10 20 30 40 50 60 msec G 723 1 Annex A G 729 Annex B PCM and ADPCM Standard Silence Descriptor SID with Proprietary Voice Activity Detection VAD and Comfort Noise Generation CNG G 711 appendix 1 Packet Loss Concealment G 723 1 Voice Compression Silence Suppression G 729 alb Echo Canceler G 165 and G
135. Interface refer to Section 14 on page 205 e AudioCodes Element Management System EMS refer to Section 15 9 on page 221 and to AudioCodes EMS User s Manual or EMS Product Description To upgrade the MediaPack load new software or configuration files onto the gateway use the Software Upgrade wizard available through the Web Interface refer to Section 5 8 1 on page 146 or alternatively use the BootP TFTP configuration utility refer to Section 7 3 1 on page 158 For information on the configuration files refer to Section 7 on page 157 4 2 Assigning the MediaPack IP Address To assign an IP address to the MediaPack use one of the following methods e HTTP using a Web browser refer to Section 4 2 1 below e BootP refer to Section 4 2 2 on page 42 e Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP refer to Section 7 2 on page 157 e Embedded command line interface refer to Section 14 on page 205 Use the Reset button at any time to restore the MediaPack networking parameters to their factory default values refer to Section 10 1 on page 183 Version 4 6 41 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 4 2 4 Assigning an IP Address Using HTTP Toassign an IP address using HTTP take these 8 steps 1 Disconnect the MediaPack from the network and reconnect it to your PC using one of the following two methods gt Use a standard Ethernet cable to connect the network interface on your PC to a port on a network hub s
136. Internal DNS ini File Parameter Parameter Name in ini File Parameter Format DNS2IP DNS2IP Hostname first IP address gt second IP address gt For example DNS2IP Domainname com 10 8 21 4 10 13 2 95 Note This parameter can appear up to 10 times MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 84 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 4 5 Reasons for Alternative Routing The Reasons for Alternative Routing screen includes two tables Tel IP and IP Tel Each table enables you to define up to 4 different release reasons If a call is released as a result of one of these reasons received in Q 931 presentation the gateway tries to find an alternative route to that call For Tel gt IP calls an alternative IP address for IP Tel calls an alternative hunt group Refer to Tel to IP Routing on page 79 for information on defining an alternative IP address Refer to the IP to Hunt Group Routing Table on page 81 for information on defining an alternative hunt group Note The reasons for alternative routing option for Tel IP calls only applies when Gatekeeper isn t used Toconfigure the reasons for alternative routing take these 5 steps 1 Open the Reasons for Alternative Routing screen Protocol Management menu Routing Tables submenu Reasons for Alternative Routing option the Reasons for Alternative Routing screen is displayed Figure 5 15 Reasons
137. LAN Status ON Malfunction Blinking Sending and receiving H 323 messages Control Control Link Blank No traffic Blinking Transmitting RTP Real Time Transport Protocol Packets Data Packet Status Red Blinking Receiving RTP Packets Blank No traffic ON Offhook Ringing for FXS Phone Port FXO Line Seize Ringing State for Line Port Channels Telephone Green Blinking There s an incoming call before answering Interface Red ON Line Malfunction Blank Normal MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 22 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 2 MediaPack Physical Description 2 1 2 MP 1xx Rear Panel 2 1 2 1 MP 10x Rear Panel Figure 2 3 illustrates the rear panel layout of the MP 104 For descriptions of the MP 10x rear panel components refer to Table 2 3 For the functionality of the MP 10x rear panel LEDs refer to Table 2 4 Tip 1 MP 10x FXS FXO media gateways feature almost identical rear panel connectors and LEDs located slightly differently from one device to the next Tip 2 The RJ 45 port Eth 1 on the MP 10x FXO rear panel is inverted on the MP 1xx FXS The label on the rear panel also distinguishes FXS from FXO devices 100 250V 1A amp 50 60 Hz Table 2 3 MP 10x Rear Panel Component Descriptions Item Label Component Description 1 NI AC power supply socket 2 L Protective earthing screw mandatory for all installations 3 Eth 1 10 100 Base TX Ethernet connection 4 2 4 or 8
138. Multiple SNMP Trap Destinations An agent can send traps to up to five managers For each manager set the manager s IP address receiving port number and enable sending traps to that manager To configure the trap managers table use e The Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 6 1 3 on page 112 e Theinifile refer to Section 15 7 4 2 below e SNMP refer to Section 15 7 4 3 on page 219 Trap Manger Configuration via Host Name One of the five available SNMP managers can be defined using a FQDN In the current version this option can only be configured via the ini file SNMPTrapManagerHostName The gateway tries to resolve the host name at start up Once the name is resolved IP is found the resolved IP address replaces the last entry in the trap manager table defined by the parameter SNMPManagerTablelP_x and the last trap manager entry of snmpTargetAddrTable in the snmpTargetMIB The port is 162 unless specified otherwise the row is marked as used and the sending is enabled When using host name resolution any changes made by the user to this row in either MIBs are overwritten by the gateway when a resolving is redone once an hour Note that several traps may be lost until the resolving is complete Trap Managers Configuration via the ini File In the MediaPack ini file the parameters below can be set to enable or disable the sending of SNMP traps Multiple trap destinations can be supported on the dev
139. Network Port Numbers Peer Port 2 67 1719 1720 1720 Application Debugging interface Telnet DHCP Web server HTTP SNMP GET SET Web server HTTPS IPSec IKE H 323 RAS Source Port H 225 Signaling Dial H 225 Signaling Listen RTP traffic RTCP traffic T 38 traffic Syslog Syslog ICMP ARP listener SNMP Traps DNS client H 245 Signaling Port Notes Always ignored Disabled by default TelnetServerEnable Configurable TelnetServerPort access controlled by WebAccessList Active only if DHCPEnable 1 Configurable HTTPPort can be disabled DisableWebTask or HTTPSOnly Access controlled by WebAccessList Configurable SNMPPort can be disabled DisableSNMP Access controlled by SNMPTrustedMGR Configurable HTTPSPort can be disabled DisableWebTask Access controlled by WebAccessList Can be disabled EnablelPSec Not supported in the current version Configurable RASSourcePort Refer to the note below Configurable H225DialPort Refer to the note below Configurable H225ListenPort Refer to the note below Base port number configurable BaseUDPPort fixed increments of 10 The number of ports used depends on the channel capacity of the device Always adjacent to the RTP port number Always adjacent to the RTCP port number Disabled by default EnableSyslog Disabled by default EnableSyslog Can be disabled DisableSNMP Refer to the note below All dynamic H
140. P 124 spelnia podstawowe wymagania i odpowiada warunkom zawartym w dyrektywie 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC AudioCodes Ltd declara que este MP 124 est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC AudioCodes Ltd t mto vyhlasuje Ze MP 124 Series sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC iuo AudioCodes Ltd deklaruoja kad is MP 124 Series atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Direktyvos nuostatas Por medio de la presente AudioCodes Ltd declara que el MP 124 Series cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC H rmed intygar AudioCodes Ltd att denna MP 124 Series st r verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Safety Notice Installation and service of this unit must only be performed by authorized qualified service personnel The protective earth terminal on the back of the MP 124 must be permanently connected to protective earth TNV 3 TNV 2 SELV Telecommunication Safety The safety status of each port on the gateway is declared and detailed in the table below Ports Safety Status Ethernet 100 Base TX SELV FXS ODP P N s TNV 3 FXS TNV 2 Circuit whose normal operating voltages exceed
141. P or DHCP servers and its software and configuration files from a different TFTP server preconfigured in ini file If BootP DHCP servers are not found or when the gateway is reset from the Web SNMP it retains its network parameters and attempts to load the software cmp file and or configuration files from a preconfigured TFTP server If a preconfigured TFTP server doesn t exist the gateway operates using the existing software and configuration files loaded on its non volatile memory Note that after the operational software runs if DHCP is configured the gateway attempts to renew its lease with the DHCP server Though DHCP and BootP servers are very similar in operation the DHCP server includes some differences that could prevent its operation with BootP clients However many DHCP servers such as Windows NT DHCP server are backward compatible with BootP protocol and can be used for gateway configuration The time duration between BootP DHCP requests is set to 1 second by default This can be changed by the BootPDelay ini file parameter Also the number of requests is 3 by default and can be changed by BootPRetries ini file parameter Both parameters can also be set using the BootP command line switches MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 186 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 10 Advanced System Capabilities Figure 10 3 MediaPack Startup Process Physical Reset BootP x times BootP Response
142. Parameters can be skipped by using the sign for example NumberMapIP2Tel 01 2 972 034 NumberMapIP2Tel 03 2 667 22 5 5 3 1 Dialing Plan Notation The dialing plan notation applies in addition to the four Manipulation tables also to Tel gt IP Routing table and to IP Hunt Group Routing table When entering a number in the destination and source Prefix columns you can create an entry that represents multiple numbers using the following notation e n m represents a range of numbers e n m represents multiple numbers Note that this notation only supports single digit numbers e x represents any single digit e that terminates the number represents the end of a number e A single asterisk represents any number For example e 5551200 5551300 represents all numbers from 5551200 to 5551300 Version 4 6 75 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 e 2 3 4 xxx represents four digit numbers that start with 2 3 or 4 e 54324 represents any number that starts with 54324 e 54324xx represents a 7 digit number that starts with 54324 e 123 100 200 represents all numbers from 123100 to 123200 The VoIP gateway matches the rules starting at the top of the table For this reason enter more specific rules above more generic rules For example if you enter 551 in entry 1 and 55 in entry 2 the VoIP gateway applies rule 1 to numbers that starts with 551 and applies rule 2 to numbers that start
143. Prefix field and enter the IP address of the first gateway 10 2 37 10 in the field IP Address In the second row enter 20 and the IP address of the second gateway 10 2 37 20 respectively These settings enable the routing from both gateways of outgoing Tel gt IP calls that start with 10 to the first gateway and calls that start with 20 to the second gateway Dest Phone Prefix Source Phone Prefix Dest IP Address 1 10 E 1023710 2 eo z 10 2 37 20 Version 4 6 Make a call Pick up the phone connected to port 1 of the first MediaPack and dial 102 to the phone connected to port 2 of the same gateway Listen out for progress tones at the calling endpoint and for ringing tone at the called endpoint Answer the called endpoint talk into the calling endpoint and check the voice quality Dial 201 from the phone connected to port 1 of the first MediaPack gateway the phone connected to port 1 of the second MediaPack rings Answer the call and check the voice quality 173 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 8 12 2 Using Two Gateways with Gatekeeper In this demo a call can be made from an endpoint in one gateway to an endpoint in another To configure the ini file parameters take these 8 steps Use Gatekeeper In GatekeeperlP insert the IP of the PC that runs the Gatekeeper Endpoint numbers of the first MP 108 gateway 101 108 Endpoint numbers of the second MP 108 gateway 201 208 Run Ga
144. Registration Prefixes Table screen Protocol Management menu gt Registration Prefixes the Registration Prefixes Table screen is displayed Figure 5 19 Registration Prefixes Table Screen Registration Prefix Table Gatekeeper Registration Prefixes 9e of Number 2200 2245 Private Level 1 Regional 393 Private Level 2 Regional e1 3 E1 64 Public I National Unknown J Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Configure the Registration Prefixes according to Table 5 19 Click the Submit button to save your changes or click the Re Register button to save your changes and to re register to the Gatekeeper 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 92 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 19 Registration Prefixes Table Parameter Description Gatekeeper Registration Prefixes Enter the Gatekeeper Registration prefixes These prefixes are used by the VoIP gateway to register to a Gatekeeper When entering a prefix you can create an entry that represents multiple prefixes using the following notation n m represents a range of numbers For example enter 250 279 to specify all prefixes from 250 to 279
145. Routing Tables Use this submenu to configure the gateway s IP gt Tel and Tel gt IP routing tables and their associated parameters 5 5 4 1 General Parameters Use this screen to configure the gateway s IP gt Tel and Tel gt IP routing parameters gt To configure the general parameters under Routing Tables take these 4 steps 1 Open the General Parameters screen Protocol Management menu gt Routing Tables submenu gt General option the General Parameters screen is displayed Figure 5 11 Routing Tables General Parameters Screen General Parameters Add Hunt Group ID as Prefix Add Port Number as Prefix IP to Tel Remove Routing Table Prefix Enable Alt Routing Tel to IP Alt Routing Tel to IP Mode Max Allowed Packet Loss for Alt Routing 95 Max Allowed Delay for Alt Routing msec Configure the general parameters under Routing Tables according to Table 5 11 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 11 Routing Tables General Parameters continues on pages 77 to 78 Parameter Add Hunt Group ID as Prefix AddTrunkGroupAsPrefix Add Port Number as Prefix AddPortAsPrefix Version 4 6 Description No 0 Don t add hunt group ID as prefix default Yes 1 Add hunt group ID as prefix to called number If enabled then the hunt group ID is ad
146. S Lifeline Setup Table 3 3 MP 104 FXS Lifeline Setup Component Descriptions MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 34 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 3 Installing the MediaPack 3 2 Installing the MP 11x gt To install the MP 11x take these 3 steps 1 Unpack the MP 11x refer to Section 3 2 1 below 2 Check the package contents refer to Section 3 2 2 below 3 Mount the MP 11x refer to Section 3 2 4 on page 36 4 Cable the MP 11x refer to Section 3 2 5 on page 31 After connecting the MP 11x to the power source the Ready and Power LEDs on the front panel turn to green after a self testing period of about 2 minutes Any malfunction in the startup procedure changes the Fail LED to red and the Ready LED is turned off refer to Table 2 7 on page 25 for details on the MP 11x LEDs You re now ready to start configuring the gateway Section 5 on page 45 3 2 4 Unpacking gt To unpack the MP 11x take these 6 steps Open the carton and remove the packing materials Remove the MP 11x gateway from the carton Check that there is no equipment damage Check retain and process any documents Notify AudioCodes or your local supplier of any damage or discrepancies E Mu du o Moe Retain any diskettes or CDs 3 2 2 Package Contents Ensure that in addition to the MP 11x the package contains e AC power cable e Small plastic bag containing four anti slide bumpers for desktop installation
147. S server the user can access the gateway through a Web browser using a URL of http acl_ lt serial number gt instead of using the gateway s IP address For example if the gateway s MAC address is 00908f010280 the DNS name is acl_66176 e After physically resetting the gateway its IP address is displayed in the Client Info column in the BootP TFTP configuration utility refer to Figure B 1 on page 239 e Use the CLI for detailed information on using the CLI refer to Section 14 on page 205 e Contact your System Administrator BootP Support Upgrading the MediaPack When upgrading the MediaPack loading new software onto the gateway using the BootP TFTP configuration utility e From version 4 4 to version 4 4 or to any higher version the device retains its configuration ini file However the auxiliary files CPT logo etc may be erased e From version 4 6 to version 4 6 or to any higher version the device retains its configuration inifile and auxiliary files CPT logo etc You can also use the Software Upgrade wizard available through the Web Interface refer to Section 5 8 1 on page 146 Note To save the cmp file to non volatile memory use the fb command line switches If the file is not saved the gateway reverts to the old version of software after the next reset For information on using command line switches refer to Section B 11 6 on page 246 Vendor Specific Information Field The Me
148. SNMPManagerIsUsed 1 1 SNMPManagerTrapSendingEnable 1 1 SNMPManagerTableIP 2 SNMPManagerTrapPort 2 162 SNMPManagerIsUsed 2 1 SNMPManagerTrapSendingEnable 2 1 SNMPManagerTableIP 3 SNMPManagerTrapPort 3 162 SNMPManagerIsUsed 3 1 SNMPManagerTrapSendingEnable 3 1 SNMPManagerTableIP 4 SNMPManagerTrapPort 4 162 SNMPManagerIsUsed 4 1 SNMPManagerTrapSendingEnable 4 1 To configure the trap manger host name use the parameter SNMPTrapManagerHostName For example SNMPTrapManagerHostName myMananger corp MyCompany com Note The same information configurable in the ini file can also be configured via the acBoardMIB 15 7 4 3 Trap Mangers Configuration via SNMP Two MIB interfaces are available for configuring the trap managers The first via the obsolete acBoard MIB is going to be removed in the following version The second via the standard snmpTargetMIB Using the acBoard MIB The following parameters that are defined in the snmpManagersTable are available 1 snmpTrapManagerSending 2 snmpManagerlsUsed Version 4 6 219 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 3 snmpManagerTrapPort 4 snmpManagerlP When snmpManagerlsUsed is set to zero not used the other three parameters are set to zero as well The intention is to have them set to the default value which means TrapPort is set to 162 This is to be revised in a later release e snmpManagerlsUsed Default Di
149. Series is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC K esolevaga kinnitab AudioCodes Ltd seadme MP 11x FXS Series vastavust direktiivi 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele AudioCodes Ltd vakuuttaa t ten ett MP 11x FXS Series tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen Par la pr sente AudioCodes Ltd d clare que l appareil MP 11x FXS Series est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Hiermit erkl rt AudioCodes Ltd dass sich dieser diese dieses MP 11x FXS Series in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC befindet BMWi ME THN l APOY2A AudioCodes Ltd AHAQNEI OTI MP 11x FXS Series ZYMMOPOONETAI NPOXZ TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIZ AOINES ZXETIKEZ AIATAZEIZ TH2 OAHTIA 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Alulirott AudioCodes Ltd nyilatkozom hogy a MP 11x FXS Series megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak ki etta er samr mi vi tilskipun Evr pusambandsins 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Con la presente AudioCodes Ltd dichiara che questo MP 11x FXS Series co
150. Specific Information Code 42 Version 4 6 Table 7 2 Structure of the Vendor Specific Information Field 40 amp 9 Ss S o 5 3 m 9o Q c z gt 5 E o E N N N e N N N c ujbue1 159 lt So R s e c z a B 1 221 4 L enieA e z enieA enieA I e p enjeA pua De 255 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 160 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Telephony Capabilities 8 Telephony Capabilities 8 1 Working with H 450 Supplementary Services The MediaPack H 323 FXS and FXO gateways support the following supplementary services Hold Retrieve H 450 4 refer to Section 8 1 1 Consultation Alternate refer to Section 8 1 2 Transfer H 450 2 refer to Section 8 1 3 Call Forward H 450 3 refer to Section 8 1 4 Call Waiting H 450 6 refer to Section 8 1 5 Message Waiting Indication MWI H 450 7 refer to Section 8 1 6 on page 163 Name identification H 450 8 refer to Section 8 8 4 on page 170 To activate these supplementary services Hold Transfer Forward Waiting MWI and name identification on the MediaPack gateway enable each service s corresponding parameter either from the Web Interface or via the ini file Note that all call participants H 323 endpoints must comply with the H 450 1 4 standards When working with application servers such a
151. TMF Option H 245 Signal Method 2nd Tx DTMF Option RFC 2833 3rd Tx DTMF Option Not Supported 4th Tx DTMF Option Not Supported m 5th Tx DTMF Option Not Supported RFC 2833 Payload Type Max Digits in Phone Number Default Destination Number Inter Digit Timeout sec Dial Tone Duration sec Hot Line Dial Tone Duration sec Digit Mapping Rules Hook Flash Option Not Supported Enable Special Digits Disable Configure the DTMF amp Dialing parameters according to Table 5 4 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 4 DTMF amp Dialing Parameters continues on pages 59 to 61 Parameter Description Rx DTMF Option Supported Receive DTMF negotiation method RxDTMFOption You can select one of the following options Not Supported 0 default H 245 User Input 1 H 245 Signal Method 2 RFC 2833 3 All 4 Accept all DTMF methods For information on DTMF transport types refer to Section 8 2 on page 163 Version 4 6 59 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 4 DTMF amp Dialing Parameters continues on pages 59 to 61 Parameter 1 to 5 Tx DTMF Option TxDTMFOption RFC 2833 Payload Type RFC2833PayloadType Max Digits in Phone Number MaxDigits Note Digit Mapping Rules can be used instead Default Dest
152. The Ethernet Port Information screen provides read only information on the Ethernet connection used by the MediaPack The Ethernet Port Information parameters are displayed in Table 5 35 For detailed information on the Ethernet interface configuration refer to Section 9 1 on page 179 gt To view the Ethernet Port Information parameters take this step e Open the Ethernet Port Information screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings gt Ethernet Port Information option the Ethernet Port Information screen is displayed Figure 5 34 Ethernet Port Information Screen Ethernet Port Information Port 1 Duplex Mode Half Duplex Port 1 Speed 100 mbps Table 5 35 Ethernet Port Information Parameters Parameter Description Port 1 Duplex Mode Shows the Duplex mode the Ethernet port is using Half Duplex or Full Duplex Port 1 Speed Shows the speed in Mbps that the Ethernet port is using 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps 5 6 1 8 Configuring the Security Settings MP 11x Only Use the Security Settings screen to set the secured Web access parameters HTTPS for detailed information refer to Section 12 1 1 on page 195 and to configure the RADIUS authentication parameters for detailed information refer to Section 12 2 on page 198 Toconfigure the Security Settings parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the Security Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings gt Security Settings
153. This parameter is available only if you select Yes in the Gatekeeper Redundancy field ini file note The ID of the second redundant Gatekeeper is defined by the third repetition of the ini file parameter GatekeeperlP GatekeeperlP IP ID No 0 Do not switch to redundant Gatekeeper after an RRJ message is received default Yes 1 Switch to redundant Gatekeeper after a RRJ message is received No 0 Gateway fallback is not used default Yes 1 Internal Tel to IP Routing table is used when Gatekeepers are not available When the gateway falls back to the internal Tel to IP Routing table the gateway continues scanning for the Gatekeeper When the gateway finds an active Gatekeeper it switches from internal routing back to Gatekeeper routing Determines if the local routing tables take precedence over a Gatekeeper for routing calls No 0 Only Gatekeeper is used to route calls default Yes 1 The gateway checks the Destination IP Address field in the Tel to IP Routing table for a match with the outgoing call and the Source IP Address field in the IP to Hunt Group Routing table for a match with the incoming call Only if a match is not found a Gatekeeper is used Applicable only if Gatekeeper is used IsGateKeeperUsed 1 Disable 0 Disable RAI Resource Available Indication service default Enable 1 Enable RAI service If RAI is enabled a message indicating almost out of resources is s
154. a cmp file Users can choose to also use the Wizard to load the ini and auxiliary files e g Call Progress Tones but this option cannot be pursued without loading the cmp file For the ini and each auxiliary file type users can choose to reload an existing file load a new file or not load a file at all Warning 1 The Software Upgrade Wizard requires the MediaPack to be reset at the end of the process disrupting any of its traffic To avoid disruption disable all traffic on the MediaPack before initiating the Wizard Warning 2 Verify prior to clicking the Start Software Upgrade button that no traffic is running on the device After clicking this button a device reset is mandatory Even if you choose to cancel the process in the middle the device resets itself and the previous configuration burned to flash is reloaded gt Touse the Software Upgrade Wizard take these 9 steps 1 Stop all traffic on the MediaPack refer to the note above 2 Open the Software Upgrade Wizard Software Update menu gt Software Upgrade Wizard the Start Software Upgrade screen appears Figure 5 50 Start Software Upgrade Screen MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 146 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack At this point the process can be canceled with no consequence to the MediaPack click the Cancel button If you continue the process by clicking the Start Software Upgrade butto
155. aPack 5 6 1 11 SNMP ini File Parameters Table 5 39 describes the Table 5 39 ini File Parameter Name SNMPPort SNMPTrustedMGR_x AlarmHistoryTableMaxSize SNMP Community String Parameters SNMPReadOnlyCommunityString_x SNMPReadWriteCommunityString_x SNMPTrapCommunityString_x SetCommunityString Note Obsolete parameter use SNMPReadWriteCommunityString x instead SNMPManagerlP Note Obsolete parameter use SNMPManagerTablelP x instead Version 4 6 SNMP parameters that can only be configured via the ini file Network Settings SNMP ini File Parameters Description The device s local UDP port used for SNMP Get Set commands The range is 100 to 3999 The default port is 161 Up to five IP addresses of remote trusted SNMP managers from which the SNMP agent accepts and processes get and set requests Note 1 If no values are assigned to these parameters any manager can access the device Note 2 Trusted managers can work with a community strings Determines the maximum number of rows in the Alarm History table The parameter can be controlled by the Config Global Entry Limit MIB located in the Notification Log MIB The valid range is 50 to 100 The default value is 100 Read only community string up to 19 chars The default string is public Read write community string up to 19 chars The default string is private Community string used in traps up to 19 chars The default stri
156. aPack H 323 Software Kit Table A 1 describes the standard supplied software kit for MediaPack FXS FXO H 323 gateways The supplied documentation includes this User s Manual the MediaPack Fast Track and the MediaPack H 323 Release Notes File Name Ram cmp files MP124 H323 xxx cmp MP108 H323 xxx cmp MP118 H323 xxx cmp ini files and utilities H323gw MP124 ini H323gw fxs MP108 ini H323gw fxo MP108 ini H323gw fxs MP104 ini H323gw fxo MP104 ini H323gw fxs MP102 ini H323gw_fxs_MP118 ini H323gw_fxs_MP114 ini H323gw_fxs_MP112 ini Usa tones xx dat Usa tones xx ini MP1xx Coeff FXS dat MP10x Coeff FXO dat DConvert240 exe ACSyslog08 exe bootp exe CPTWizard exe MIBs Files Version 4 6 Table A 1 MediaPack H 323 Supplied Software Kit Description Image file containing the software for the MP 124 FXS gateway Common Image file Image file containing the software for both MP 10x FXS and MP 10x FXO gateways Common Image file Image file containing the software for MP 11x FXS gateways Sample ni file for MP 124 FXS gateway Sample ini file for MP 108 FXS gateways Sample ini file for MP 108 FXO gateways Sample ini file for MP 104 FXS gateways Sample ini file for MP 104 FXO gateways Sample ini file for MP 102 FXS gateways Sample ini file for MP 118 FXS gateways Sample ini file for MP 114 FXS gateways Sample ini file for MP 112 FXS gateways Default loadable Call Progress Tones dat file Call Progress Tones inif
157. aPack series analog VoIP gateways are cost effective cutting edge technology products These stand alone analog VoIP gateways provide superior voice technology for connecting legacy telephones fax machines and PBX systems with IP based telephony networks as well as for integration with new IP based PBX architecture These products are designed and tested to be fully interopeable with leading softswitches and H 323 Gatekeepers The MediaPack gateways incorporate up to 24 analog ports for connection either directly to an enterprise PBX FXO to phones or to fax FXS supporting up to 24 simultaneous VoIP calls Additionally the MediaPack units are equipped with a 10 100 Base TX Ethernet port for connection to the network The MediaPack gateways are best suited for small to medium size enterprises branch offices or for residential media gateway solutions The MediaPack gateways enable users to make free local or international telephone fax calls between the distributed company offices using their existing telephones fax These calls are routed over the existing network ensuring that voice traffic uses minimum bandwidth The MediaPack gateways are very compact devices that can be installed as a desk top unit on the wall or in a 19 inch rack The MediaPack gateways support H 323 ITU protocol enabling the deployment of voice over IP solutions in environments where each enterprise or residential location is provided with a simple media
158. able the MP 1xx according to the column Cabling Procedure For detailed information on the MP 1xx rear panel connectors refer to Section 2 1 2 on page 23 Cable RJ 45 Ethernet cable Table 3 1 Cables and Cabling Procedure Cabling Procedure Connect the Ethernet connection on the MP 1xx directly to the network using a standard RJ 45 Ethernet cable For connector s pinout refer to Figure 3 5 below Note that when assigning an IP address to the MP 1xx using HTTP under step 1 in Section 4 2 1 you may be required to disconnect this cable and re cable it differently Connect the RJ 11 connectors on the rear panel of the MP 10x FXS to fax machine modem or phones refer to Figure Ensure that FXS amp FXO are 3 6 connected to the correct RJ 11 two wire telephone Connect RJ 11 connectors on the MP 10x FXO rear panel to devices otherwise damage cords Lifeline cable telephone exchange analog lines or PBX extensions Figure Can occur 3 6 MP 124 FXS ports are usually distributed using an MDF Adaptor Block special order option Refer to Figure 3 8 for details For detailed information on setting up the Lifeline refer to the procedure under Section 3 1 4 2 on page 33 Refer to the MP 124 Safety Notice below 1 Wire the 50 pin Telco connectors according to the pinout in Figure 3 7 on page 32 and Figure 3 8 on page 32 50 pin Telco cable MP 2 Attach each pair of wires from a 25 pair Octopus cable to its correspo
159. add a new routing rule Each field in the IP routing table is described in Table 5 34 3 Click the button Add New Entry the new routing rule is added to the IP routing table Note In the current version the option to save changes to the IP Routing table so they are available after power fail isn t available via the Embedded Web Server Use ini file configuration instead Table 5 34 IP Routing Table Column Description Column Name Description ini File Parameter Name Delete Row To delete IP routing rules from the IP Routing Table check the Delete Row checkbox in the rows of the routing rules you want to delete and click the button Delete Selected Entries the routing rules are removed from the table Destination IP Address RoutingTableDestinationsColumn Specifies the IP address of the destination host network Destination Mask RoutingTableDestinationMasksCol Specifies the subnet mask of the destination host network umn The address of the host network you want to reach is determined by an AND operation that is applied on the fields Destination IP Address and Destination Mask For example To reach the network 10 8 x x enter 10 8 0 0 in the field Destination IP Address and 255 255 0 0 in the field Destination Mask As a result of the AND operation the value of the last two octets in the field Destination IP Address is ignored To reach a specific host enter its IP address in the f
160. adence A repeating sequence of on and off sounds Up to four different sets of on off periods can be specified e Burst A single sound followed by silence Only the First Signal On time and First Signal Off time should be specified All other on and off periods must be set to zero The burst tone is detected after the off time is completed Version 4 6 223 July 2005 r i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Users can specify several tones of the same type These additional tones are used only for tone detection Generation of a specific tone conforms to the first definition of the specific tone For example users can define an additional dial tone by appending the second dial tone s definition lines to the first tone definition in the ini file The MediaPack reports dial tone detection if either of the two tones is detected Note The following limitations apply to MP 1xx devices Only 2 cadences are supported The Burst tone type is not supported AM tones are not supported The maximum number of different CPT is limited to 16 The maximum number of different frequencies is limited to 15 The Call Progress Tones section of the ini file comprises the following segments e NUMBER OF CALL PROGRESS TONES Contains the following key Number of Call Progress Tones defining the number of Call Progress Tones that are defined in the file e CALL PROGRESS TONE ZX containing the Xth tone definition starting from
161. agent are incorporated in descriptor files written in Abstract Syntax Notation ASN 1 format made available to EM client programs so that they can become aware of MIB variables and their use The device contains an embedded SNMP Agent supporting both general network MIBs such as the IP MIB VoP specific MIBs such as RTP and our proprietary MIBs acBoard acGateway acAlarm and other MIBs enabling a deeper probe into the inter working of the device All supported MIB files are supplied to customers as part of the release About SNMP SNMP Message Standard Four types of SNMP messages are defined e Get A request that returns the value of a named object e Get Next A request that returns the next name and value of the next object supported by a network device given a valid SNMP name e Set A request that sets a named object to a specific value e Trap Amessage generated asynchronously by network devices It is an unsolicited message from an agent to the manager Each of these message types fulfills a particular requirement of Network Managers e Get Request Specific values can be fetched via the get request to determine the performance and state of the device Typically many different values and parameters can be determined via SNMP without the overhead associated with logging into the device or establishing a TCP connection with the device e Get Next Request Enables the SNMP standard network managers to
162. ailable after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 190 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 10 Advanced System Capabilities The new background appears on all Web Interface screens Tip 1 If you encounter any problem during the loading of the files or you want to restore the default images click the Restore Default Images button Tip 2 When replacing both the background image and the logo image first load the logo image followed by the background image gt To replace the background image via the ini file take these 2 steps 1 Place your background image file in the same folder as where the device s ini file is located i e the same location defined in the BootP TFTP configuration utility For detailed information on the BootP TFTP refer to Appendix B on page 237 2 Add modify the ini file parameters in Table 10 3 according to the procedure described in Section 6 2 on page 155 Note that loading the device s ini file via the Configuration File screen in the Web Interface doesn t load the logo image file as well Table 10 3 Customizable Logo ini File Parameters Parameter Description BkglmageFileName The name and path of the file containing the new background Use a gif jpg or jpeg image file The default is AudioCodes background file Note The length of the name of the image file is limited to 47 characters 10 5 3 Customizing the Product Name
163. al port can be used to access the CLI Section 14 on page 205 and to view error notification messages For information on establishing a serial communications link with the MediaPack refer to Section 10 2 on page 183 DisableWebTask 0 Enable Web management default 1 Disable Web management ResetWebPassword Resets the Administrator and Monitoring username and password to their defaults 0 Password and username retain their values default 1 Password and username are reset to Administrator Default username Admin Default password Admin Monitoring Default username User Default password User DisableWebConfig 0 Enable changing parameters from Web default 1 Operate Web server in read only mode HTTPport HTTP port used for Web management default 80 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 120 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 37 Board ini File Parameters continues on pages 120 to 123 ini File Parameter Name EthernetPhyConfiguration DisableNAT EnablelPAddrTranslation EnableUDPPortTranslation HeartBeatDestIP HeartBeatDestPort HeartBeatlntervalmsec RADIUSRetransmission RADIUSTo HTTPS Parameters MP 11x Only HTTPSPort HTTPSRequireClientCertificate Version 4 6 Valid Range and Description 10 Base T half duplex 10 Base T full duplex 100 Base TX half duplex 3 100 Base TX full duplex 4
164. all before answering Channels Telephone Pis Line malfunction Status Interface 9 Off Normal onhook position On Offhook Uplink Ethernet On Valid 10 100 Base TX Ethernet connection in p Link Status Off No uplink On Failure fatal error Fail Failure Or system initialization Indication Off Normal working condition i On Device powered self test OK Ready Pid E atus Off Software loading or System failure On Power is currently being supplied to the device Power d Supply Either there s a failure disruption in the AC power atus Off supply or power is currently not being supplied to the device through the AC power supply entry Version 4 6 25 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 2 2 2 MP 11x Rear Panel Figure 2 6 illustrates the rear layout of the MP 118 almost identical on MP 114 and MP 112 Table 2 8 lists and describes the rear panel connectors and button on the MP 11x Figure 2 6 MP 118 Rear Panel Connectors 100 240 0 3A max Ethernet Item a oO ND Table 2 8 MP 11x Rear Panel Component Descriptions Label Component Description 100 240 0 3A max AC power supply socket Ethernet 10 100 Base TX Uplink port RS 232 RS 232 status port requires a DB 9 to PS 2 adaptor FXS 4 RJ 11 FXS ports total 8 Reset Reset button MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 26 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 3 Installing the MediaPack 3 3 1 3 1 1 Installing the MediaPack This sectio
165. ange and therefore when selected is always used The gateway s DTMF transfer mechanism ensures that only a single DTMF digit is generated The mechanism erases all digits from the audio stream This solves the problem of double detection caused as a result of different paths of DTMF at the remote side 5 If none of the above transfer methods is used DTMF digits can be sent as part of the audio stream in RTP packets This is normally used with G 711 coders with other LBR coders the quality of the DTMF digits is reduced Set the parameter DTMFTransportType to Transparent for DTMF to not be removed from the voice stream Note When using Fast Start the H 245 channel remains close and out of band signaling can t be used unless OpenH245onFS is set to 1 or remote gateway terminal opens the H 245 channel gt To configure the MediaPack DTMF transfer type take these 3 steps 1 Setthe preferred Transmit DTMF methods using the TxDTMFOption table Note that DTMF negotiation methods are prioritized according to the order of their appearance Set the supported Receive DTMF negotiation method using RxDTMFOption parameter If needed Set the supported hook flash receive and transmit Transport Type method using the HookFlashOption parameter gt To configure the MediaPack to convey DTMF digits in the audio stream take these 2 steps 1 Ensure that neither of the following parameters is configured set to not supported
166. aps 5 coldStart 1 sent at system initialization Version 4 6 211 July 2005 r AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 The enterprise acBoardEvBoardStarted which is generated at the end of system initialization This is more of an application level cold start sent after the entire initializing process is complete and all the modules are ready 15 4 Third Party Performance Monitoring Measurements Performance measurements are available for a third party performance monitoring system through an SNMP interface These measurements can be polled at scheduled intervals by an external poller or utility in a media server or other off device system The device provides two types of performance measurements 1 Gauges Gauges represent the current state of activities on the device Gauges unlike counters can decrease in value and like counters can increase The value of a gauge is the current value or a snapshot of the current activity on the device Counters Counters always increase in value and are cumulative Counters unlike gauges never decrease in value unless the off device system is reset the counters are then zeroed Performance measurements are provided by several proprietary MIBs that are located under the performance sub tree iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 private 4 enterprises 1 audioCodes 5003 acPerformance 10 Two formats of performance monitoring MIBs are available 1 Old format obsolete as of
167. ase UDP Port Determines the lower boundary of UDP ports used for RTP RTCP and T 38 by a RemoteBaseUDPPort remote gateway If this parameter is set to a non zero value ThroughPacket is enabled Note that the value of RemoteBaseUDPPort on the local gateway must equal the value of BaseUDPPort of the remote gateway The gateway uses these parameters to identify and distribute the payloads from the received multiplexed IP packet to the relevant channels The valid range is the range of possible UDP ports 4000 to 64000 The default value is 0 ThroughPacket is disabled Note To enable ThroughPacket the parameters L1L1ComplexTxUDPPort and L1L1ComplexRxUDPPort must be set to a non zero value RTP Multiplexing Local UDP Port Determines the local UDP port used for outgoing multiplexed RTP packets applies to L1L1ComplexTxUDPPort the ThroughPacket mechanism The valid range is the range of possible UDP ports 4000 to 64000 The default value is 0 ThroughPacket is disabled This parameter cannot be changed on the fly and requires a gateway reset RTP Multiplexing Remote UDP Determines the remote UDP port the multiplexed RTP packets are sent to and the Port local UDP port used for incoming multiplexed RTP packets applies to the L1L1ComplexRxUDPPort ThroughPacket mechanism The valid range is the range of possible UDP ports 4000 to 64000 The default value is 0 ThroughPacket is disabled This parameter cannot
168. ation button before you reset the gateway For information on how to save the configuration refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 e Reset the gateway directly Web reset doesn t trigger the BootP DHCP procedure and the parameter DHCPEnable reverts to 0 Note that throughout the DHCP procedure the BootP TFTP application must be deactivated Otherwise the MediaPack receives a response from the BootP server instead of the DHCP server Note For additional information on DHCP refer to Section 7 2 on page 157 ini file note The DHCPEnable is a special Hidden parameter Once defined and saved in flash memory its assigned value doesn t revert to its default even if the parameter doesn t appear in the ini file Global gateway IP address Define if static Network Address Translation NAT device is used between the gateway and the Internet MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 110 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 6 1 2 Configuring the Application Settings gt Toconfigure the Application Settings parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the Application Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings gt Application Settings option the Application Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 29 Application Settings Screen Application Settings NTP Settings NTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 NTP UTC Offset Hours n Minutes p NTP Update Interval Hour
169. ation about each tone that was recorded and analyzed by the wizard This information includes frequencies and cadence on off times and is required for using this file with the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion utility Version 4 6 259 July 2005 s 3 AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Figure D 10 Call Progress Tone Properties CALL PROGRESS TONE 41 Tone Type 1 Low Freq Hz 350 High Freq Hz 440 Low Freq Level dBm 0 High Freq Level dBm 0 First Signal On Time 10msec 0 First Signal Off Time 10msec 0 Second Signal On Time 10msec 0 Second Signal Off Time 10msec 0 e Information related to possible matches of each tone with the CPTWizard s internal database of well known tones This information is specified as comments in the file and is ignored by the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion utility Figure D 11 Call Progress Tone Database Matches Recorded tone Busy Tone automatic configuration Matches PBX name ITU Anguilla Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU Antigua and Barbuda Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU Barbados Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU Bermuda Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU British Virgin Islan Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU Canada Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU Dominica Commonweal Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU Hongkong China Tone name Busy tone Match
170. ations FCAPS Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and Syslog support Multiplexes RTP streams from several users together to reduce bandwidth overhead Capable of automatically updating its firmware version and configuration Secured Web access HTTPS and Telnet access using SSL TLS 1 3 2 MP 1xx Hardware Features MP 124 19 inch 1 U rugged enclosure provides up to 24 analog FXS ports using a single 50 pin Telco connector MP 10x compact rugged enclosure only one half of a 19 inch rack unit 1 U high 1 75 or 44 5 mm Lifeline provides a wired phone connection to PSTN line when there is no power or the network connection fails applies to MP 10x FXS gateways LEDs on the front and rear panels that provide information on the operating status of the media gateway and the network interface Restart button on the Front panel that restarts the MediaPack gateway and is also used to restore the MediaPack parameters to their factory default values 1 3 3 MP 11x Hardware Features MP 11x compact rugged enclosure only one half of a 19 inch rack unit 1 U high Lifeline provides a wired phone connection to PSTN line when there is no power or the network fails LEDs on the front panel that provide information on the operating status of the media gateway and the network interface Restart button on the back panel that restarts the MP 11x gateway and is also used to restore the MP 11x parameters to their factory defau
171. ay MIB has the following groups gt Common for parameters common to both SIP and H 323 SIP for SIP parameters only gt H 323 for H 323 parameters only e acAlarm This is a proprietary carrier grade alarm MIB It is a simpler implementation of the notificationLogMIB and the IETF suggested alarmMIB both also supported in all MediaPack and related devices The acAlarm MIB has the following groups gt ActiveAlarm straightforward single indexed table listing all currently active alarms together with their bindings the alarm bindings are defined in acAlarm acAlarmVarbinds and also in acBoard acTrap acBoardTrapDefinitions oid 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 gt acAlarmHistory straightforward single indexed table listing all recently raised alarms together with their bindings the alarm bindings are defined in acAlarm acAlarmVarbinds and also in acBoard acTrap acBoardTrapDefinitions oid 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 The table size can be altered via notificationLogMIB notificationLogMIBObjects nlmConfig nImConfigGlobalEntryLimit or notificationLogMIB notificationLogMIBObjects nlmConfig nlmConfigLogTable nlm ConfigLogEntry nlmConfigLogEntryL imit The table size can be any value between 10 to 100 and is 100 by default Note 1 The following are special notes pertaining to MIBs A detailed explanation of each parameter can be viewed in an SNMP browser in the MIB Description field Not all groups
172. been lost but the ability of the device to perform its basic operations has not been impacted A reboot is the only way to completely clear a problem with the active alarm table Contact your first level group E 1 3 Component EthernetLink 0 This trap relates to the Ethernet Link Module the 0 numbering doesn t apply to the physical Ethernet link Alarm OID Default Severity Version 4 6 Table E 7 acBoardEthernetLinkAlarm Alarm Trap acBoardEthernetLinkAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 10 Critical 263 E SNMP Traps i AudioCodes Event Type Probable Cause Alarm Text Status Changes Condition Alarm status text value Condition Alarm status text value Condition Alarm status Corrective Action MediaPack H 323 Table E 7 acBoardEthernetLinkAlarm Alarm Trap equipmentAlarm underlyingResourceUnavailable 56 Ethernet link alarm text Fault on single interface major Redundant link is down Fault on both interfaces critical No Ethernet link Both interfaces are operational cleared Ensure that both Ethernet cables are plugged into the back of the system Inspect the system s Ethernet link lights to determine which interface is failing Reconnect the cable or fix the network problem E 1 4 Log Traps Notifications This section details traps that are not alarms These traps are sent with the severity varbind value of indeterminate These traps don t
173. binds Each trap described above provides the following fields known as varbinds Refer to the AcBoard MIB for additional details on these varbinds e acBoardTrapGlobalsName e acBoardTrapGlobalsTextualDescription e acBoardTrapGlobalsSource e acBoardTrapGlobalsSeverity e acBoardTrapGlobalsUniglD e acBoardTrapGlobalsType e acBoardTrapGlobalsProbableCause e acBoardTrapGlobalsAdditionallnfo1 e acBoardTrapGlobalsAdditionallnfo2 e acBoardTrapGlobalsAdditionallnfo3 Note that acBoardTrapGlobalsName is actually a number The value of this varbind is X minus 1 where X is the last number in the trap s OID For example the name of acBoardEthernetLinkAlarm is 9 The OID for acBoardEthernetLinkAlarm is 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 2 0 10 Version 4 6 265 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 266 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual F Regulatory Information Appendix F Regulatory Information F 1 MP 1xx FXS Declaration of Conformity Application of Council Directives 73 23 EEC including amendments 89 336 EEC including amendments Standards to which Conformity is Declared EN55022 1998 Class B EN55024 1998 EN61000 3 2 1995 EN60950 2000 including amendments A1 1998 A2 1998 A14 2000 EN61000 3 3 1995 Manufacturer s Name AudioCodes Ltd Manufacturer s Address 1 Hayarden Street Airport City Lod 70151 Israel Type
174. bs bits from the clock counter in order to update the clock to the correct time If the clock is running too slow then in an effort to catch the clock up bits are added to the counter causing the clock to update quicker and catch up to the correct time The advantage of this method is that it does not introduce any disparity in the system time that is noticeable to an end user or that could corrupt call timeouts and timestamps Version 4 6 181 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 182 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 10 Advanced System Capabilities 10 10 1 10 2 Advanced System Capabilities Restoring Networking Parameters to their Initial State You can use the Reset button to restore the MediaPack networking parameters to their factory default values described in Table 4 1 and to reset the username and password Note that the MediaPack returns to the software version burned in flash This process also restores the MediaPack parameters to their factory settings Therefore you must load your previously backed up ini file or the default ini file received with the software kit to set them to their correct values gt To restore the networking parameters of the MP 1xx to their initial state take these 6 steps 1 Disconnect the MP 1xx from the power and network cables 2 Reconnect the power cable the gateway is powered up After approximately 45 seco
175. c RegistrationTime RAS Response Timeout sec ResponseTimeOut Number of RAS Retransmission MaxRetries Time between Gatekeeper Retries sec TimeBetweenGKsLoops Description Disable 0 Disabled default Enable 1 Enables the H 323 pre granted ARQ mechanism If enabled when an endpoint registers with a Gatekeeper the Gatekeeper can pre grant admission requests to that endpoint enabling it to establish calls without applying to the Gatekeeper for permission thereby reducing call setup time Gateway registration encoding type This defines the encoding type of the phone numbers that is used when the gateway registers these numbers with a Gatekeeper You can select E 164 0 default H323 ID 1 E 164 and H323 ID 2 NPI TON from Table 3 NPI TON and H323 ID 4 For detailed information on the available methods the MediaPack gateway registers with a Gatekeeper refer to Section 8 5 on page 167 For detailed information on the Registration Prefixes Table refer to Section 5 5 6 on page 92 No 0 Gateway registers and acts as a standard gateway default Yes 1 Gateway registers as an H 323 terminal with multiple aliases up to 24 for MP 124 In all gateway messages the terminal type value is set to terminal Time in seconds between registrations to the Gatekeeper The default Registration Time is 60 seconds Note This setting must match the configuration settings on your Gatekeeper Time
176. ced System Capabilities Figure 10 2 Example of an ini File Activating the Automatic Update Mechanism DNS is required for specifying domain names in URLs DnsPricerverrb ID I LDE Load an extra configuration ini file using HTTP IniFileURL http webserver corp com AudioCodes inifile ini Load Call Progress Tones file using HTTPS Note HTTPS is not available on the MP 1xx CotPileUrl httpsi v l0 31 2 17 usa tones cat Load Voice Prompts file using HTTPS with user root and password wheel VPFileUrl https root wheel webserver corp com vp dat Update every day at 03 00 AM AutoUpdatePredefinedTime 03 00 Note The cmp file isn t updated since it is disabled by default AutoUpdateCmpFile Refer to the following notes e When TFTP is used the files are immediately loaded When HTTP or HTTPS are used the gateway contacts the Web server s and queries for the requested files The ini file is loaded only if it was modified since the last automatic update The cmp file is loaded only if its version is different from the version stored on the gateway s non volatile memory All other auxiliary files e g CPT are updated only once To update a previously loaded auxiliary file you must update the parameter containing its URL e To load different configurations ini files for specific gateways add the string lt MAC gt to the URL This mnemonic is replaced with the MediaPack hardwar
177. ch of the RJ 45 sockets Note that on the MP 124 the rear panel also duplicates the Data Control and Ready LEDs from the front panel Table 2 6 Indicator LEDs on the MP 124 Rear Panel Label Type Color State Function Data Packet Status ON Transmitting RTP Packets ON Receiving RTP Packets Blank No traffic Cntrl Control Link Green Blinking Sending and receiving H 323 messages Blank No traffic Ready Device Status Green ON Device Powered and Self test OK Orange ON Software Loading Initialization Read ON Malfunction Eth 1 Ethernet Status Geen ON Valid 10 100 Base TX Ethernet connection Read o ON Malfunction Eth 2 Ethernet Status Green ON Valid 10 100 Base TX Ethernet connection Read ON Malfunction MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 24 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 2 MediaPack Physical Description 2 2 MP 11x Physical Description 2 2 4 MP 11x Front Panel Figure 2 5 illustrates the front layout of the MP 118 almost identical on MP 114 and MP 112 Table 2 7 lists and describes the front panel LEDs on the MP 11x Tip MP 11x gateways feature almost identical front panel LEDs they only differ in the number of channel LEDs that correspond to the number of channels Figure 2 5 MP 118 Front Panel Connectors Channels Status Table 2 7 Definition of MP 11x Front Panel LED Indicators LED Type Color State Definition Blinking The phone is ringing incoming c
178. ckets 2 short 1 long and bracket to device screws for 19 inch rack installation option MP 10x only e 2 short equal length brackets and bracket to device screws for MP 124 19 inch rack installation e ACD with software and documentation may be included e The MP 1xx Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 6 27 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 3 1 3 Mounting the MP 1xx The MP 1xx can be mounted on a desktop or on a wall only MP 10x or installed in a standard 19 inch rack Refer to Section 3 1 4 on page 31 for cabling the MP 1xx 3 1 3 1 Mounting the MP 1xx on a Desktop No brackets are required Simply place the MP 1xx on the desktop in the position you require Figure 3 1 Desktop or Shelf Mounting Rack Mount Safety Instructions UL When installing the chassis in a rack be sure to implement the following Safety instructions recommended by Underwriters Laboratories e Elevated Operating Ambient If installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient Therefore consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature Tma specified by the manufacturer Reduced Air Flow Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation on the equipment is not compromised Mechanical Loading Mounting of the
179. co Connector MP 124 FXS only Pin Numbers Figure 3 8 MP 124 in a 19 inch Rack with MDF Adaptor FRONT INPUT 19 inch Rack 24 line cords i 2 wire with RJ 11 Rear View connectors M D F Adaptor Block rear a N e E REAR OUTPUT Primary 24 wire pairs in LAN Cable Octopus cable to Eth 1 with 50 pin male Telco connector AC Power Cord Back up LAN Cable to Eth 2 Connect to 453 gt Grounding Strap 50 pin female Telco connector MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 32 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 3 Installing the MediaPack Table 3 2 Pin Allocation in the 50 pin Telco Connector Phone Channel Connector Pins Phone Channel Connector Pins 1 1 26 13 13 38 2 2 27 14 14 39 3 3 28 15 15 40 4 4 29 16 16 41 5 5 30 17 17 42 6 6 31 18 18 43 7 7 32 19 19 44 8 8 33 20 20 45 9 9 34 21 21 46 10 10 35 22 22 47 11 11 36 23 23 48 12 12 37 24 24 49 3 1 4 1 Connecting the MP 1xx RS 232 Port to Your PC 3 1 4 2 Using a standard RS 232 straight cable not a cross over cable with DB 9 connectors connect the MP 1xx RS 232 port to either COM1 or COM2 RS 232 communication port on your PC The required connector pinout and gender are shown below in Figure 3 9 For information on establishing a serial communications link with the MP 1xx refer to Section 10 2 on page 183 Figure 3 9 MP 1xx RS 232 Cable Wiring 2 RD 2 3 TD 3 5 GND 5
180. columns for all rows in the srCommunityTable are currently set to MGR This procedure must be performed from one of the existing trusted managers but not the one that is being deleted e Remove the appropriate row from the snmpTargetAddrTable The change takes effect immediately The deleted trusted manager cannot access the device The agent automatically removes the row in the tgtAddressMaskTable Version 4 6 217 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 15 7 3 15 7 4 15 7 4 1 15 7 4 2 gt To delete the final Trusted Manager take these 2 steps The following procedure assumes that there is at least one configured read write community There is currently only one Trusted Manager The taglist for columns for all rows in the srCommunityTable are currently set to MGR This procedure must be performed from the final Trusted Manager 1 Set the value of the TransportLabel field on each row in the srCommunityTable to the empty string 2 Remove the appropriate row from the snmpTargetAddrTable The change takes effect immediately All managers can now access the device SNMP Ports The SNMP Request Port is 161 and the Trap Port is 162 These ports can be changed by setting parameters in the device ini file The parameter name is SNMPPort port number Valid UDP port number default 161 This parameter specifies the port number for SNMP requests and responses Usually it should not be specified Use the default
181. cording to Tel gt IP Destination Number Manipulation table described in Section 5 5 3 on page 72 or if not configured are set to Unknown Unknown respectively Note 2 When NPI TON from Table is selected then the H 225 part of the H 323 message is calculated from Q 931 NPI TON according to H 225 V 4 standard table 18 Disable 0 Disable H 323 Q 931 multiplexing default Enable 1 Enable H 323 Q 931 multiplexing When you enable Q 931 multiplexing the gateway uses the same socket for all H 225 messages that are sent to the same destination No 0 7 The gateway doesn t release a call when Setup Ack message is received default Yes 1 The gateway releases a call when Setup Ack message is received Use this option to enable receiving the Setup Ack messages Note This parameter is used for specific non standard applications Usually the Setup Ack messages are not used No 0 The gateway sends Setup or Gatekeeper ARQ message without called party number Yes 1 The gateway includes the called party number in the Setup message The default is Yes 1 51 July 2005 bi AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 1 Protocol Definition General Parameters continues on pages 50 to 52 Parameter H 323 Base Port H323BasePort H 225 Listen Port H225ListenPort H 225 Dial Port H225DialPort Enable Q 931 Cause EnableQ931Cause H 245 Round Trip Time H245RoundTripTime Enable H 235 Security EnableH
182. curityName field in the sole row of the snmpTargetParamsTable 15 7 2 Trusted Managers By default the agent accepts get and set requests from any IP address as long as the correct community string is used in the request Security can be enhanced via the use of Trusted Managers A Trusted Manager is an IP address from which the SNMP Agent accepts and processes get and set requests An EM can be used to configure up to 5 Trusted Managers MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 216 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 15 SNMP Based Management Note If Trusted Managers are defined all community strings work from all Trusted Managers That is there is no way to associate a community string with particular trusted managers 15 7 2 1 Configuration of Trusted Managers via ini File To set the Trusted Mangers table from start up write the following in the ini file SNMPTRUSTEDMGR X D D D D where X is any integer between 0 and 4 0 sets the first table entry 1 sets the second and so on and D is an integer between 0 and 255 15 7 2 2 Configuration of Trusted Managers via SNMP To configure Trusted Managers the EM must use the srCommunityMIB the snmpTargetMIB and the TGT ADDRESS MASK MIB gt To add the first Trusted Manager take these 3 steps The following procedure assumes that there is at least one configured read write community There are currently no Trusted Managers The taglist for columns fo
183. d applicable only to FXS gateways The Call Forwarding Table is applicable only if the Call Forward feature is enabled To enable Call Forward set Enable Call Forward to Enable in the Supplementary Services screen or EnableForward 1 in the ini file refer to Table 5 6 Toconfigure the Call Forward table take these 4 steps 1 Open the Call Forward Table screen Protocol Management menu gt Endpoint Settings submenu gt Call Forward option the Call Forward Table screen is displayed Figure 5 25 Call Forward Table Screen Call Forward Table On busy gt On busy gt mmediate gt Not in use gt No reply gt Not in use Not in use Not in use Configure the Call Forward parameters for each port according to the table below Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Parameter Forward Type Forward to Phone Number Time for No Reply Forward Parameter Name in ini File Fwdinfo_x Version 4 6 Table 5 25 Call Forward Table Description Not in use 0 Don t forward incoming calls default On Busy 1 Forward incoming calls when the gateway port is busy Immediate 2 Forward any incoming call to the Phone number specified No reply 3 Forward incoming calls not answered with the time specified
184. d at the root folder Each time a command is executed the CLI lists the current folder s available commands and sub folders Before using the CLI refer to the following notes e Enter h at the CLI prompt for help on global commands and enter h command name gt for information on a specific command e Use two consecutive dots i e to access a higher directory level e You can use the upper case of each command directory as a shortcut For example enter CONF instead of CONFiguration and GPD instead of GetParameterDescription The following CLI commands are available Command Name SaveAndReset RestoreFactorySettings SetConfigParam GetParameterDescription GetConfigParam ConfigFile AutoUPDate Command Name ListActive ListHistory Command Name Ping PingGetSiat PingStop Command Name Boardinfo LoadVersion TimeOfDay Command Name ExceptionInfo PrintHistory MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Table 14 1 CONFiguration Folder Description Saves ini file parameters to non volatile memory and resets the gateway N A Sets the value of an ini file parameter Displays the description of an ini file parameter Queries the value of an ini file parameter Retrieves or sets the current ini file via Telnet Checks for new ini or cmp files configured in IniFileURL and CmpFileURL Table 14 2 MGmt FAult Folder Description Lists the currently active alarms Shows the alarm history table Table 1
185. d names for each entity e Option for changing MAC address e Protection against entering faulty information Version 4 6 237 July 2005 3 AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 e Remote reset e Unicast BootP response e User initiated BootP respond for remote provisioning over WAN e Filtered display of BootP requests e Location of other BootP utilities that contain the same MAC entity e Common log window for both BootP and TFTP sessions e Works with Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP B 4 Specifications e BootP standards RFC 951 and RFC 1542 e TFTP standards RFC 1350 and RFC 906 e Operating System Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP e Max number of MAC entries 200 B 5 Installation gt To install the BootP TFTP on your computer take these 2 steps Locate the BootP folder on the VoIP gateway supplied CD ROM and open the file Setup exe 2 Follow the prompts from the installation wizard to complete the installation gt To open the BootP TFTP take these 2 steps 1 From the Start menu on your computer navigate to Programs and then click on BootP 2 The first time that you run the BootP TFTP the program prompts you to set the user preferences Refer to the Section B 10 on page 241 for information on setting the preferences B 6 Loading the cmp File Booting the Device Once the application is running and the preferences were set refer to Section B 10 fo
186. ded as a prefix to the destination phone number for Tel gt IP calls Note 1 This option can be used to define various routing rules Note 2 To use this feature you must configure the hunt group IDs No 0 Disable the add port as prefix service default Yes 1 Enable the add port as prefix service If enabled then the gateway s port number single digit in the range 1 to 8 in MP 10x two digits in the range 01 to 24 in MP 124 is added as a prefix to the destination phone number for Tel gt IP calls Note This option can be used to define various routing rules 77 July 2005 AudioCodes my bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 11 Routing Tables General Parameters continues on pages 77 to 78 Parameter IP to Tel Remove Routing Table Prefix RemovePrefix Enable Alt Routing Tel to IP AltRoutingTel2IPEnable Alt Routing Tel to IP Mode AltRoutingTel2IPMode Max Allowed Packet Loss for Alt Routing 96 IPConnQoSMaxAllowedPL Max Allowed Delay for Alt Routing msec IPConnQoSMaxAllowedDel ay Description No 0 Don t remove prefix default Yes 1 Remove the prefix defined in the IP to Hunt Group Routing table from a telephone number for an IP gt Tel call before forwarding it to Tel For example To route an incoming IP gt Tel Call with destination number 21100 the IP to Hunt Group Routing table is scanned for a matching prefix If such prefix is found 21 for instance then before the call is rout
187. dem signals V 34 or V 90 modem detection H 323 ITU Version 4 RTP RTCP packetization IP stack UDP TCP RTP Remote Software load TFTP and HTTP Loop start FXS and FXO Motorola PowerQUICC 860 SDRAM 16 MB AudioCodes AC481 VoIP DSP 2 4 8 or 24 Analog FXS phone or fax ports loop start 4 or 8 Analog FXO PSTN PBX loop start ports RJ 45 shielded connector 10 100 Base TX RS 232 Terminal Interface DB 9 connector on rear panel Lifeline provides a wired analog POTS phone connection to any PSTN or PBX FXS port when there is no power or the network fails 50 pin Telco shielded connector 8 RJ 11 connectors 4 RJ 11 connectors 2 RJ 11 connectors 10 100 Base TX RJ 45 shielded connector Console port DB 9 Resets the MP 1xx Width 221 mm 8 7 in Height 44 5 mm 1 75 in Depth 240 mm 9 5 in Weight 1 24 kg 2 5 Ib 1U 19 inch Rack Width 445 mm 17 5 in Height 44 5 mm 1 75 in Depth 269 mm 10 6 in Weight 2 24 kg 4 9 Ib MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 230 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 17 Selected Technical Specifications Table 17 1 MP 1xx Selected Technical Specifications continues on pages 229 to 231 Environmental Installation Electrical Type Approvals Telecommunication Safety and EMC Management Configuration Management and Maintenance Operational 5 to 55 C 23 to 131 F Storage 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Humidity 10 to 90 non condensing Desk
188. diaPack uses the vendor specific information field in the BootP request to provide device related initial startup information The BootP TFTP configuration utility displays this information in the Client Info column refer to Figure B 1 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 158 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Note This option is not available on DHCP servers The Vendor Specific Information field is disabled by default To enable disable this feature set the ini file parameter ExtBootPReqEnable Table 5 37 on page 120 or use the be command line switch refer to Table B 1 on page 246 Table 7 1 details the vendor specific information field according to device types Tag 220 221 222 223 224 225 228 229 230 Table 7 1 Vendor Specific Information Field Description Gateway Type Current IP Address Burned Boot Software Version Burned cmp Software Version Geographical Address Chassis Geographical Address Indoor Outdoor Indoor is valid only for FXS FXO is always Outdoor E amp M Analog Channels Value 10 MP 102 11 MP 104 12 MP 108 13 MP 124 14 MP 118 15 MP 114 16 MP 112 XXX XXX XXX XXX X XX XXXXXXXXXXXX 0 31 0 31 0 Indoor 1 Outdoor N A 2 4 8124 7 Using BootP DHCP Length 1 1 Table 7 2 exemplifies the structure of the vendor specific information field for a TP 1610 slave module with IP address 10 2 70 1 Vendor
189. dly not used by other applications C 1 Packet Types Defined in RFC 3551 Table C 1 Packet Types Defined in RFC 3551 Payload Type Description Basic Packet Rate msec 0 G 711 p Law 10 20 2 G 726 32 10 20 4 G 723 6 3 5 3 kbps 30 8 G 711 A Law 10 20 18 G 729A B 20 200 praen Menon ee en 201 RTCP Receiver Report Randomly dad d eh a when 202 RTCP SDES packet 203 RTCP BYE packet 204 RTCP APP packet C 2 Defined Payload Types Table C 2 Defined Payload Types Payload Type Description Basic Packet Rate msec 35 G 726 16 kbps 20 36 G 726 24 kbps 20 38 G 726 40 kbps 20 96 RFC 2833 DTMF relay 20 102 Fax Bypass 20 103 Modem Bypass 20 104 RFC 2198 Redundancy Same as channel s voice coder 105 NSE Bypass Version 4 6 249 July 2005 r X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 C 3 Default RTP RTCP T 38 Port Allocation The following table shows the default RTP RTCP T 38 port allocation Table C 3 Default RTP RTCP T 38 Port Allocation Channel Number RTP Port RTCP Port T 38 Port 1 4000 4001 4002 2 4010 4011 4012 3 4020 4021 4022 4 4030 4031 4032 5 4040 4041 4042 6 4050 4051 4052 7 4060 4061 4062 8 4070 4071 4072 9 4080 4081 4082 10 4090 4091 4092 11 4100 4101 4102 12 4110 4111 4112 13 4120 4121 4122 14 4130 4131 4132 15 4140 4141 4142 16 4150 4151 4152 17 4160 4161 4162 18 4170 4171 4172 19 4180 4181 4182 20 4190 4191 4192 21 4200 4201 4202 22 4210 4211 4212 23 4220 4221 4222 24 4230 4231 4232 Note To configure
190. e 1 Enable Annex D T 38 fax relay When you enable this feature the gateway can send and receive fax messages using the H 323 Annex D T 38 procedure Initiate T 38 on Preamble 0 Terminating fax gateway initiates T 38 session on receiving of HDLC preamble signal from fax default Initiate T 38 on CED 1 Terminating fax gateway initiates T 38 session on receiving of CED answer tone from fax Note This parameters is applicable only if lsFaxUsed 1 Source number encoding type This defines the encoding type of the calling phone number in H 225 Setup messages You can select E 164 0 default H 323 ID 1 E 164 amp H 323 ID 2 NPI TON from Table 3 NPI TON amp H323 ID 4 Note 1 The values of NPI TON in the Q 931 part of the H 323 message are determined according to Tel gt IP Source Number Manipulation table described in Section 5 5 3 on page 72 or if not configured are set to Unknown Unknown respectively Note 2 When NPI TON from Table or NPI TON and H323 ID are selected then the H 225 part of the H 323 message is calculated from Q 931 NPI TON according to H 225 V 4 standard table 18 Destination number encoding type This defines the encoding type of the called phone number in H 225 Setup messages You can select E 164 0 default H323 ID 1 E 164 and H323 ID 2 NPI TON from Table 3 Note 1 The values of NPI TON in the Q 931 part of the H 323 message are determined ac
191. e The method used by the gateway to collect dialed numbers is identical to the method used during a regular call i e max digits interdigit timeout digit map etc MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 70 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 7 Keypad Features Parameters Parameter Description Forward Unconaitional Keypad sequence that activates the immediate forward option KeyCFUnCond K CENA nswer Keypad sequence that activates the forward on no answer option ECHO syl Keypad sequence that activates the forward on busy option On Busy or No Answer KeyCFBusyOrNoAnswer Do Not Disturb KeyCFDoNotDisturb To activate the required forward method from the telephone e _ Dial the preconfigured sequence number on the keypad a dial tone is heard e Dial the telephone number to which the call is forwarded terminate the number with a confirmation tone is Keypad sequence that activates the forward on busy or no answer options Keypad sequence that activates the Do Not Disturb option heard Deactivate Keypad sequence that deactivates any of the forward options KeyCFDeact After the sequence is pressed a confirmation tone is heard Caller ID Restriction Activate Keypad sequence that activates the restricted Caller ID option KeyCLIR After the sequence is pressed a confirmation tone is heard Deactivate Keypad sequence that deactivates the restricted Calle
192. e 1 The ptime packetization period depends on the selected coder name Note 2 If not specified the ptime gets a default value Note 3 The ptime specifies the maximum packetization time the gateway can receive Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the second to fifth coders optional Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the second to forth coder groups optional Click the Submit button to save your changes To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 16 ini File Coder Group Parameters Description The CoderName D parameter ID from 1 to 4 provides groups of coders that can be associated with IP or Tel profiles You can select the following coders g711Alaw64k G 711 A law g711Ulaw64k G 711 p law 97231 G 723 1 6 3 kbps default g7231r53 G 723 1 5 3 kbps 9726 G 726 ADPCM 16 kbps Payload Type 35 g 26r16 G 726 ADPCM 16 kbps Cisco mode PT 23 g726r24 G 726 ADPCM 24 kbps g726r32 G 726 ADPCM 32 kbps PT 2 g726r40 G 726 ADPCM 40 kbps g729 G 729A g729_AnnexB G 729 Annex B The RTP packetization period ptime in msec depends on the selected Coder name and can have the following values G 711 family 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 default 20 G 729 family 10 20 30 40 50 60 default 20 G 723 family 30 60 90 default 30 G 726 family 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 default 20 ini f
193. e 5 Number Cyclic Ascending Note This parameter can appear up to 24 times Note The gateway s port numbers are defined in the Endpoint Phone Numbers table under the Phone Number column For detailed information on the Endpoint Phone Numbers table refer to Section 5 5 7 on page 94 Version 4 6 103 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 10 Configuring the FXO Parameters Use this screen to configure the gateway s specific FXO parameters Toconfigure the FXO parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the FXO Settings screen Protocol Management menu gt FXO the FXO Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 27 FXO Settings Screen FXO Settings Dialing Mode Two Stages Waiting for Dial Tone No Y Time to Wait before Dialing msec 1000 Ring Detection Timeout sec Reorder Tone Duration sec Answer Supervision Rings before Detecting Caller ID Send Metering Message to IP Disconnect on Busy Tone Configure the FXO parameters according to Table 5 27 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page Table 5 27 FXO Parameters continues on pages 104 to 106 152 Parameter Dialing Mode IsTwoStageDial MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Description One Stage 0 One stage dialing Two Stage 1 Two stage dialing defa
194. e H 323 Release Causes are mapped to tones played to the PSTN PBX When establishing an IP gt Tel call the following rules are applied If the remote party PSTN PBX is busy and the FXO gateway detects a Busy tone it sends a Release Cause with User Busy 17 to IP If it detects a Reorder tone it sends a Release Cause with No Route to Destination 3 to IP In both cases the call is released Note that if DisconnectOnBusyTone 0 the FXO gateway ignores the detection of Busy Reorder tones and doesn t release the call For all other MediaPack FXO releases caused when there are no free channels in the specific hunt group or when an appropriate rule for routing the call to a hunt group doesn t exist the MediaPack sends H 323 response to IP according to the parameter DefaultReleaseCause This parameter defines Q 931 release causes Its default value is 3 that is mapped to H 323 Release Cause with No Route to Destination By changing its value to 34 No Circuit Available response is sent Other causes can be used as well Version 4 6 171 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 8 11 Call Detail Report The Call Detail Report CDR contains vital statistic information on calls made by the gateway CDRs are generated at the end and optionally at the beginning of each call determined by the parameter CDRReportLevel The destination IP address for CDR logs is determined by the parameter CDRSyslogServerlP The f
195. e M Version 4 6 11 July 2005 t i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 46 Call EON Desc n continues on pages 140 to 141 T lis MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 12 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual General When viewing this manual on CD Web site or on any other electronic copy all cross references are hyperlinked Click on the page or section numbers shown in blue to reach the individual cross referenced item directly To return back to the point from where you accessed the cross reference press the ALT and lt keys Trademarks AC logo Ardito AudioCoded AudioCodes AudioCodes logo IPmedia Mediant MediaPack MP MLQ NetCoder Stretto TrunkPack VoicePacketizer and VolPerfect are trademarks or registered trademarks of AudioCodes Limited All other products or trademarks are property of their respective owners Customer Support Customer technical support and service are provided by AudioCodes Distributors Partners and Resellers from whom the product was purchased For Customer support for products purchased directly from AudioCodes contact support audiocodes com Abbreviations and Terminology Each abbreviation unless widely used is spelled out in full when first used Only industry standard terms are used throughout this manual Hexadecimal notation is indicated by Ox preceding the number Related Documentation Document Manual Name LTRT 652xx e g LTRT 65201 MediaPack
196. e MAC address Resulting in an ini file name request that contains the gateway s MAC address e To automatically update the cmp file use the parameter CmpFileURL to specify its name and location As a precaution in order to protect the MediaPack from an accidental update the Automatic Update mechanism doesn t apply to the cmp file by default Therefore to enable it set the parameter AutoUpdateCmpFile to 1 The following example illustrates how to utilize Automatic Updates for deploying devices with minimum manual configuration To utilize Automatic Updates for deploying the MediaPack with minimum manual configuration take these 3 steps 1 Setup a Web server in the following example it is http www corp com where all configuration files are to be stored 2 To each device pre configure the following parameter DHCP DNS are assumed IniFileURL http www corp com master configuration ini 3 Create a file named master configuration ini with the following text 4 Common configuration for all devices CptFileURL http www corp com call progress dat Check for updates every 60 minutes AutoUpdateFrequency 60 Additional configuration per device Each device loads a file named after its MAC address e g config 00908F033512 ini IniFileTemplateURL http www corp com config MAC ini Reset the device after configuration is updated The device resets after all of the files are process
197. e SNMP table SNMP tables are special types of SNMP objects which allow parallel arrays of information to be supported Tables are distinguished from scalar objects so that tables can grow without bounds For example SNMP defines the ifDescr object as a standard SNMP object that indicates the text description of each interface supported by a particular device Since network devices can be configured with more than one interface this object can only be represented as an array By convention SNMP objects are always grouped in an Entry directory within an object with a Table suffix The ifDescr object described above resides in the ifEntry directory contained in the ifTable directory 15 1 3 SNMP Extensibility Feature One of the principal components of an SNMP manager is a MIB Compiler which allows new MIB objects to be added to the management system When a MIB is compiled into an SNMP manager the manager is made aware of new objects that are supported by agents on the network The concept is similar to adding a new schema to a database Typically when a MIB is compiled into the system the manager creates new folders or directories that correspond to the objects These folders or directories can typically be viewed with a MIB Browser which is a traditional SNMP management tool incorporated into virtually all Network Management Systems The act of compiling the MIB allows the manager to know about the special ob
198. e first incoming packet Note The NAT mechanism and the IP address translation must be enabled for this parameter to take effect DisableNAT 0 EnablelpAddrTranslation 1 Destination IP address in dotted format notation to which the gateway sends proprietary UDP ping packets The default IP address is 0 0 0 0 Destination UDP port to which the heartbeat packets are sent The range is 0 to 64000 The default is 0 Delay in msec between consecutive heartbeat packets 10 100000 1 disabled default Determines the number of RADIUS retransmission retries for the same request MP 11x only The valid range is 1 to 10 The default value is 3 Determines the time interval measured in seconds the gateway waits for a response before a RADIUS retransmission is issued MP 11x only The valid range is 1 to 30 The default value is 10 Determine the local Secured HTTPS port of the device The valid range is 1 to 65535 other restrictions may apply within this range The default port is 443 Requires client certificates for HTTPS connection The client certificate must be preloaded to the gateway and its matching private key must be installed on the managing PC Time and date must be correctly set on the gateway for the client certificate to be verified 0 Client certificates are not required default 1 Client certificates are required 121 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 37
199. e of Successful Calls Average Call Duration sec Attempted Fax Calls Counter Successful Fax Calls Counter Description This counter indicates the number of calls that failed due to mismatched gateway capabilities It is incremented as a result of an internal identification of capability mismatch This mismatch is reflected to CDR via the value of the parameter DefaultReleaseReason default is GWAPP NO ROUTE TO DESTINATION 3 or by the GWAPP SERVICE NOT IMPLEMENTED UNSPECIFIED 79 reason This counter is incremented as a result of calls that fail due to reasons not covered by the other counters The percentage of established calls from attempted calls The average call duration of established calls This counter indicates the number of attempted fax calls This counter indicates the number of successful fax calls 5 7 1 3 Call Routing Status The Call Routing Status screen provides you with information on the current routing method used by the gateway This information includes the IP address of the Gatekeeper the gateway currently operates with Figure 5 45 Call Routing Status Screen Calls Routing Status Call Routing Current Method Routing Table Current Gatekeeper Not Used Parameter Current Gatekeeper State Table 5 47 Call Routing Status Parameters Description Current Call Routing Method Gatekeeper Gatekeeper is used to route calls Current Gatekeeper Routing Tab
200. e valid range is 0 to 600 The default value is 5 seconds Note This feature helps to overcome connection problems caused by some LAN routers or IP configuration parameters change by a DHCP Server Defines the maximum number of calls that the gateway can have active at the same time If the maximum number of calls is reached new calls are not established The default value is max available channels no restriction on the maximum number of calls The valid range is 1 to max number of channels 65 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 5 Advanced Parameters General Parameters continues on pages 63 to 66 Parameter Max Call Duration MaxCallDuration Enable LAN Watchdog EnableLanWatchDog Enable Calls Cut Through CutThrough Description Defines the maximum call duration in minutes If this time expires both sides of the call are released IP and Tel The valid range is 0 to 120 The default is 0 no limitation Disable 0 Disable LAN Watch Dog default Enable 1 Enable LAN Watch Dog If LAN Watch Dog is enabled the gateway restarts when a network failure is detected Enables users to receive incoming IP calls while the port is in an offhooked state Disable 0 Disabled default Enable 1 Enabled If enabled FXS gateways answer the call and cut through the voice channel if there is no other active call on that port even if the port is in offhooked state When the call is
201. eb Server set the parameter Embedded Telnet Server under Advanced Configuration Network Settings gt Application Settings to Enable Unsecured or Enable Secured SSL and save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Reset the gateway Use a standard Telnet application to connect to the MediaPack Embedded Telnet Server Note that if the Telnet server is set to SSL mode a special Telnet client is required on your PC to connect to the Telnet interface over a secured connection refer to Section 12 1 2 on page 196 4 Login using the same username default Admin and password default Admin you use for the Embedded Web Server s Administrator level gt To access the CLI via the Embedded Web Server take these 2 steps 1 Access the MediaPack Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 3 on page 46 2 Inthe URL field append the suffix CmdShelllnterface note that it s case sensitive to the IP address e g http 10 1 229 17 CmdShelllnterface the CLI screen is displayed Figure 14 1 Embedded Web Server CLI Screen Cmd Shell Save ndReset RestoreFactorySettings SetConfigParam GetParameterDescription GetConfigParam ConfigFile AutoUPDate CONFiguration Command Line I Version 4 6 205 July 2005 i AudioCodes 14 2 MediaPack H 323 Using the CLI The CLI commands are organized in folders When first entering CLI the user prompt is locate
202. eb or SNMP you can choose to save the changes to the non volatile memory Therefore there is no need to use the Save Configuration screen Note Saving changes to the non volatile memory may disrupt traffic on the gateway To avoid this disable all traffic before saving gt To save the changes to the non volatile take these 2 steps 1 Click the Save Configuration button on the main menu bar the Save Configuration screen is displayed Figure 5 58 Save Configuration Screen Save the Configuration to Flash Memory Note Please verify prior to saving the configuration that no traffic is running on the device 2 Click the Save Configuration button in the middle of the screen a confirmation message appears when the save is complete MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 152 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 10 Resetting the MediaPack The Reset screen enables you to remotely reset the gateway Before reset you can choose to save the gateway configuration to flash memory gt Toreset the MediaPack take these 3 steps 1 Click the Reset button on the main menu bar the Reset screen is displayed Figure 5 59 Reset Screen Burn configuration into flash memory Burn Dont Burn Click to reset the system 2 Select one of the following options gt Burn default the current configuration is burned to flash prior to reset gt Don t Burn
203. econd channel uses RTP 4010 RTCP 4011 and T 38 4012 etc Note If RTP Base UDP Port is not a factor of 10 the following message is generated invalid local RTP port For detailed information on the default RTP RTCP T 38 port allocation refer to the Section C 3 on page 250 Diff Serv Code Point DSCP value that is assigned to the RTP packets The DSCP value is used by DiffServ compatible routers to prioritize how packets are sent By prioritizing packets the DiffServ routers can minimize the transmission delays for time sensitive packets such as VoIP packets The valid range is 0 to 63 The default value is 0 Note The parameter IPDiffServ mustn t be used simultaneously with the parameters IPTOS and IPPrecedence Value that is assigned to IP Type Of Service TOS field in the IP header for all RTP packets sent by the VoIP gateway The valid range is 0 to 15 The default value is 0 Note The parameters IPTOS and IPPrecedence mustn t be used simultaneously with the parameter IPDiffServ 115 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 33 Network Settings RTP Settings Parameters Parameter Description RTP IP Precedence Value that is assigned to the IP Precedence field in the IP header for all RTP packets IPPrecedence sent by the VoIP gateway The valid range is 0 to 7 The default value is 0 Note The parameters IPTOS and IPPrecedence mustn t be used simultaneously with the parameter IPDiffServ Remote RTP B
204. ed ResetNow 1 Version 4 6 185 July 2005 AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 10 4 You can modify the master_configuration ini file or any of the config MAC ini files at any time The MediaPack queries for the latest version every 60 minutes and applies the new settings immediately Startup Process The startup process illustrated in Figure 10 3 on page 187 begins when the gateway is reset physically or from the Web SNMP and ends when the operational software is running In the startup process the network parameters software and configuration files are obtained After the gateway powers up or after it is physically reset it broadcasts a BootRequest message to the network If it receives a reply from a BootP server it changes its network parameters IP address subnet mask and default gateway address to the values provided If there is no reply from a BootP server and if DHCP is enabled DHCPEnable 1 the gateway initiates a standard DHCP procedure to configure its network parameters After changing the network parameters the gateway attempts to load the cmp and various configuration files from the TFTP server s IP address received from the BootP DHCP servers If a TFTP server s IP address isn t received the gateway attempts to load the software cmp file and or configuration files from a preconfigured TFTP server refer to Section 10 3 on page 184 Thus the gateway can obtain its network parameters from Boot
205. ed in Table 5 11 are used to configure the Alternative Routing mechanism e AltRoutingTel2IPEnable e AltRoutingTel2IPMode e PConnQoSMaxAllowedPL e IPConnQoSMaxAllowedDelay Name Identification The H 450 8 service enables MediaPack gateways to send and receive the calling party name and its presentation allowed or restricted To configure name identification set the following parameter e EnableNameldentification MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 170 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Telephony Capabilities 8 9 Call Termination on MediaPack FXO The following six methods for call termination are supported by the MediaPack FXO Note that the used disconnection methods must be supported by the CO or PBX e Detection of polarity reversal current disconnect This is the recommended method The call is immediately disconnected after polarity reversal or current disconnect is detected on the Tel side assuming the PBX CO produces this signal Relevant parameters EnableReversalPolarity EnableCurrentDisconnect CurrentDisconnectDuration CurrentDisconnectDefaultThreshold and TimeToSampleAnalogLineVoltage e Detection of Reorder Busy tones The call is immediately disconnected after Reorder Busy tone is detected on the Tel side assuming the PBX CO produces this tone This method requires the correct tone frequencies and cadence to be defined in the Call Progress Tones file If these frequencies are
206. ed to the corresponding hunt group the prefix 21 is removed from the original number so that only 100 is left Note 1 Applicable only if number manipulation is performed after call routing for IP Tel calls refer to IP to Tel Routing Mode parameter Note 2 Similar operation of removing the prefix is also achieved by using the usual number manipulation rules No 0 Disable the Alternative Routing feature default Yes 1 Enable the Alternative Routing feature Status Only 2 The Alternative Routing feature is disabled A read only information on the quality of service of the destination IP addresses is provided For information on the Alternative Routing feature refer to Section 8 6 on page 168 None 0 Alternative routing is not used Conn 1 Alternative routing is performed if ping to initial destination failed QoS 2 Alternative routing is performed if poor quality of service was detected Both 3 Alternative routing is performed if either ping to initial destination failed or poor quality of service was detected or DNS host name is not resolved default Note Quality of Service QoS is quantified according to delay and packet loss calculated according to previous calls QoS statistics are reset if no new data is received for two minutes For information on the Alternative Routing feature refer to Section 8 6 on page 168 Packet loss percentage at which the IP connection is considered a fail
207. ed to the end of the file name If the file is not saved the gateway reverts to the old version of software after the next reset Note 2 The Boot file field can contain up to two file names cmp file name to be used for load of application image and ini file name to be used for gateway provisioning Either one two or no file names can appear in the Boot file field To use both file names use the separator without blank spaces between the xxx cmp and the yyy ini files e g ram cmp H323gw ini ini File This field specifies the configuration ini file that the gateway uses to program its various settings Enter the name of the file that is loaded by the TFTP utility to the VoIP gateway after it receives the BootReply message The actual ini file is located in the TFTP utility directory that is specified in the BootP Preferences window 245 July 2005 i AudioCodes B 11 6 Switch fb em MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Using Command Line Switches MediaPack H 323 You can add command line switches in the field Boot File Place your cursor after cmp Press the space bar me gu M ay Type in the switch you require Example ramxxx cmp fb to burn flash memory To use a Command Line Switch take these 4 steps In the field Boot File leave the file name defined in the field as it is e g ramxxx cmp ramxxx cmp fb em 4 to burn flash memory and for Ethernet Mode 4 auto negotiate Table B 1 l
208. efix gateway domain com Note 1 lt destination source phone prefix gt can be single number or a range of numbers For available notations refer to Section 5 5 3 1 on page 75 Note 2 This parameter can appear up to 50 times Note 3 Parameters can be skipped by using the sign for example Prefix 10 2 10 2 202 1 IP to Hunt Group Routing Table The IP to Hunt Group Routing Table is used to route incoming IP calls to groups of channels called hunt groups Calls are assigned to hunt groups according to any combination of the following three options or using each independently e Destination phone prefix e Source phone prefix e Source IP address The call is then sent to the VoIP gateway channels assigned to that hunt group The specific channel within a hunt group that is assigned to accept the call is determined according to the hunt group s channel selection mode which is defined in the Hunt Group Settings table Section 5 5 9 on page 102 or according to the global parameter ChannelSelectMode refer to Table 5 5 on page 63 Hunt groups can be used on both FXO and FXS gateways however usually they are used with FXO gateways Note that when a Gatekeeper is used before an incoming call is being routed to the relevant hunt group an Admission request is sent to the Gatekeeper Calls that aren t authorized are dropped When the parameter PreferRouteTable is set to 1 the gateway checks the Source IP
209. ekeeper parameters screen is displayed Figure 5 4 Gatekeeper Parameters Screen Gatekeeper General l Working with Gatekeeper Gatekeeper IP Address No Se 0 0 0 0 Gatekeeper ID Use Alternative Gatekeeper m No Gatekeeper Redundancy Disable Use Redundant Gatekeeper on RRJ Fallback to Internal Routing No No Prefer Routing Table No Enable RAI Disable RAI High Threshold RAI Low Threshold RAI Loop Time Enable Pre Grant ARQ Disable Gateway Registration Type E164 Register as Terminal Timers Registration Time sec RAS Response Timeout sec Number of RAS Retransmissions Time between Gatekeeper Retries sec Configure the Gatekeeper parameters according to Table 5 2 Click the Submit button to save your changes or click the Re Register button to save your changes and to re register to the Gatekeeper 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Version 4 6 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 2 Gatekeeper Parameters continues on pages 54 to 56 Parameter General Working with Gatekeeper IsGatekeeperUsed Gatekeeper IP Address GatekeeperlP Or GatekeeperlP IP ID Gatekeeper ID GatekeeperlP IP ID Use Alternative Gatekeeper AlternativeGKUsed Gatekeeper Redundancy IsRedundantGKUsed Second Gatekeep
210. el adaptation when connected to a variety of equipment from both Tel and IP sides and protocols each of which require a different system behavior Using Profiles users can assign different Profiles behavior on a per call basis using the Tel to IP and IP to Hunt Group Routing tables or associate different Profiles to the gateway s endpoint s The Profiles contain parameters such as Coders T 38 Relay Voice and DTMF Gains Silence Suppression Echo Canceler RTP DiffServ Current Disconnect and more The Profiles feature allows users to tune these parameters or turn them on or off per source or destination routing and or the specific gateway or its ports For example specific ports can be designated to have a profile which always uses G 711 Each call can be associated with one or two Profiles Tel Profile and or IP Profile If both IP and Tel profiles apply to the same call the coders and other common parameters of the preferred Profile determined by the Preference option are applied to that call If the Preference of the Tel and IP Profiles is identical the Tel Profile parameters are applied The default values of the parameters in the Tel and IP Profiles are identical to the Web ini file parameter values If a value of a parameter is changed in the Web ini file it is automatically updated in the Profiles correspondingly After any parameter in the Profile is modified by the user modifications to parameters in the Web ini file no lon
211. enabled on both gateways To enable ThroughPacket set the parameter RemoteBaseUDPPort to a nonzero value Note that the value of RemoteBaseUDPPort on the local gateway must equal the value of BaseUDPPort of the remote gateway The gateway uses these parameters to identify and distribute the payloads from the received multiplexed IP packet to the relevant channels In ThroughPacket mode the gateway uses a single UDP port for all incoming multiplexed packets and a different port for outgoing packets These ports are configured using the parameters L1L1ComplexTxUDPPort and L1L1ComplexRxUDPPort When ThroughPacket is used the following options aren t available e DTMF transport using RFC 2833 DTMFs should be transported out of band e Call statistics since there is no RTCP flow MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 168 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Telephony Capabilities 8 7 Dynamic Jitter Buffer Operation Voice frames are transmitted at a fixed rate If the frames arrive at the other end at the same rate voice quality is perceived as good In many cases however some frames can arrive slightly faster or slower than the other frames This is called jitter delay variation and degrades the perceived voice quality To minimize this problem the gateway uses a jitter buffer The jitter buffer collects voice packets stores them and sends them to the voice processor in evenly
212. enabled the MediaPack can be used for connection to EIA TIA 464B DID Loop Start lines Both FXO detection and FXS generation are supported An FXO gateway dials DTMF digits after a Wink signal is detected instead of a Dial tone An FXS gateway generates the Wink signal after the detection of offhook instead of playing a Dial tone The time period in seconds after user hangs up the phone and before call is disconnected FXS Also called Regret time The default time is 0 seconds Disconnect and Answer Supervision Enable Polarity Reversal EnableReversalPolarity Enable Current Disconnect EnableCurrentDisconnect Disconnect on Broken Connection Disable 0 Disable the polarity reversal service default Enable 1 Enable the polarity reversal service If the polarity reversal service is enabled then the FXS gateway changes the line polarity on call answer and changes it back on call release The FXO gateway sends an H 225 Connect message when polarity reversal signal is detected and releases a call when a second signal is detected Disable 0 Disable the current disconnect service default Enable 1 Enable the current disconnect service If the current disconnect service is enabled the FXO gateway releases a call when current disconnect signal is detected on its port while the FXS gateway generates a Current Disconnect Pulse after a call is released from IP The current disconnect duration is d
213. ence on off cycle First Burst Ring Off Time 10 msec Ring Off period in 10 msec units for the first cadence on off cycle Second Burst Ring On Time 10 msec Ring On period in 10 msec units for the second cadence on off cycle Second Burst Ring Off Time 10 msec Ring Off period in 10 msec units for the second cadence on off cycle Third Burst Ring On Time 10 msec Ring On period in 10 msec units for the third cadence on off cycle Third Burst Ring Off Time 10 msec Ring Off period in 10 msec units for the third cadence on off cycle Fourth Burst Ring On Time 10 msec Ring Off period in 10 msec units for the forth cadence on off cycle Fourth Burst Ring Off Time 10 msec Ring Off period in 10 msec units for the forth cadence on off cycle 16 1 2 1 Examples of Various Ringing Signals Figure 16 3 Examples of Various Ringing Signals Ring Type 0 Freq Hz 20 First Ring On Time 10msec 200 First Ring Off Time 10msec 400 GR 506 CORE Ringing Pattern 3 20 Hz ringing comprised of three cadences NUMBER OF DISTINCTIVE RINGING PATTERNS Number of Ringing Patterns 1 Ring Type 0 Freq Hz 20 First Ring On Time 10msec 40 First Ring Off Time 10msec 20 Second Ring On Time 10msec 40 Second Ring Off Time 10msec 20 Third Ring On Time 10msec 80 Regular North American Ringing Pattern 20 Hz 2 sec On 4 sec Off NUMBER OF DISTINCTIVE RING
214. encrypted Setting Up a RADIUS Server A free RADIUS server FreeRADIUS can be downloaded from www freeradius org Follow the directions on that site for information on installing and configuring the server If you use a RADIUS server from a different vendor refer to its appropriate documentation MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 198 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 12 Security MP 11x Only gt To setup a RADIUS server take these 4 steps 1 Define the MP 11x as an authorized client of the RADIUS server with a predefined shared secret a password used to secure communication The figure below displays an example of the file clients conf FreeRADIUS client configuration Figure 12 4 Example of the File clients conf FreeRADIUS Client Configuration clieuts cont client configuration directives ulakeione GLO sek dep a GIGIG Teen FutureRADIUS shortname tpl610 master tpm 2 Inthe RADIUS server define the list of users authorized to use the MP 11x using one of the password authentication methods supported by the server implementation The following example shows a user configuration file for FreeRADIUS using a plain text password Figure 12 5 Example of a User Configuration File for FreeRADIUS Using a Plain Text Password users local user configuration database john Auth Type Local User Password qwerty Service Type Login User Auth Type Local User Password 1234
215. end FXS Coefficient file fram your computer to the device Browse Send File Send Voice Prompts file from your computer to the device Browse Send File MM DD Hour Min Sec i 6 f s fe BEREHEREEN 2 Enter the time and date where the gateway is installed 3 Click the Set Date amp Time button the date and time are automatically updated Note that after performing a hardware reset the date and time are returned to their defaults and should be updated gt To load a configuration file to the VoIP gateway take these 8 steps 1 Open the Regional Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Regional Settings the Regional Settings screen is displayed shown in Figure 5 41 Click the Browse button adjacent to the file you want to load Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to load 4 Click the file and click the Open button the name and path of the file appear in the field beside the Browse button 5 Click the Send File button that is next to the field that contains the name of the file you want to load An exclamation mark in the screen section indicates that the file s loading doesn t take effect on the fly e g CPT file 6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each file you want to load MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 136 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Note 1 Saving a configuration file to flash me
216. ent MAC address gt Client Disabled A BootRequest was received and there is a matching client entry in the BootP tool but this entry is disabled Listed At Another BootP utility is listed as supporting a particular client when the Test Selected Client button is clicked for details on Testing a client refer to Section B 11 4 on page 244 gt Download Status Progress of a TFTP load to a client shown in 96 e NewIP File shows the IP address applied to the client as a result of the BootP transaction as well as the file name and path of a file transfer for a TFTP transaction e Client Name shows the client name as configured for that client in the Client Configuration Screen Use right click on a line in the Log Window to open a pop up window with the following options e Reset Selecting this option results in a reset command being sent to the client VoIP gateway The program searches its database for the MAC address indicated in the line If the client is found in that database the program adds the client MAC address to the Address Resolution Protocol ARP table for the computer The program then sends a reset command to the client This enables a reset to be sent without knowing the current IP address of the client as long as the computer sending the reset is on the same subnet Note In order to use reset as described above the user must have administrator privileges on the computer Attempting to perform this type of re
217. ent to the Gatekeeper and an SNMP acBoardCallResourcesAlarm Alarm Trap is sent if gateway resources fall below a predefined configurable threshold High Threshold in percentage that defines the gateway s busy endpoints The range is 0 to 100 The default value is 90 When the percentage of the gateway s busy endpoints exceeds the value configured in High Threshold the gateway sends RAI message with almostOutOfResources TRUE and an SNMP acBoardCallResourcesAlarm Alarm Trap with a major Alarm Status Note The gateway s available Resources are calculated by dividing the number of busy endpoints by the total number of available gateway endpoints Low Threshold in percentage that defines the gateway s busy endpoints The range is 0 to 100 The default value is 90 When the percentage of the gateway s busy endpoints falls below the value defined in Low Threshold the gateway sends RAI message with almostOutOfResources FALSE and an SNMP acBoardCallResourcesAlarm Alarm Trap with a cleared Alarm Status Time interval in seconds that the gateway checks for resource availability The default is 10 seconds 55 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 2 Gatekeeper Parameters continues on pages 54 to 56 Parameter Enable Pre Grant ARQ EnablePregrantARQ Gateway Registration Type GWRegistrType Register as Terminal IsTerminal Timers Registration Time se
218. er 4 Select the coder i e vocoder that best suits your VoIP system requirements The default coder is G 7231 30 msec To program the entire list of coders you want the MediaPack to use click the button on the left side of the 1 Coder field the drop down list for the 2 to 5 coders appear Select coders according to your system requirements Note that coders higher on the list are preferred and take precedence over coders lower on the list Version 4 6 43 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Note The preferred coder is the coder that the MediaPack uses as a first choice for all connections If the far end gateway does not use this coder the MediaPack negotiates with the far end gateway to select a coder that both sides can use 5 To program the Tel to IP Routing table press the arrow button next to Tel to IP Routing Table For information on how to configure the Tel to IP Routing table refer to Section 5 5 4 2 on page 79 6 To program the Endpoint Phone Number table press the arrow button next to Endpoint Phone Numbers For information on how to configure the Endpoint Phone Number table refer to Section 5 5 7 on page 94 7 Click the Reset button and click OK in the prompt The MediaPack applies the changes and restarts You are now ready to start using the VoIP gateway To prevent unauthorized access to the MediaPack it is recommended that you change the username and password that are used to acce
219. er IP Address GatekeeperlP Or GatekeeperlP IP ID Second Gatekeeper ID GatekeeperlP MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 54 Description No 0 Gatekeeper isn t used Yes 1 Gatekeeper is used default If you are using a Gatekeeper enter the IP address of the primary Gatekeeper in the Gatekeeper IP address field If you are not using a Gatekeeper you must configure the Tel to IP Routing table on the gateway described in Section 5 5 4 2 on page 79 IP address or domain name of the primary Gatekeeper you are using Enter the IP address in dotted format notation for example 201 10 8 1 Note When using a domain name you must enter a Primary Domain Name Server DNS or alternatively define this name in the Internal DNS Table ini file note Use this parameter to define the ID of the primary Gatekeeper GatekeeperlP IP ID String used to identify the primary Gatekeeper Used in Registration Request RRQ messages The default value is an empty string ini file note The ID of the primary Gatekeeper is defined by the first entry of the ini file parameter GatekeeperlP GatekeeperlP IP ID No 0 Disabled default Yes 1 Alternative Gatekeepers option is enabled The Alternative Gatekeeper mechanism is implemented according to para 7 2 6 in the H 323v4 standard No 0 If you are using a single Gatekeeper default Yes 1 If you are using two or three Gatekeepers If you enable
220. er and device interface expanded debugging are enabled 6 6 Flow device interface stack interface session manager and device interface expanded debugging are enabled In addition all H 323 messages are printed according to their ASN 1 format Note Usually set to 6 if debug traces are needed No PI 0 Progress Indicator PI isn t set in the H 225 Alert messages PI 1 1 Progress Indicator is set to 1 PI 1 in the sent H 225 Alert messages PI 8 8 Progress Indicator is set to 8 PI 8 in the sent H 225 Alert messages Not Configured 1 Default values are used The default for FXO gateways is 1 The default for FXS gateways is 0 No 0 Busy out feature is not used default Yes 1 The MediaPack FXS gateway plays a reorder tone when the phone is offhooked and there is a network problem or a Gatekeeper does not respond Default Release Cause to IP for IP gt Tel calls used when the gateway initiates a call release and if an explicit matching cause for this release isn t found a default release cause can be configured The default release cause is NO ROUTE TO DESTINATION 3 Other common values are NO CIRCUIT AVAILABLE 34 or NETWORK OUT OF ORDER 38 etc Note The default release cause is described in the Q 931 notation and is translated to corresponding to H 323 NetCause equivalent value Defines the amount of time in seconds the gateway s operation is delayed after a reset cycle Th
221. ers for MediaPack channels a b c d a first channel b number of channels starting from a c the phone number of the first channel d Tel Profile ID assigned to the group of channels For example ChannelList 0 8 101 defines phone numbers 101 to 108 for up to 8 MP 108 channels Note 1 The ini file can include up to 24 ChannelList entries Note 2 The ChannelList can be used instead of or in addition to Channel2Phone parameter Phone number of channel Its format Channel2Phone lt channel gt lt number gt lt channel gt is 0 23 Example Channel2Phone 0 1002 Appears once for each channel 8 times for MP 108 or 4 times for MP 104 and twice for MP 102 For 8 port and 24 port gateways it is suggested to use TrunkGroup parameter where in a single line all gateway s phone numbers can be defined Note When Channel2Phone is used to define an endpoint hunt group and profile can t be assigned to that endpoint 95 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 8 Configuring the Endpoint Settings The Endpoint Settings screens enable you to configure port specific parameters 5 5 8 1 H 323 Port ID The H 323 Port ID table enables you to assign a specific ID to each port These IDs are used for registration to the Gatekeeper RRQ when GWRegistrType 1 or 2 and for Gatekeeper admission ARQ and call initialization when SourceEncodeType 1 or 2 This table is ign
222. ers is performed i e only common coders remain The order of the coders is determined by the preference 5 Configure the Profile s parameters according to your requirements For detailed information on each parameter refer to the description of the screen in which it is configured as an individual parameter 6 Inthe Coder Group drop down list select the coder group you want to assign to that Profile You can select the gateway s default coders refer to Section 5 5 1 3 on page 57 or one of 2 In the current version the parameter Signaling DiffServ cannot be configured using Profiles MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 90 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Parameter IPProfile_ID Version 4 6 the coder groups you defined in the Coder Group Settings screen refer to Section 5 5 5 1 on page 86 Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the second to fifth IP Profiles optional Click the Submit button to save your changes To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 18 ini File IP Profile Settings Description IPProfile Profile ID Profile Name gt lt Preference gt lt Coder Group ID IsFaxUsed gt lt DJBufMinDelay gt DJBufOptFactor gt lt IPDiffServ gt lt ControllPDiffServ gt lt EnableSilenceCompression gt lt RTPRedundancyDepth gt lt RemoteBaseUDPPort gt For example IPProf
223. ers n m The following Number Plan and Number Type values are supported e 0 0 Unknown Unknown e 9 0 Private Unknown e 9 1 Private Level 2 Regional e 9 2 Private Level 1 Regional e 9 3 Private PISN Specific e 9 4 Private Level 0 Regional local e 1 0 Public ISDN E 164 Unknown e 1 1 Public ISDN E 164 International e 1 2 Public ISDN E 164 National e 1 3 Public ISDN E 164 Network Specific e 1 4 Public ISDN E 164 Subscriber e 1 6 Public ISDN E 164 Abbreviated Version 4 6 93 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 7 Configuring the Endpoint Phone Number Table From the Endpoint Phone Numbers screen you can enable and assign telephone numbers hunt groups optional and profiles to the VoIP gateway ports Toconfigure the Endpoint Phone Numbers table take these 4 steps 1 Open the Endpoint Phone Numbers Table screen Protocol Management menu gt Endpoint Phone Numbers the Endpoint Phone Numbers Table screen is displayed Figure 5 20 Endpoint Phone Number Table Screen Endpoint Phone Number Table Channel s Phone Number Hunt Group ID Profile ID 2 Configure the Endpoint Phone Numbers according to Table 5 20 You must enter a number in the Phone Number fields for each port that you want to use 3 Click the Submit button to save your changes or click the Re Register button to save your changes and to re register to the Gatekeeper
224. es In future software releases it is to be expanded to consist of different sets of line parameters which can be selected in the ini file for each port MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 228 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 17 Selected Technical Specifications 17 Selected Technical Specifications 17 1 MP 1xx Specifications Table 17 1 MP 1xx Selected Technical Specifications continues on pages 229 to 231 MP 1xx FXS Functionality FXS Capabilities Short or Long Haul MP 10x FXS Up to 7 km 23 000 feet using 24 AWG line MP 124 FXS Up to 6 km 20 000 feet using 24 AWG line Note The lines were tested under the following conditions ring voltage greater than 30 Vrms offhook loop current greater than 20 mA Caller ID generation Bellcore GR 30 CORE Type 1 using Bell 202 FSK modulation ETSI Type 1 NTT Denmark India Brazil British and DTMF ETSI CID ETS 300 659 1 Programmable Line Characteristics Battery feed line current hook thresholds AC impedance matching hybrid balance Tx amp Rx frequency response Tx amp Rx Gains Programmable ringing signal Up to three cadences and frequency 15 to 200 Hz Drive up to 4 phones per port total 32 phones simultaneously in offhook and Ring states MP 124 REN 2 MP 10x REN 5 Over temperature protection for abnormal situations as shorted lines Loop backs for testing and maintenance MP 1xx FXO Functionality FXO Capabilities does
225. es PBX name ITU Jamaica Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU Korea Republic of Tone name Busy tone Matches PBX name ITU Montserrat Tone name Busy tone e Information related to matches of all tones recorded with the CPTWizard s internal database The database is scanned to find one or more PBX definitions that match all recorded tones i e dial tone busy tone ringing tone reorder tone and any other manually recorded tone all match the definitions of the PBX If a match is found the entire PBX definition is reported as comments in the ini file using the same format Figure D 12 Full PBX Country Database Match Some tones matched PBX country Audc US Additional database tones guessed below remove s to use Audc US US Ringback tone CALL PROGRESS TONE 5 one Type 2 Low Freq Hz 450 High Freq Hz 500 Low Freq Level dBm 0 High Freq Level dBm 0 irst Signal On Time 10msec 180 First Signal Off Time 10msec 450 Second Signal On Time 10msec 0 Second Signal Off Time 10msec 0 If a match is found in the database consider using the database s definitions instead of the recorded definitions as they might be more accurate For full operability of the MediaPack FXO gateway it may be necessary to edit this file and add more Call Progress Tone definitions Sample Call Progress Tones ini files are available in the release package When the Call Prog
226. es Ltd AHAONEI OTI MP 124 SYMMOP ONETAI lIPOX TIZ OYZIQAEIZ ATIAITH2EIX KAI TIX AOINE ZXETIKEX AIATAZEIZ THX OAHMAZ 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Hungarian Alul rott AudioCodes Ltd nyilatkozom hogy a MP 124 megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 270 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual F Regulatory Information Icelandic Italian Latvian Lithuanian Maltese Norwegian Polish Portuguese Slovak Slovene Spanish Swedish ki etta er samr mi vi tilskipun Evr pusambandsins 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Con la presente AudioCodes Ltd dichiara che questo MP 124 conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla directiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Ar o AudioCodes Ltd deklare ka MP 124 atbilst Direktivas 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC b tiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem AudioCodes Ltd deklaruoja kad irenginys MP 124 tenkina 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas sios direktyvos nuostatas Hawnhekk AudioCodes Ltd jiddikjara li dan MP 124 jikkonforma mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Dette produktet er i samh righet med det Europeiske Direktiv 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC AudioCodes Ltd deklarujemy z pelna odpowiedzialnoscia ze wyr b M
227. estarts with the new network settings 207 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 208 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 15 SNMP Based Management 15 15 1 15 1 1 SNMP Based Management Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a standard based network control protocol used to manage elements in a network The SNMP Manager usually implemented by a Network Manager NM or an Element Manager EM connects to an SNMP Agent embedded on a remote Network Element NE to perform network element Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM Both the SNMP Manager and the NE refer to the same database to retrieve information or configure parameters This database is referred to as the Management Information Base MIB and is a set of statistical and control values Apart from the standard MIBs documented in IETF RFCs SNMP additionally enables the use of private MIBs containing a non standard information set specific functionality provided by the NE Directives issued by the SNMP Manager to an SNMP Agent consist of the identifiers of SNMP variables referred to as MIB object identifiers or MIB variables along with instructions to either get the value for that identifier or set the identifier to a new value configuration The SNMP Agent can also send unsolicited events towards the EM called SNMP traps The definitions of MIB variables supported by a particular
228. etect Fax on Answer Tone initiate T 38 on Preambl v Source Number Encoding Type Et4 v Destination Number Encoding Type Et4 Q 931 Multiplexing Disable A Release Call on Setup Ack No m Does Setup Include Phone Number Yes M H 323 Base Port ct H 225 Listen Port 20 H 225 Dial Port zo Enable Q 931 Cause Enable A H 245 Round Trip Time b O Enable H 235 Security Disable sj H 235 User Name mn H 235 Password Default_Passwd Play Ringback Tone to IP Dont Play A Play Ringback Tone to Tel PreferIP 4A Version 4 6 49 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Configure the general parameters under Protocol Definition according to Table 5 1 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 1 Protocol Definition General Parameters continues on pages 50 to 52 Parameter Connection Mode IsFastConnectUsed IsTunnelingUsed Channel Select Mode ChannelSelectMode H 323 ID H323IDString Open H 245 OpenH245onFS Open Media on Connect Description Gateway s connection modes Normal IsFastConnectUsed 0 IsTunnelingUsed 0 default Tunneling IsFastConnectUsed 0 IsTunnelingUsed 1 Fast Start IsFastConnectUsed 1 IsTunnelingUsed 0 Fast Start Tunneling IsFastConnectUsed 1 IsTunnelingUsed 1 The Fast Start connection mode allo
229. etermined by the parameter CurrentDisconnectDuration The current disconnect threshold FXO only is determined by the parameter CurrentDisconnectDefaultThreshold The frequency at which the analog line voltage is sampled is determined by the parameter TimeToSampleAnalogLineVoltage No 0 Don t release the call Yes 1 Call is released if RTP packets are not received for a predefined timeout DisconnectOnBrokenConne default ction Broken Connection Timeout 100 msec BrokenConnectionEventTi meout Disconnect Call on Silence Detection EnableSilenceDisconnect Silence Detection Period sec FarEndDisconnectSilenceP eriod Note 1 If enabled the timeout is set by the parameter BrokenConnectionEventTimeout in 100 msec resolution The default timeout is 10 seconds BrokenConnectionEventTimeout 100 Note 2 This feature is applicable only if RTP session is used without Silence Compression If Silence Compression is enabled the gateway doesn t detect that the RTP connection is broken Note 3 During a call if the source IP address from where the RTP packets were sent is changed without notifying the gateway the gateway filters these RTP packets To overcome this issue set DisconnectOnBrokenConnection 0 the gateway doesn t detect RTP packets arriving from the original source IP address and switches after 300 msec to the RTP packets arriving from the new source IP address The amou
230. etransmitted to the network The valid range is 0 to 2 The default value is 0 Number of times that control packets are retransmitted when using the T 38 standard The valid range is 0 to 4 The default value is 2 Disable 0 Error Correction Mode ECM mode is not used during fax relay Enable 1 ECM mode is used during fax relay default Maximum rate in bps at which fax relay messages are transmitted You can select 2400 0 2 4 kbps 4800 1 4 8 kbps 7200 2 7 2 kbps 9600 3 9 6 kbps 12000 4 12 0 kbps 14400 5 14 4 kbps default 129 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 41 Channel Settings Fax Modem CID Parameters continues on pages 128 to 130 Parameter Description Fax Modem Bypass Coder Type Coder the gateway uses when performing fax modem bypass Usually high bit FaxModemBypassCoderType rate coders such as G 711 should be used You can select G711 A law 64 0 default G711 u law 1 G726 32 4 G726 40 11 Fax Modem Bypass Packing Factor Number of 20 msec coder payloads that are used to generate a fax modem FaxModemBypassM Bypass packet The valid range is 1 2 or 3 coder payloads The default value is 1 coder payload CNG Detector Mode Disable 0 Don t detect CNG default CNGDetectorMode Relay 1 N A Event Only 2 Detect CNG on caller side and start fax session if IsFaxUsed 1 Normally T 38 fax session starts when the
231. eway to work in one stage dialing mode Note 3 If the parameter EnableDigitDelivery is enabled it is possible to configure the gateway to wait for dial tone per destination phone number before or during dialing of destination phone number therefore the parameter IsWaitForDialTone that is configurable for the entire gateway is ignored Note 4 The FXS gateway sends Connect messages only after it finishes playing the DTMF digits to the phone line Disable 0 Disabled default Enable 1 Enable digit delivery to IP The digit delivery feature enables sending of DTMF digits to the destination IP address after the Tel gt IP call was answered To enable this feature modify the called number to include at least one p character The gateway uses the digits before the p character in the initial Setup message After the call was answered the gateway waits for the required time of p 1 5 seconds and then sends the rest of the DTMF digits using the method chosen in band out of band Note The called number can include several p characters 1 5 seconds pause For example the called number can be as follows pp699 p9p300 63 July 2005 AudioCodes bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 5 Advanced Parameters General Parameters continues on pages 63 to 66 Parameter Enable DID Wink EnableDIDWink Reanswer Time RegretTime Description Disable 0 DID is disabled default Enable 1 Enable DID If
232. f the packet count in percents below which is considered silence by the media gateway The valid range is 1 to 100 The default is 8 Note Applicable only if silence is detected according to packet count FarEndDisconnectSilenceMethod 1 Enables Japan NTT Modem Direct Inward Dialing DID support FXS gateways can be connected to Japan s NTT PBX using Modem DID lines These DID lines are used to deliver a called number to the PBX applicable to FXS gateways The DID signal can be sent alone or combined with an NTT Caller ID signal Enables generation of Japan NTT Modem DID signal per port EnableDID_ lt Port gt lt Modem DID gt Modem DID 0 Disabled default 1 Enabled If not configured use the global parameter EnableDID Note Applicable only to MediaPack FXS gateways Defines a RAS destination port to which the gateway sends RAS messages to the Gatekeeper 0 Use dynamic port that is selected by the operating system 1 65535 Static port The default port is 1719 Defines a RAS source port from which the gateway sends RAS messages to the Gatekeeper 0 Use dynamic port that is selected by the operating system 1 65535 Static port The default port is 1719 0 not used default 1 Send H 245 User Input Indication message when hook flash is detected Received facility message with hook flash signal generates hook flash at FXO channel Timeout in seconds for establishment of H
233. ference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help F 2 MP 1xx FXO Declaration of Conformity Application of Council Directives 73 23 EEC including amendments 89 336 EEC including amendments 1999 5 EC Annex ll of the Directive Standards to which Conformity is Declared EN55022 1998 Class B EN55024 1998 EN61000 3 2 1995 including amendments A1 1998 A2 1998 A14 2000 EN61000 3 3 1995 EN60950 2000 TBR 21 1998 Manufacturer s Name AudioCodes Ltd Manufacturer s Address 1 Hayarden Street Airport City Lod 70151 Israel Type of Equipment Analog VoIP System Model Numbers MediaPack FXO xx may represent 02 04 08 the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards S 11 February 2005 Airport City Lod Israel Signature Date Day Month Year Location I Zusmanovich Compliance Engineering Manager MediaPack H 3
234. file you want to load MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 150 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Note 1 Saving an auxiliary file to flash memory may disrupt traffic on the device To avoid this disable all traffic on the device before saving to flash memory Note 2 A device reset is required to activate a loaded CPT file and may be required for the activation of certain ini file parameters 7 To save the loaded auxiliary files so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 8 To reset the MediaPack refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Figure 5 57 Auxiliary Files Screen Auxiliary Files Send FXS Coefficient file from your computer to the device Browse SendFile Send Voice Prompts file from your computer to the device Browse Send File Send Call Progress Tones file from your computer to the device Browse Send File Send Prerecorded Tones file from your computer to the device Browse Send File 5 8 2 1 Loading the Auxiliary Files via the ini File gt To load the auxiliary files via the ini file take these 3 steps 1 Inthe inifile define the auxiliary files to be loaded to the MediaPack You can also define in the ini file whether the loaded files should be stored in the non volatile memory so that the TFTP process is not required every time the MediaPack boots up 2
235. for a gateway that you want to reset Refer to Figure B 2 below e 4 a W e Figure B 2 Reset Screen IF to Reset m ou e Version 4 6 239 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 When a gateway resets it first sends a BootRequest Therefore Reset can be used to force a BootP session with a gateway without needing to power cycle the gateway As with any BootP session the computer running the BootP Tool must be located on the same subnet as the controlled VoIP gateway B 9 Log Window The log window refer to Figure B 1 on the previous page records all BootP request and BootP reply transactions as well as TFTP transactions For each transaction the log window displays the following information e Client shows the Client address of the VoIP gateway which is the MAC address of the client for BootP transactions or the IP address of the client for TFTP transactions e Date shows the date of the transaction based on the internal calendar of the computer e Time shows the time of day of the transaction based on the internal clock of the computer e Status indicates the status of the transaction gt Client Not Found A BootRequest was received but there is no matching client entry in the BootP Tool gt Client Found A BootRequest was received and there is a matching client entry in the BootP Tool A BootReply is sent gt Clients MAC Changed There is a client entered for this IP address but with a differ
236. g table for a match with the outgoing call Only if a match is not found a Gatekeeper is used Possible uses for Tel to IP Routing can be as follows e Can fallback to internal routing table if there is no communication with the Gatekeepers e Call Restriction when Gatekeeper isn t used reject all outgoing Tel gt IP calls that are associated with the destination IP address 0 0 0 0 e P Security When the IP Security feature is enabled SecureCallFromIP 1 the VoIP gateway accepts only those IP gt Tel calls with a source IP address identical to one of the IP addresses entered in the Tel to IP Routing Table e Filter Calls to IP When a Gatekeeper is used the gateway checks the Tel IP routing table before a telephone number is routed to the Gatekeeper If the number is not allowed number isn t listed or a Call Restriction routing rule was applied the call is released e Assign Profiles to destination address also when a Gatekeeper is used e Alternative Routing When Gatekeeper isn t used an alternative IP destination for telephone number prefixes is available To associate an alternative IP address to called telephone number prefix assign it with an additional entry with a different IP address or use an FQDN that resolves to two IP addresses Call is sent to the alternative destination when one of the following occurs gt No ping to the initial destination is available or when poor QoS delay or packet l
237. g dimensions gt Side to side distance 140 mm gt Front to back distance 101 4 mm Insert a wall anchor of the appropriate size into each hole Fasten a DIN 96 3 5X20 wood screw not supplied into each of the wall anchors Position the four oval notches located on the base of the MP 11x refer to item 2 in Figure 3 13 over the four screws and hang the MP 11x on them 3 2 4 3 Installing the MP 11x in a 19 inch Rack The MP 11x is installed in a standard 19 inch rack by placing it on a shelf preinstalled in the rack This shelf can be ordered separately from AudioCodes Figure 3 14 MP 11x Rack Mount Table 3 5 MP 11x Rack Mount Item Functionality 1 Standard rack holes used to attach the shelf to the rack 2 Eight shelf to device screws gt To install the MP 11x in a 19 inch rack take these 3 steps 1 Use the shelf to device screws found in the package to attach one or two MP 11x devices to the shelf Position the shelf in the rack and line up its side holes with the rack frame holes Use four standard rack screws to attach the shelf to the rack These screws are not provided Version 4 6 37 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 3 2 5 Cabling the MP 11x Cable your MP 11x according to each section of Table 3 6 For detailed information on the MP 11x rear panel connectors refer to Table 2 8 on page 26 Table 3 6 Cables and Cabling Procedure Cabling Procedure Connect the Ethernet connection on the MP 11
238. g the cache clean so that stale entries do not consume computer resources The Dynamic setting is the default setting and the setting most often used Static entries do not expire Number of Timed Replies This feature is useful for communicating to VoIP gateways that are located behind a firewall that would block their BootRequest messages from getting through to the computer that is running the BootP Tool You can set this value to any whole digit Once set the BootP Tool can send that number of BootReply messages to the destination immediately after you send a remote reset to a VoIP gateway at a valid IP address This enables the replies to get through to the VoIP gateway even if the BootRequest is blocked by the firewall To turn off this feature set the Number of Timed Replies 0 TFTP Preferences Enabled To enable the TFTP functionality of the BootP Tool check the box beside this heading If you want to use another TFTP application other than the one included with the BootP Tool unselect the box On Interface This pull down menu displays all network interfaces currently available on the computer Select the interface that you want to use for the TFTP Normally there is only one choice Directory This option is enabled only when the TFTP is enabled Use this parameter to specify the folder that contains the files for the TFTP utility to manage cmp ini Call Progress Tones etc Boot File Mask Boot File Mask specifies the fi
239. ger impact that Profile 5 5 5 1 Coder Group Settings Use the Coders Group Settings screen to define up to four different coder groups These coder groups are used in the Tel and IP Profile Settings screens to assign different coders to Profiles gt To configure the coder group settings take these 8 steps 1 Open the Coder Group Settings screen Protocol Management menu gt Profile Definitions submenu Coder Group Settings option the Coder Group Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 16 Coder Group Settings Screen Coder Group Settings Coder Group ID 1st Coder g711Alaw64k 20 2nd Coder 711 Ulaw64k 10 3rd Coder 4th Coder 5th Coder 2 Inthe Coder Group ID drop down list select the coder group you want to edit up to four coder groups can be configured 3 From the coder drop down list select the coder you want to use For the full list of available coders and their corresponding ptimes refer to Table 5 16 Note Each coder can appear only once 4 From the drop down list to the right of the coder list select the size of the Voice Packet ptime used with this coder in milliseconds Selecting the size of the packet determines how many coder payloads are combined into one RTP voice packet MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 86 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack ue i4 gi im Parameter CoderName ID Version 4 6 Not
240. gnals e ETSIVMWITypeOneStandard e BellcoreVMWITypeOneStandard 8 2 Configuring the DTMF Transport Types The MediaPack H 323 gateway supports several methods of conveying DTMF digits over the IP network Three methods are controlled by H 245 protocol and therefore use its capability exchange mechanism to ensure coordination with the remote side A fourth method uses Q 931 Info messages If neither of these methods is selected DTMF is transferred inside the audio stream The MediaPack gateway supports the following DTMF transfer methods the first three methods use H 245 capability exchange 1 RFC 2833 DTMF digits are relayed to the remote side as part of the RTP stream according to the RFC 2833 standard The H 245 capability exchange coordinates the source and Version 4 6 163 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 destination payload types The gateway s received packets RFC 2833 payload type is configured by the parameter RFC2833PayloadType default 96 the gateway s transmitted payload type is identical to the payload type received from the remote party H 245 Signal Out of Band DTMF using H 245 Userlnfo messages refer to the note below H 245 User Input Out of Band DTMF similar to H 245 Signal but without DTMF length reconstruction refer to the note below 4 Q 931 Info Message without H 245 negotiation Similar to H 245 User Input but over Q 931 This method is not included in the H 245 capabilities exch
241. gs Min Hook Flash Detection Period msec 300 Max Hook Flash Detection Period msec rao 2 Configure the Hook Flash Settings according to Table 5 43 Click the Submit button to save your changes To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 43 Channel Settings Hook Flash Settings Parameters Parameter Description Min Flash Hook Detection Period Minimum threshold in msec 50 msec for detection of hook flash msec Relevant only for MediaPack FXS gateways MinFlashHookTime 25 to 300 default 300 Max Flash Hook Detection Period 300 to 1500 default 400 hook flash time in msec The parameter is used for msec hook flash detection in MediaPack FXS and for hook flash generation in FlashHookPeriod MediaPack FXO gateways Note For FXO gateways a constant of 90 msec must be added to the required hook flash period For example to generate a 450 msec hook flash set FlashHookPeriod to 540 5 6 2 5 Channel Settings ini File Parameters Table 5 44 describes the Channel parameters that can only be configured via the ini file Table 5 44 Channel Settings ini File Parameters continues on pages 132 to 134 ini File Parameter Name RTPSIDCoeffNum ECHybridLoss FaxModemRelayVolume MGCPDTMFDetectionPo int Valid Range and Description Determines the number of spectral coefficients added to an SID packet being sent according
242. he appropriate row in the snmpTargetAddrTable to AC TRAP MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 220 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 15 SNMP Based Management 15 8 15 9 Version 4 6 SNMP Manager Backward Compatibility With support for the Multi Manager Trapping feature the older acSNMPManagerlP MIB object synchronized with the first index in the snmpManagers MIB table is also supported This is translated in two features e SET GET to either of the two MIB objects is identical i e as far as the SET GET are concerned OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 1 2 7 is identical to OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 1 2 21 1 1 3 e When setting ANY IP to the acSNMPManagerlP this is the older parameter not the table parameter two more parameters are SET to ENABLE snmpManagerlsUsed 0 and snmpManagerTrapSendingEnable 0 are both set to 1 AudioCodes Element Management System Using AudioCodes Element Management System EMS is recommended to Customers requiring large deployments multiple media gateways in globally distributed enterprise offices for example that need to be managed by central personnel The EMS is not included in the device s supplied package Contact AudioCodes for detailed information on AudioCodes EMS and on AudioCodes EVN Enterprise VoIP Network solution for large VoIP deployments 221 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 222 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105
243. he clock drift correction is performed less frequently only when the Jitter Buffer is completely empty or completely full When such condition occurs the correction is performed by dropping several voice packets simultaneously or by adding several BFI packets simultaneously so that the Jitter Buffer returns to its normal condition 8 8 Configuring the Gateway s Alternative Routing based on Connectivity and QoS The Alternative Routing feature enables reliable routing of Tel to IP calls when a Gatekeeper isn t used The MediaPack gateway periodically checks the availability of connectivity and suitable Quality of Service QoS before routing If the expected quality cannot be achieved an alternative IP route for the prefix phone number is selected Version 4 6 169 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 8 8 1 8 8 2 8 8 3 8 8 4 Alternative Routing Mechanism When a Tel gt IP call is routed through the MediaPack gateway the call s destination number is compared to the list of prefixes defined in the Tel to IP Routing table described in Section 5 5 4 2 on page 79 The Tel to IP Routing table is scanned for the destination number s prefix starting at the top of the table When an appropriate entry destination number matches one of the prefixes is found the prefix s corresponding destination IP address is checked If the destination IP address is disallowed an alternative route is searched for in the following table entries
244. ho Canceler Enbe v Coder Group Coder Group Default Coder Group 2 Inthe Profile ID drop down list select the Tel Profile you want to edit up to four Tel Profiles can be configured 3 Inthe Profile Name field enter a name that enables you to identify the Profile intuitively and easily 4 Inthe Profile Preference drop down list select the preference 1 10 of the current Profile The preference option is used to determine the priority of the Profile If both IP and Tel profiles apply to the same call the coders and other common parameters of the preferred Profile are applied to that call If the Preference of the Tel and IP Profiles is identical the Tel Profile parameters are applied Note If the coder lists of both IP and Tel Profiles apply to the same call an intersection of 1 In the current version the parameter Signaling DiffServ cannot be configured using Profiles MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 88 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Parameter TelProfile_ID Version 4 6 the coders is performed i e only common coders remain The order of the coders is determined by the preference Configure the Profile s parameters according to your requirements For detailed information on each parameter refer to the description of the screen in which it is configured as an individual parameter In the Coder Group d
245. ialing Use the Automatic Dialing Table to define telephone numbers that are automatically dialed when a specific port is used gt To configure the Automatic Dialing table take these 6 steps 1 Open the Automatic Dialing screen Protocol Management menu gt Endpoint Settings submenu gt Automatic Dialing option the Automatic Dialing screen is displayed Figure 5 22 Automatic Dialing Screen Automatic Dialing Auto Dial Status Enable z Enable z Disable z HotLine rj Disable s Disable z Disable Disable I In the Destination Phone Number field for a port enter the telephone number to dial In the Auto Dial Status field select one of the following gt Enable 1 When a port is selected when making a call the number in the Destination Phone Number field is automatically dialed if phone is offhooked for FXS gateways or ring signal is applied to port FXO gateways gt Disable 0 The automatic dialing option on the specific port is disabled the number in the Destination Phone Number field is ignored gt Hotline 2 When a phone is offhooked and no digit is pressed for HotLineDialToneDuration the number in the Destination Phone Number field is automatically dialed applies to FXS and FXO gateways Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each port you want to use for Automatic Dialing Click the Submit button to save your changes 6 Tosave
246. ice by setting multiple trap destinations in the ini file SNMPManagerTrapSendingEnable x 0 or 1 indicates if traps are to be sent to the specified SNMP trap manager A value of 1 means that it is enabled while a value of 0 means disabled x a number 0 1 2 which is the array element index Currently up to 5 SNMP trap managers MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 218 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 15 SNMP Based Management can be supported Figure 15 1 presents an example of entries in a device ini file regarding SNMP The device can be configured to send to multiple trap destinations The lines in the file below are commented out with the at the beginning of the line All of the lines below are commented out since the first line character is a semi colon Figure 15 1 Example of Entries in a Device ini file Regarding SNMP SNMP trap destinations The board maintains a table of trap destinations containing 5 rows The rows are numbered 0 4 Each block of 4 items below apply to a row in the table To configure one of the rows uncomment all 4 lines in that block Supply an IP address and if necessary change the port number To delete a trap destination set ISUSED to O0 change these entries as needed SNMPManagerTableIP 0 SNMPManagerTrapPort 0 162 SNMPManagerIsUsed 0 1 SNMPManagerTrapSendingEnable 0 1 SNMPManagerTableIP 1 SNMPManagerTrapPort 1 162
247. ice uses a single read only community string of public and a single read write community string of private Users can configure up to 5 read only community strings and up to 5 read write community strings and a single trap community string is supported Configuration of Community Strings via the ini File SNMPREADONLYCOMMUNITYSTRING x HHHBHHHP SNMPREADWRITECOMMUNITYSTRING x HHHH where x is a number between 0 and 4 inclusive Note that the character represents any alphanumeric character The maximum length of the string is 20 characters Configuration of Community Strings via SNMP To configure read only and read write community strings the EM must use the srCommunityMIB To configure the trap community string the EM must also use the snmpVacmMIB and the snmpTargetMIB Version 4 6 215 July 2005 I AudioCodes 4 MediaPack H 323 To add a read only community string v2user Add a new row to the srCommunityTable with CommunityName v2user and GroupName ReadGroup To delete the read only community string v2user take these 2 steps If v2user is being used as the trap community string follow the procedure for changing the trap community string see below Delete the srCommunityTable row with CommunityName v2user To add a read write community string v2admin Add a new row to the srCommunityTable with CommunityName of v2admin and GroupName ReadWriteGroup To delete the read
248. ich is followed by a gt greater than character This is optionally followed by a single ASCII space The number described above is known as the Priority and represents both the Facility and Severity as described below The Priority number consists of one two or three decimal integers Version 4 6 203 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 For example 23 gt Oct IX 16 0015 mymachine su si cock failed for lonvick on Jdev pts 9 Note that when NTP is enabled a timestamp string hour minutes seconds is added to all Syslog messages for information on NTP refer to Section 9 5 on page 180 13 2 1 Syslog Servers Users can use the provided Syslog server ACSyslog08 exe or other third party Syslog servers Examples of Syslog servers available as shareware on the Internet e Kiwi Enterprises www kiwisyslog com e The US CMS Server uscms fnal gov hanlon uscms server e TriAction Software www triaction nl Products SyslogDaemon asp e Netal SLANT 2 1 Syslog Daemon www netal com A typical Syslog server application enables filtering of the messages according to priority IP sender address time date etc 13 2 2 Operation The Syslog client embedded in the MediaPack sends error reports events generated by the MediaPack unit application to a Syslog server using IP UDP protocol To activate the Syslog client on the MediaPack take these 4 steps 1 Setthe parameter EnableSyslog to 1 refer to Table 5
249. ield Destination IP Address and 255 255 255 255 in the field Destination Mask Gateway IP Address Specifies the IP address of the router to which the packets are sent if their RoutingTableGatewaysColumn destination matches the rules in the adjacent columns A read only field that indicates the time period for which the specific routing TTL i QM i T a rule is valid The lifetime of a static route is infinite Hop Count The maximum number of allowed routers between the gateway and RoutingTableHopsCountColumn destination Network Type RoutingTablelnterfacesColumn NA Leave at its default OAM TOD Version 4 6 117 July 2005 my bi AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 34 IP Routing Table Column Description Column Name Description ini File Parameter Name ini File Example The IP routing ini file parameters are array parameters Each parameter configures a specific column in the IP routing table The first entry in each parameter refers to the first row in the IP routing table the second entry to the second row and so forth In the following example two rows are configured when the gateway is in network 10 31 x x RoutingTableDestinationsColumn 130 33 4 6 83 4 87 6 RoutingTableDestinationMasksColumn 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 RoutingT ableGatewaysColumn 10 31 0 1 10 31 0 112 RoutingTablelnterfacesColumn 0 1 RoutingTableHopsCountColumn 20 20 5 6 1 7 Viewing the Ethernet Port Information
250. ient Found 10 8 77 7 MP108 GA1 MP108 ip 10 8 77 boot 1 92 cmp 042002990361 FXS chnls 8 15 12 2003 10 21 43 100 OK D TFTPLoad ramT P1610_SIP cmp 15 12 2003 10 21 43 D TFTPLoad ramTP1610_SIP cmp Log Window B 8 Function Buttons on the Main Screen Pause Click this button to pause the BootP Tool so that no replies are sent to BootP I requests Click the button again to restart the BootP Tool so that it responds to all BootP requests The Pause button provides a depressed graphic when the feature is active Edit Clients Click this button to open a new window that enables you to enter configuration information for each supported VoIP gateway Details on the Clients window are provided in Section B 11 on page 243 Edit Templates Click this button to open a new window that enables you to create or edit standard templates These templates can be used when configuring new clients that share most of the same settings Details on the Templates window are provided in Section B 12 on page 247 Clear Log Click this button to clear all entries from the Log Window portion of the main application screen Details on the log window are provided in Section B 9 on page 240 Filter Clients Click this button to prevent the BootP Tool from logging BootP requests received from disabled clients or from clients which do not have entries in the Clients table Reset Click this button to open a new window where you enter an IP address requests
251. igure 3 17 For information on establishing a serial communications link with the MP 11x refer to Section 10 2 on page 183 Figure 3 17 PS 2 Pinout PS 2 Female Connector and Pinout 2 TD Transmit Data 3 GND Ground for Voltage 6 RD Receive Data MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 38 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 3 Installing the MediaPack 3 2 5 2 Cabling the MP 11x Lifeline The Lifeline connected to port 1 provides a wired analog POTS phone connection to any PSTN or PBX FXS port when there is no power or the when network connection fails Users can therefore use the Lifeline phone even when the MP 11x is not powered on or not connected to the network The Lifeline s Splitter connects pins 1 and 4 to another source of an FXS port and pins 2 and 3 to the POTS phone Refer to the Lifeline Splitter pinout in Figure 3 18 Figure 3 18 Lifeline Splitter Pinout amp RJ 11 Connector 1 Lifeline Tip 2 Tip 3 Ring 4 Lifeline Ring gt To cable the MP 11x Lifeline take these 3 steps 1 Connect the Lifeline Splitter to port 1 on the MP 11x 2 Connect the Lifeline phone to Port A on the Lifeline Splitter 3 Connect an analog PSTN line to Port B on the Lifeline Splitter Note The use of the Lifeline on network failure can be disabled using the LifeLineType ini file parameter described in Table 5 37 on page 120 Version 4 6 39 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User
252. igure D 4 Prerecorded Tones Screen Prerecorded Tones File s i x Prerecorded Tones File s Add files by dropping or using the Add File s button m Add File s ToeTge Name Coder gt 0 fiefs Remove Remove al Output r Progress poen 4 To add the prerecorded tone files you created in Step 1 to the Prerecorded Tones screen follow one of these procedures gt Select the files and drag them to the Prerecorded Tones screen gt Click the Add File s button the Select Files screen opens Select the required MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 254 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual D Accessory Programs and Tools Version 4 6 Prerecorded Tone files and press the Add gt gt button Close the Select Files screen For each raw data file define a Tone Type a Coder and a Default Duration by completing the following steps gt Double click or right click the required file the File Data window shown in Figure D 5 appears From the Type drop down list select the tone type this raw data file is associated with From the Coder drop down list select the coder that corresponds to the coder this raw data file was originally recorded with gt Inthe Description field enter additional identifying information optional gt Inthe Default field enter the default duration this raw data file is repeatedly played
253. ile used to create dat file Telephony interface configuration file for MediaPack FXS gateways Telephony interface configuration file for MP 10x FXO gateways TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility Syslog server BootP TFTP configuration utility Call Progress Tones Wizard MIB library for SNMP browser 235 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 236 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual B The BootP TFTP Configuration Utility Appendix B The BootP TFTP Configuration Utility The BootP TFTP utility enables you to easily configure and provision our boards and media gateways Similar to third party BootP TFTP utilities which are also supported but with added functionality our BootP TFTP utility can be installed on Windows 98 or Windows NT 2000 XP The BootP TFTP utility enables remote reset of the device to trigger the initialization procedure BootP and TFTP It contains BootP and TFTP utilities with specific adaptations to our requirements B 1 When to Use the BootP TFTP The BootP TFTP utility can be used with the device as an alternative means of initializing the gateways Initialization provides a gateway with an IP address subnet mask and the default gateway IP address The tool also loads default software ini and other configuration files BootP Tool can also be used to restore a gateway to its initial configuration such as in the following instances e The
254. ile note 1 This parameter CoderName ID can appear up to 20 times five coders in four coder groups ini file note 2 The coder name is case sensitive ini file note 3 Enter in the format Coder ptime For example the following three coders belong to coder group with ID 1 CoderName 1 g711Alaw64k 20 CoderName 1 g711Ulaw64k 40 CoderName 1 g7231 90 87 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 5 2 Tel Profile Settings Use the Tel Profile Settings screen to define up to four different Tel Profiles These Profiles are used in the Endpoint Phone Number table to associate different Profiles to gateway s endpoints thereby applying different behavior to different MediaPack ports Toconfigure the Tel Profile settings take these 9 steps 1 Open the Tel Profile Settings screen Protocol Management menu gt Profile Definitions submenu gt Tel Profile Settings option the Tel Profile Settings screen is displayed 4 Figure 5 17 Tel Profile Settings Screen Tel Profile Settings Profile ID Profile Name Profile Parameters Profile Preference Is Fax Used Jitter Buffer Minimum Delay msec Jitter Buffer Frame Error Delay Opt Factor RTP IP Diff Serv Signaling DiffServ Voice Volume 32 to 31 dB DTMF Volume 31 to 0 dB Input Gain 32 to 31 dB Enable Polarity Reversal Disable x Enable Current Disconnect Disable s Enable Digit Delivery Disable s Ec
255. ile s button an encoded ini file with the name and extension you specified is created To decode an encoded ini file take these 4 steps Click the Select File button under the Decode ini File s section Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to decode Click the file and click the Open button the name and path of both the encode ini file and the output decoded file appear in the fields under the Select File button Note that the name of the output file can be modified Click the Decode File s button a decoded ini file with the name you specified is created Note that the decoding process verifies the input file for validity Any change made to the encoded file causes an error and the decoding process is aborted Version 4 6 253 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 D 1 3 Creating a Loadable Prerecorded Tones File For detailed information on the PRT file refer to Section 16 2 on page 227 To create a loadable PRT dat file from your raw data files take these 7 steps 1 Prepare the prerecorded tones raw data PCM or L8 files you want to combine into a single dat file using standard recording utilities 2 Execute the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion utility DConvert240 exe supplied with the software package the utility s main screen opens shown in Figure D 1 3 Click the Process Prerecorded Tones File s button the Prerecorded Tones File s screen shown in Figure D 4 opens F
256. ile_1 name1 2 1 0 10 13 15 44 1 1 6000 IPProfile 2 name2 1 Not configured the default value of the parameter is used Common parameter used in both IP and Tel profiles Note This parameter can appear up to 4 times ID 1 to 4 91 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 6 Configuring the Registration Prefixes The Gatekeeper Registration Prefixes Table enables the MediaPack to register with a Gatekeeper by associating dialing plan information with specific digit prefixes The Gatekeeper Registration Prefixes Table data is sent when the gateway requests permission to register with the Gatekeeper This registration request is triggered by a gateway reset or by the user from the Web Interface The prefix registration encoding type is configured by the parameter Gateway Registration Type described in Table 5 2 If Gateway Registration Type parameter contains NPI TON GwRegistrType 3 or 4 the gateway uses the prefixes defined in the Registration Prefixes table to register as PartyNumber In this registration mode the Type of Number columns are used to define the prefix s TON In other modes GwRegistrType 0 1 or 2 the TON column is ignored For detailed information on the available methods the MediaPack gateway registers with a Gatekeeper refer to Section 8 5 on page 167 gt To configure the Registration Prefixes take these 4 steps 1 Open the
257. in the MIB are functional Refer to version release notes Certain parameters are non functional Their MIB status is marked obsolete When a parameter is set to a new value via SNMP the change may affect device functionality immediately or may require that the device be soft reset for the change to take effect This depends on the parameter type Note2 The current updated device configuration parameters are programmed into the device provided that the user does not load an ini file to the device after reset Loading an ini file after reset overrides the updated parameters Additional MIBs are to be supported in future releases 15 6 Traps Note As of this version all traps are sent from the SNMP port default 161 This is part of the NAT traversal solution Full proprietary trap definitions and trap Varbinds are found in the acBoard MIB and acAlarm MIB The following proprietary traps are supported For detailed information on these traps refer to Appendix E on page 261 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 214 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 15 SNMP Based Management 15 7 15 7 1 15 7 1 1 15 7 1 2 e acBoardFatalError Sent whenever a fatal device error occurs e acBoardEvResettingBoard Sent after the device is reset e acBoardEvBoardStarted Sent after the device is successfully restored and initialized following reset e acBoardConfigurationError Sent when a device s sett
258. ination Number DefaultNumber Inter Digit Timeout TimeBetweenDigits Dial Tone Duration TimeForDialTone HotLineDialToneDuration Hotline Dial Tone Duration Digit Mapping Rules DigitMapping Description One or more preferred Transmit DTMF negotiation methods You can select Not Supported 0 DTMF is sent according to the DTMFTransportType parameter default H 245 User Input 1 H 245 Signal Method 2 Q 931 Info Message 3 RFC 2833 4 Note 1 DTMF negotiation methods are prioritized according to the order of their appearance Note 2 If fast connect is used you need to open H 245 channel to enable sending DTMF digits using this channel ini file note The DTMF transmit methods are defined using a repetition of the same TxDTMF Option parameter up to four options can be provided For information on DTMF transport types refer to Section 8 2 on page 163 The RFC 2833 DTMF relay dynamic payload type Range 96 to 99 106 to 127 Default 96 The 100 102 to 105 range is allocated for AudioCodes proprietary usage Note Cisco is using payload type 101 for RFC 2833 Maximum number of digits that can be dialed The valid range is 1 to 49 The default value is 5 Note Dialing ends when the maximum number of digits is dialed the Interdigit Timeout expires the key is dialed or a digit map pattern is matched Defines the telephone number that the gateway uses if the parameters TrunkG
259. ine EnableCallerID 1 it is used instead of the Caller ID name defined in this table FXO gateways only gt To configure the Caller ID table take these 6 steps 1 Open the Caller Display Information screen Protocol Management menu gt Endpoint Settings submenu gt Caller ID option the Caller Display Information screen is displayed Figure 5 23 Caller Display Information Screen Caller Display Information Gateway Port Caller ID Name Presentation Allowed r Allowed zl Allowed r 2 Inthe Caller ID Name field enter the Caller ID string The Caller ID string can contain up to 18 characters Note that when the FXS gateway receives Private string it doesn t send the calling name or number to the Caller ID display 3 Inthe Presentation field select Allowed 0 to send the string in the Caller ID Name field when a Tel IP call is made using this VoIP gateway port Select Restricted 1 if you MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 98 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack don t want to send this string Note The value of the Presentation field can optionally be overridden by configuring the Presentation parameter in the Source Number Manipulation table To maintain backward compatibility when the string Private is set in the Caller ID Name field the Caller ID i
260. ine is connected to only this port Indicates this channel is offhook but there is EJ Handset Offhook no active RTP session gt To monitor the details of a specific channel take these 2 steps 1 In the Channel Status screen click the numbered icon of the specific channel whose detailed status you need to check monitor the channel specific Channel Status screen appears shown in Figure 5 47 2 Click the submenu links to check view a specific channel s parameter settings MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 142 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Figure 5 47 Channel Status Details Screen H 323 Channel Status Static Information Endpoint Status ACTIVE Assigned Phone Number 9000 Hunt Group default 0 MWVVI Information Call ID 408290ba 0100001f 2d452d62 f3b029af Call Originator TEIE Source Tel Number 9000 Destination Tel Number 600 Redirect Calling Number Remote Signaling IP 10 8 25 45 Remote RTP IP Port 0 0 0 0 0 Call Establishment Duration 1 Call Duration 19 Call State SESSION Fax State n a Coder PTime N A 20 Call Type Voice Call Establishment Method Normal DTMF Selected Method for Tx Rx DTMF NOT SUPPORTED Version 4 6 143 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 7 3 Activating the Internal Syslog Viewer The Message Log screen displays Syslog debug messages sent by the gateway Note that it is no
261. ing Do not keep the Message Log screen minimized for a prolonged period as a prolonged session may cause the MediaPack to overload As long as the screen is open even if minimized a session is in progress and messages are sent Closing the screen and accessing another stops the messages and terminates the session MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 144 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 7 4 Device Information 5 Configuring the MediaPack The Device Information screen displays specific hardware and software product information This information can help you to expedite any troubleshooting process Capture the screen and email it to our Technical Support personnel to ensure quick diagnosis and effective corrective action From this screen you can also view and remove any loaded files used by the MediaPack stored in the RAM gt To access the Device Information screen e Open the Device Information screen Status amp Diagnostics menu gt Device Information the Device Information screen is displayed Figure 5 49 Device Information Screen Device Information General MAC Address Serial Number 0090804 eds 322871 Board Type 2 Device Up Time Device Administrative State 2 0d 23h 58m 58s 51th Unlocked Device Operational State Versions Disabled Version ID 4 50A 010 007 DSP Type DSP Software Version 0 20726 DSP Softwa
262. ings are illegal the trap contains a message stating detailing explaining the illegality of the setting e acBoardCallResourcesAlarm Indicates that no free channels are available e acBoardControllerFailureAlarm The Gatekeeper Proxy is not found or registration failed Internal routing table can be used for routing e acBoardEthernetLinkAlarm Ethernet link or links are down e acBoardOverloadAlarm Overload in one or some of the system s components e acActiveAlarmTableOverflow An active alarm could not be placed in the active alarm table because the table is full e acPerformanceMonitoringThresholdCrossing This log trap is sent every time the threshold of a Performance Monitored object is crossed The severity field is indeterminate when the crossing is above the threshold and cleared when it goes back under the threshold The source varbind in the trap indicates the object for which the threshold is being crossed In addition to the listed traps the device also supports the following standard traps e coldStart e authenticationFailure SNMP Interface Details This section describes details of the SNMP interface that is required when developing an Element Manager EM for any of the media gateways or to manage a device with a MIB browser Currently both SNMP and ini file commands and downloads are not encrypted For ini file encoding refer to Section 6 1 on page 155 SNMP Community Names By default the dev
263. ists and describes the switches that are available Table B 1 Command Line Switch Descriptions Description Burn ram cmp in flash only for cmp files Use this switch to set Ethernet mode 0 10 Base T half duplex 1 10 Base T full duplex 2 100 Base TX half duplex 3 100 Base TX full duplex 4 auto negotiate default For detailed information on Ethernet interface configuration refer to Section 9 1 on page 179 This parameter is used to Note This switch takes effect only from the next gateway reset Set the number of BootP requests the gateway sends during start up The gateway stops sending BootP requests when either BootP reply is received or number of retries is reached 1 1 BootP retry 1 second 2 2 BootP retries 3 seconds 3 3 BootP retries 6 seconds 4 10 BootP retries 30 seconds 5 20 BootP retries 60 seconds 6 40 BootP retries 120 seconds 7 100 BootP retries 300 seconds 7 10 DHCP packets 15 BootP retries indefinitely 15 2 18 DHCP packets BootP delays Sets the interval between the device s start up and the first BootP DHCP request that is issued by the device The switch only takes effect from the next reset of the device 1 1 second delay default 2 7 10 second delay 3 30 second delay 4 60 second delay 5 120 second delay Set the number of DHCP packets the gateway sends After all packets were sent if there s still no reply the gateway loads from flash
264. jects supported by the agent and access these objects as part of the standard object set MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 210 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 15 SNMP Based Management 15 2 Carrier Grade Alarm System The basic alarm system has been extended to a carrier grade alarm system A carrier grade alarm system provides a reliable alarm reporting mechanism that takes into account EMS outages network outages and transport mechanism such as SNMP over UDP A carrier grade alarm system is characterized by the following e The device has a mechanism that allows a manager to determine which alarms are currently active in the device That is the device maintains an active alarm table e The device has a mechanism to allow a manager to detect lost alarm raise and clear notifications sequence number in trap current sequence number MIB object e The device has a mechanism to allow a manager to recover lost alarm raise and clear notifications maintains a log history e The device sends a cold start trap to indicate that it is starting This allows the EMS to synchronize its view of the device s active alarms The SNMP alarm traps are sent as in previous releases This system provides the mechanism for viewing of history and current active alarm information 15 2 1 Active Alarm Table The device maintains an active alarm table to allow a manager to determine which alarms are currently active in the device Two
265. k administrator The NTP client follows a simple process in managing system time the NTP client requests an NTP update receives an NTP response and updates the local system clock based on a configured NTP server within the network The client requests a time update from a specified NTP server at a specified update interval In most situations this update interval should be every 24 hours based on when the system was MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 180 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 9 Networking Capabilities restarted The NTP server identity as an IP address and the update interval are configurable parameters that can be specified either in the ini file NTPServerlP NTPUpdatelnterval respectively or via an SNMP MIB object When the client receives a response to its request from the identified NTP server it must be interpreted based on time zone or location offset that the system is to a standard point of reference called the Universal Time Coordinate UTC The time offset that the NTP client should use is a configurable parameter that can be specified either in the ini file NTPServerUT COffset or via an SNMP MIB object If required the clock update is performed by the client as the final step of the update process The update is done in such a way as to be transparent to the end users For instance the response of the server may indicate that the clock is running too fast on the client The client slowly ro
266. le and the location of the server IP address or FQDN from which it is loaded http server_name ffile https server_name file Specifies the name of the FXO coefficients file and the location of the server IP address or FQDN from which it is loaded http server_nameffile https server_name file Specifies the name of the FXS coefficients file and the location of the server IP address or FQDN from which it is loaded http server namef file https server_name file Enables disables the Automatic Update mechanism for the cmp file 0 The Automatic Update mechanism doesn t apply to the cmp file default 1 The Automatic Update mechanism includes the cmp file Determines the number of minutes the gateway waits between automatic updates The default value is 0 the update at fixed intervals mechanism is disabled Schedules an automatic update to a predefined time of the day The range is HH MM 24 hour format For example 20 18 Note The actual update time is randomized by five minutes to reduce the load on the Web servers Invokes an immediate restart of the gateway This option can be used to activate offline not on the fly parameters that are loaded via IniFileUrl 0 The immediate restart mechanism is disabled default 1 The gateway immediately restarts after an ini file with this parameter set to 1 is loaded 124 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the Medi
267. le channel in ascending cycle order Always select the next higher channel number in the hunt group When the gateway reaches the highest channel number in the hunt group it selects the lowest channel number in the hunt group and then starts ascending again Select the lowest available channel Always start at the lowest channel number in the hunt group and if that channel is not available select the next higher channel Select the next available channel in descending cycle order Always select the next lower channel number in the hunt group When the gateway reaches the lowest channel number in the hunt group it selects the highest channel number in the hunt group and then start descending again Select the highest available channel Always start at the highest channel number in the hunt group and if that channel is not available select the next lower channel First select the gateway port according to the called number refer to the note below If the called number isn t found then select the next available channel in ascending cyclic order Note that if the called number is found but the port associated with this number is busy the call is released Parameter Format TrunkGroupSettings Hunt group ID Channel select Mode For example TrunkGroupSettings 1 5 lt Channel Select Mode gt can accept the following values e 0 By Phone Number e 1 Cyclic Ascending e 2 Ascending e 3 Cyclic Descending e 4 Descending
268. le extension used by the TFTP utility for the boot file that is included in the BootReply message This is the file that contains VoIP gateway software and normally appears as cmp ini File Mask ini File mask specifies the file extension used by the TFTP utility for the configuration file that is included in the BootReply message This is the file that contains VoIP gateway configuration parameters and normally appears as ini Timeout This specifies the number of seconds that the TFTP utility waits before retransmitting TFTP messages This can be left at the default value of 5 the more congested your network the higher the value you should define in these fields Maximum Retransmissions This specifies the number of times that the TFTP utility tries to resend messages after timing out This can be left at the default value of 10 the more congested your network the higher the value you should define in these fields MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 242 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual B The BootP TFTP Configuration Utility B 11 Configuring the BootP Clients The Clients window shown in Figure B 4 below is used to set up the parameters for each specific VoIP gateway Figure B 4 Client Configuration Screen Client Configuration i x 00 30 8F 54 64 1 2 Iv EF 00 90 9F 10 22 33 10 8 201 120 B9 00 90 9F 55 42 21 10 8 201 1 Client Name EF 00 90 8F 64 54 12 10 8 201 10 Template lt none gt IP E D e 2
269. le preferred to Gatekeeper The Tel to IP Routing table takes precedence over a Gatekeeper for routing calls PreferRouteTable 1 Routing Table The Tel to IP Routing table is used to route calls Not Used Gatekeeper isn t defined IP address of the Gatekeeper the gateway currently operates with Current Gatekeeper State N A Gatekeeper isn t defined Version 4 6 OK Communication with the Gatekeeper is in order Fail No response from any of the defined Gatekeepers 141 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 7 2 Monitoring the MediaPack Channels The Channel Status screen provides real time monitoring on the current channels status To monitor the status of the MediaPack channels take this step e Open the Channel Status screen Status amp Diagnostics menu gt Channel Status the Channel Status screen is displayed different screen for FXS and FXO Figure 5 46 MediaPack FXS Channel Status Screen Channel Status ue a XR Rs xu Color Code Ke Q Inactive x Handset Offhook x RTP Active The color of each channel shows the call status of that channel Refer to Table 5 48 below for information on the different statuses a call can have Table 5 48 Channel Status Color Indicators Indicator Label Description HE Inactive Indicates this channel is currently onhook E RTP Active Indicates an active RTP stream E Not Connected FXO Indicates that no analog l
270. lephony Capabilities 8 12 4 4 MP 108 FXO Configuration Using the Embedded Web Server gt Toconfigure the MP 108 FXO take these 4 steps 1 In the Endpoint Phone Numbers screen assign the phone numbers 200 to 207 for the gateway s endpoints Channel s Phone Number Hunt Group ID ee 2 Inthe Automatic Dialing screen enter the phone numbers of the MP 108 FXS gateway in the Destination Phone Number fields When a ringing signal is detected at port 1 the FXO gateway automatically dials the number 100 Auto Dial Status Enable rj Enable zl Enable s Enable z Enable s Enable e Enable s Enable rz 3 In the Tel to IP Routing screen enter 10 in the Destination Phone Prefix field and the IP address of the MP 108 FXS gateway 10 1 10 3 in the field IP Address Dest Phone Prefix Source Phone Prefix Dest IP Address 1 fio F 10 1103 4 Inthe Protocol Management screen set the parameter Dialing Mode to Two Stage IsTwoStageDial 1 Version 4 6 177 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 178 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 9 Networking Capabilities 9 9 1 9 2 Networking Capabilities Ethernet Interface Configuration Using the parameter EthernetPhyConfiguration users can control the Ethernet connection mode Either the
271. lity information isn t available e OK e Poor Note 1 This field is applicable only if the parameter AltRoutingTel2IPMode is set to 2 or 3 Note 2 This field is reset if no QoS information is received for 2 minutes Displays QoS information delay and packet loss calculated according to previous calls Note 1 This field is applicable only if the parameter AltRoutingTel2IPMode is set to 2 or 3 Note 2 This field is reset if no QoS information is received for 2 minutes Can be one of the following e DNS Disable e DNS Resolved e DNS Unresolved 5 7 1 2 Call Counters The Call Counters screens provide you with statistic information on incoming IP Tel and outgoing Tel gt IP calls The statistic information is updated according to the release reason that is received after a call is terminated during the same time as the end of call CDR message is sent The release reason can be viewed in the Termination Reason field in the CDR message For detailed information on each counter refer to Table 5 46 on page 140 You can reset this information by clicking the Reset Counters button gt To view the IPSO Tel and Tel2IP Call Counters information e Open the Call Counters screen you want to view Status amp Diagnostics menu gt Gateway Statistics submenu the relevant Call Counters screen is displayed Figure 5 44 shows the Tel IP Call Counters screen Version 4 6 139 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323
272. lling the MediaPack Remove the two screws on the other side of the device nearest the front panel Position the long bracket so that the holes in the bracket line up with the two empty screw holes on the device 7 Use the screws found in the device s package to attach the long bracket to the side of the device Position the device in the rack and line up the bracket holes with the rack frame holes Use four standard rack screws to attach the device to the rack These screws are not provided with the device Figure 3 2 MP 108 with Brackets for Rack Installation 3 1 3 3 Installing the MP 124 in a 19 inch Rack The MP 124 is installed into a standard 19 inch rack by the addition of two short equal length supplied brackets The MP 124 with brackets for rack installation is shown in Figure 3 3 Toinstall the MP 124 in a 19 inch rack take these 7 steps 1 Remove the two screws on one side of the device nearest the front panel 2 Insert the peg on one of the brackets into the third air vent down on the column of air vents nearest the front panel 3 Swivel the bracket until the holes in the bracket line up with the two empty screw holes on the device Use the screws found in the devices package to attach the bracket to the side of the device Repeat steps 1 to 4 to attach the second bracket to the other side of the device Position the device in the rack and line up the bracket holes with the rack frame holes NoD omm
273. lt time is 0 seconds MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 68 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 6 Supplementary Services Parameters continues on pages 68 to 69 Parameter Waiting Beep Duration WaitingBeepDuration Enable Caller ID EnableCallerID Caller ID Type CallerIDType Description Duration in msec of waiting indications that are played to the receiving side of the call FXS only for Call Waiting The default value is 300 Disable 0 Disable the Caller ID service default Enable 1 Enable the Caller ID service If the Caller ID service is enabled then for FXS gateways calling number and Display text are sent to gateway port For FXO gateways the Caller ID signal is detected and is sent to IP in H 323 Setup message as Calling number and Display text For information on the Caller ID table refer to Section 5 5 8 3 on page 98 To disable enable caller generation per port refer to Section 5 5 8 4 on page 100 Defines one of the following standards for detection FXO and generation FXS of Caller ID and detection FXO of MWI when specified signals Bellcore 0 Caller ID and MWI default ETSI 1 Caller ID and MWI NTT 2 British 4 DTMF ETSI 16 Denmark 17 Caller ID and MWI India 18 Brazil 19 Note 1 The Caller ID signals are generated detected between the first and the second rings Note 2 To select the
274. lt values 1 3 4 H 323 Features The MediaPack H 323 gateway is built on and implements the RadVision H 323 version 4 2 protocol stack The gateway complies with H 323 Version 4 0 ITU standard H 245 Version 10 and H 225 Version 4 1 3 4 1 Gatekeeper Version 4 6 Registers to known Gatekeeper Supports Gatekeeper registration with prefixes useful for FXO gateways Supports sending of Unregister request before reset Uses routed or direct mode calls Supports the Alternative Gatekeepers mechanism used to obtain the IP addresses of alternative Gatekeepers Uses redundant Gatekeepers if redundant Gatekeepers are defined 17 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 1 3 4 2 1 3 4 3 Works also without a Gatekeeper using the internal routing table with or without dialing plan rules Can fallback to internal routing table if there is no communication with the Gatekeepers Supports the TimeToLive parameter The MediaPack gateway sends Registration requests up to TimeToLive expiration Supports Info Request Response IRR messages for KeepAlive Supports the mapping of destination Alias numbers in ACF message by the Gatekeeper Supports Gatekeeper ID configuration per Gatekeeper IP for different Gatekeepers Supports Lightweight Registration Supports RAI Resource Available Indication messages informing Gatekeeper that the gateway s resources are below a threshold Supports registration types E
275. m e The new packet has any other source IP address and UDP port in which case the packet is dropped Multiple Routers Support Multiple routers support is designed to assist the media gateway when it operates in a multiple routers network The gateway learns the network topology by responding to ICMP redirections and caches them as routing rules with expiration time When a set of routers operating within the same subnet serve as gateways to that network and intercommunicate using a dynamic routing protocol such as OSPF the routers can determine the shortest path to a certain destination and signal the remote host the existence of the better route Using multiple router support the media gateway can utilize these router messages to change its next hop and establish the best path Note Multiple Routers support is an integral feature that doesn t require configuration Simple Network Time Protocol Support Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP client functionality generates requests and reacts to the resulting responses using the NTP version 3 protocol definitions according to RFC 1305 Through these requests and responses the NTP client is able to synchronize the system time to a time source within the network thereby eliminating any potential issues should the local system clock drift during operation By synchronizing time to a network time source traffic handling maintenance and debugging actions become simplified for the networ
276. m Bypass Packing Factor ii CNG Detector Mode Disable sz Configure the Fax Modem CID Settings according to Table 5 41 3 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 41 Channel Settings Fax Modem CID Parameters continues on pages 128 to 130 Parameter Description Fax Transport Mode Fax Transport Mode that the gateway uses FaxTransportMode You can select Disable 0 T 38 Relay 1 default Bypass 2 Events Only 3 Note If parameter IsFaxUsed 1 then FaxTransportMode is always set to 1 T 38 relay Caller ID Transport Type CallerIDTransportType bid MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 128 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 41 Channel Settings Fax Modem CID Parameters continues on pages 128 to 130 Parameter Caller ID Type CallerIDType V 21 Modem Transport Type V21ModemTransportType V 22 Modem Transport Type V22ModemTransportType V 23 Modem Transport Type V23ModemTransportType V 32 Modem Transport Type V32ModemTransportType V 34 Modem Transport Type V34ModemTransportType Fax Relay Redundancy Depth FaxRelayRedundancyDepth Fax Relay Enhanced Redundancy Depth FaxRelayEnhancedRedundancyD epth Fax Relay ECM Enable FaxRelayECMEnable Fax Relay Max Rate bps FaxRelayMaxRate
277. mit a prompt appears indicating that for the change to take effect the gateway is to be reset IP address of the default gateway used by the gateway Enter the IP address in dotted format notation for example 10 8 0 1 Note 1 A warning message is displayed after pressing the button Submit if the entered value is incorrect Note 2 After changing the default gateway IP address and pressing the button Submit a prompt appears indicating that for the change to take effect the gateway is to be reset For detailed information on multiple routers support refer to Section 9 4 on page 180 IP address of the primary DNS server Enter the IP address in dotted format notation for example 10 8 2 255 Note To use Fully Qualified Domain Names FQDN in the Tel to IP Routing table you must define this parameter IP address of the second DNS server Enter the IP address in dotted format notation for example 10 8 2 255 Disable 0 Disable DHCP support on the gateway default Enable 1 Enable DHCP support on the gateway After the gateway is powered up it attempts to communicate with a BootP server If a BootP server is not responding and if DHCP is enabled then the gateway attempts to get its IP address and other network parameters from the DHCP server Note After you enable the DHCP Server from the Web browser follow this procedure e Click the Submit button e Save the configuration using the Save Configur
278. mory may disrupt traffic on the MediaPack To avoid this disable all traffic on the device before saving to flash memory Note 2 A device reset is required to activate a loaded CPT file 7 To save the loaded auxiliary files so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 8 To reset the MediaPack refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 5 6 5 Changing the MediaPack Username and Password To prevent unauthorized access to the Embedded Web Server two levels of security are available Administrator and Monitoring Each employs a different username and password For detailed information on the dual access mechanism refer to Section 5 2 1 on page 45 It is recommended that you change the default username and password of the security mode you use to access the Embedded Web Server Tochange the username and password take these 4 steps 1 Open the Change Password screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Change Password the Change Password screen is displayed Figure 5 42 Change Password Screen Change Password New User Name New Password Confirm Password For applying changes to the Administrator access level click the Change Administrator Password button otherwise for applying changes to the Monitoring access level click the Change Monitoring Password button After changing the current access level password you will be prompted to re enter the updated passwo
279. n Protocol Management menu gt Hunt Group Settings the Hunt Group Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 26 Hunt Group Settings Screen Hunt Group ID Channel Select Mode By Phone Number Cyclic Ascending Cyclic Ascending 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ALLEE 2 Inthe Routing Index drop down list select the range of entries that you want to edit up to 24 entries can be configured In the Hunt Group ID field enter the hunt group ID number In the Channel Select Mode drop down list select the Channel Select Mode that determines the method in which new calls are assigned to channels within the hunt groups entered in the field to the right of this field For information on available Channel Select Modes refer to Table 5 26 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each defined hunt group Click the Submit button to save your changes 7 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 102 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Mode By phone number Cyclic Ascending Ascending Cyclic Descending Descending Number Cyclic Ascending Parameter Name in ini File TrunkGroupSettings 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 26 Channel Select Modes Description Select the gateway port according to the called number refer to the note below Select the next availab
280. n conversion was successful Close the application MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 252 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual D Accessory Programs and Tools D 1 2 Encoding Decoding an ini File For detailed information on secured ini file refer to Section 6 1 on page 155 gt 1 To encode an ini file take these 6 steps Execute the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility DConvert240 exe supplied with the software package the utility s main screen opens shown in Figure D 1 Click the Process Encoded Decoded ini file s button the Encode Decode ini File s screen shown in Figure D 3 opens Figure D 3 Encode Decode ini File s Screen Encode Decode ini File s E x eo P ro w 4 m Encode ini File s Close Select File Input File s C Media BatewayNgw fxo ini Output c media gateway qw fxo aen Use password Password Encode File s Decode ini File s Input File s CMedia Gatewaygu_fxo aen Output Je media gatewaygw_fxo_dl ini Decode File s Click the Select File button under the Encode ini File s section Navigate to the folder that contains the ini file you want to encode Click the ini file and click the Open button the name and path of both the ini file and the output encoded file appear in the fields under the Select File button Note that the name and extension of the output file can be modified Click the Encode F
281. n the process must be followed through and completed with a MediaPack reset at the end If you click the Cancel button in any of the subsequent screens the MediaPack is automatically reset with the configuration that was previously burned in flash memory 3 Click the Start Software Upgrade button the Load a cmp file screen appears Figure 5 51 Note When in the Wizard process the rest of the Web application is unavailable and the background Web screen is disabled After the process is completed access to the full Web application is restored Figure 5 51 Load a cmp File Screen Load a CMP file from your computer to the device Browse 4 Click the Browse button navigate to the cmp file and click the button Send File the cmp file is loaded to the MediaPack and you re notified as to a successful loading refer to Figure 5 52 Figure 5 52 cmp File Successfully Loaded into the MediaPack Notification File ram LAB 4 30 376 cmp was successfully loaded into the device 5 Note that the four action buttons Cancel Reset Back and Next are now activated following cmp file loading You can now choose to either gt Click Reset the MediaPack resets utilizing the new cmp you loaded and utilizing the Version 4 6 147 July 2005 my X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 current configuration files Click Cancel the MediaPack resets utilizing the cmp ini and all other configuration files that
282. n 3 80 00 Automatic Update Mechanism The MediaPack is capable of automatically updating its cmp ini and configuration files These files can be stored on any standard Web server s and can be loaded periodically to the gateway via TFTP only for cmp and ini files HTTP or HTTPS MP 11x only This mechanism can be used even for Customer Premise s Equipment CPE devices that are installed behind NAT and firewalls The Automatic Update mechanism is applied separately to each file For the detailed list of available files and their corresponding parameters refer to Table 5 38 on page 124 The Automatic Update mechanism assumes the external Web server conforms to the HTTP standard If the Web server ignores the If Modified Since header or doesn t provide the current date and time during the HTTP 200 OK response the gateway may reset itself repeatedly To overcome this problem adjust the update frequency AutoUpdateFrequency Three methods are used to activate the Automatic Update mechanism e After the MediaPack starts up refer to the Startup process described in Figure 10 3 e Ata configurable time of the day e g 18 00 This option is disabled by default e Atfixed intervals e g every 60 minutes This option is disabled by default The following ini file example can be used to activate the Automatic Update mechanism MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 184 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 10 Advan
283. n 4 6 Client MAC The Client MAC is used by BootP to identify the VoIP gateway The MAC address for the VoIP gateway is printed on a label located on the VoIP gateway hardware Enter the Ethernet MAC address for the VoIP gateway in this field Click the box to the right of this field to enable this particular client in the BootP tool if the client is disabled no replies are sent to BootP requests Note When the MAC address of an existing client is edited a new client is added with the same parameters as the previous client Client Name Enter a descriptive name for this client so that it is easier to remember which VoIP gateway the record refers to For example this name could refer to the location of the gateway Template Click the pull down arrow if you wish to use one of the templates that you configured This applies the parameters from that template to the remaining fields Parameter values that are applied by the template are indicated by a check mark in the box to the right of that parameter Uncheck this box if you want to enter a different value If templates are not used the box to the right of the parameters is colored gray and is not selectable IP Enter the IP address you want to apply to the VoIP gateway Use the normal dotted decimal format Subnet Enter the subnet mask you want to apply to the VoIP gateway Use the normal dotted decimal format Ensure that the subnet mask is correct If the address is incorrect the V
284. n RAS messages are ignored and the IP addresses of the two redundant Gatekeepers are provided by the user via the Embedded Web Server or the ini file and not by the primary Gatekeeper MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 166 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Telephony Capabilities 8 5 8 5 1 When Gatekeeper redundancy is enabled if there is no response from the primary Gatekeeper or if a registration request is rejected by the Gatekeeper RRJ the gateway tries to communicate with one of the two redundant Gatekeepers When a redundant Gatekeeper is found the gateway registers with it and continue working with it until the next failure occurs current Gatekeeper is not responding If none of the Gatekeepers respond the gateway goes over the list again and works with the first responsive Gatekeeper The MediaPack gateway can fallback to the internal Tel to IP Routing table when communication with Gatekeepers is lost If this option is enabled IsFallbackUsed 1 the MediaPack starts using its internal routing table and works without a Gatekeeper The MediaPack continues scanning for an active Gatekeeper When such Gatekeeper is found the gateway switches from internal routing back to Gatekeeper routing To enable redundant Gatekeepers set the following parameters in the ini file e sGatekeeperUsed 1 e sRedundantGKUsed 1 e GatekeeperlP IP address of the primary Gatekeeper e GatekeeperlP P addre
285. n Two Gateways After you ve installed and set up the MediaPack you can ensure that it functions as expected by establishing a call between it and another gateway This section exemplifies how to configure two 8 port MediaPack FXS H 323 gateways in order to establish a call After configuration you can make calls between telephones connected to a single MediaPack gateway or between the two MediaPack gateways In the following example the IP address of the first gateway is 10 2 37 10 and its endpoint numbers are 101 to 108 The IP address of the second gateway is 10 2 37 20 and its endpoint numbers are 201 to 208 In this example a Gatekeeper is not used Call routing is performed using the internal Tel to IP Routing table 1 To configure the two gateways take these 4 steps Configure the following settings on the first MediaPack gateway 10 2 37 10 gt In the endpoint Phone Numbers screen assign the phone numbers 101 to 108 for the gateway s endpoints Channel s Phone Number Hunt Group ID EN Mv OO Configure the following settings on the second MediaPack gateway 10 2 37 20 gt In the Endpoint Phone Numbers screen assign the phone numbers 201 to 208 for the gateway s endpoints Channel s Phone Number Hunt Group ID EU NU M HPeQ JW Configure the following settings for both gateways gt n the Tel to IP Routing screen in the first row enter 10 in the Destination Phone
286. n a call is made using these destination Source prefixes Select Restricted if you want to restrict Caller ID information for these prefixes When set to Not Configured the privacy is determined according to the Caller ID table refer to Section 5 5 8 3 on page 98 Version 4 6 73 July 2005 AudioCodes my bi MediaPack H 323 Table 5 9 Number Manipulation ini File Parameters continues on pages 74 to 75 Parameter Name in ini File NumberMapTel2IP NumberMapIP2Tel MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Parameter Format Manipulates the destination number for Tel to IP calls NumberMapTel2IP a b c d e f g a Destination number prefix b Number of stripped digits from the left or if brackets are used from the right A combination of both options is allowed C String to add as prefix or if brackets are used as suffix A combination of both options is allowed d Number of remaining digits from the right e H 225 Q 931 Number Plan f H 225 Q 931 Number Type g Source number prefix The b to f manipulations rules are applied if the called and calling numbers match the a and g conditions The manipulation rules are executed in the following order b d and c Parameters can be skipped by using the sign for example NumberMapTel2IP 01 2 972 0 0 NumberMapTel2IP 03 2 667 0 0 22 Manipulate the destination number for IP to Tel calls NumberMapIP2Tel a b c d e f g h i
287. n a voice channel or it can wait until the call is answered and Connect message is sent Note This option is only relevant if you use Fast Start or Tunneling MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 50 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 1 Protocol Definition General Parameters continues on pages 50 to 52 Parameter Send Media Information on Connect IsFSMedialnfoSendOnConn ect Enable Annex D T 38 Fax Relay IsFaxUsed Detect Fax on Answer Tone DetFaxOnAnswerTone Source Number Encoding Type SourceEncodeType Destination Number Encoding Type DestEncodeType Q 931 Multiplexing EnableQ931 Multiplexing Release Call on Setup Ack IsSetupAckUsed Does Setup Include Phone Number ISSETUPIncludeNum Version 4 6 Description No 0 Fast Start Structure response is sent in the Alert message default Yes 1 Fast Start Structure response is sent in the Connect message after the call is answered After receiving the Fast Start Setup message the gateway should reply with an H 225 message that includes media information structure The gateway can send the message with Alert or Connect messages Sending this information in Alert message enables the remote side to open the voice channel before receiving the Connect message Note This option is only relevant if Fast Start is used Disable 0 Disable Annex D T 38 fax relay default Enabl
288. n appear up to ten times MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 114 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 6 1 5 Configuring the RTP Settings gt Toconfigure the RTP Settings parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the RTP Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings gt RTP Settings option the RTP Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 32 RTP Settings Screen RTP Settings RTP Base UDP Port RTP IP Diff Serv RTP IP TOS RTP IP Precedence Remote RTP Base UDP Port RTP Multiplexing Local UDP Port RTP Multiplexing Remote UDP Port 2 Configure the RTP Settings according to Table 5 33 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 33 Network Settings RTP Settings Parameters Parameter Description RTP Base UDP Port Lower boundary of UDP port used for RTP RTCP Real Time Control Protocol RTP BaseUDPPort port 1 and T 38 RTP port 2 The upper boundary is the Base UDP Port 10 RTP IP Diff Serv IPDiffServ RTP IP TOS IPTOS Version 4 6 number of gateway s channels The range of possible UDP ports is 4000 to 64000 The default base UDP port is 4000 For example If the Base UDP Port is set to 4000 the default then The first channel uses the following ports RTP 4000 RTCP 4001 and T 38 4002 the s
289. n provides information on the installation procedure for the MP 1xx refer to Section 3 1 below and the MP 11x refer to Section 3 2 on page 35 For information on how to start using the gateway refer to Section 4 on page 41 Caution Electrical Shock The equipment must only be installed or serviced by qualified service personnel Installing the MP 1xx gt To install the MP 1xx take these 4 steps 1 Unpack the MP 1xx refer to Section 3 1 1 below 2 Check the package contents refer to Section 3 1 2 below 3 Mount the MP 1xx refer to Section 3 1 3 on page 28 4 Cable the MP 1xx refer to Section 3 1 4 on page 31 After connecting the MP 1xx to the power source the Ready and LAN LEDs on the front panel turn to green after a self testing period of about 1 minute Any malfunction changes the Ready LED to red When you have completed the above relevant sections you are then ready to start configuring the gateway Section 4 on page 41 Unpacking To unpack the MP 1xx take these 6 steps Open the carton and remove packing materials Remove the MP 1xx gateway from the carton Check that there is no equipment damage Check retain and process any documents Notify AudioCodes or your local supplier of any damage or discrepancies p od e 0 MM y Retain any diskettes or CDs Package Contents Ensure that in addition to the MP 1xx the package contains e AC power cable for the AC power supply option e 3 bra
290. nable users to specify the type of compare operation that takes place on the first incoming packet To compare only the IP address set EnablelpAddrTranslation 1 and EnableUdpPortTranslation 0 In this case if the first incoming packet arrives with only a difference in the UDP port the sending addresses won t change If both the IP address and UDP port need to be compared then both parameters need to be set to 1 Robust Reception of RTP Streams This mechanism filters out unwanted RTP streams that are sent to the same port number on the gateway These multiple RTP streams can result from traces of previous calls call control errors and deliberate attacks When more than one RTP stream reaches the gateway on the same port number the gateway accepts only one of the RTP streams and rejects the rest of the streams The RTP stream is selected according to the following procedure The first packet arriving on a newly opened channel sets the source IP address and UDP port from which further packets are received Thus the source IP address and UDP port identify the currently accepted stream If a new packet arrives whose source IP address or UDP port are different to the currently accepted RTP stream there are two options e The new packet has a source IP address and UDP port which are the same as the remote IP address and UDP port that were stated during the opening of the channel In this case the gateway reverts to this new RTP strea
291. nd ringing current supplied from the CO or the PBX just like an analog telephone An FXO VoIP gateway interfaces between the CO PBX line and the Internet FXS Foreign Exchange Station is the interface replacing the Exchange i e the CO or the PBX and connects to analog telephones dial up modems and fax machines The FXS is designed to supply line voltage and ringing current to these telephone devices An FXS VoIP gateway interfaces between the analog telephone devices and the Internet Warning Ensure that you connect FXS ports to analog telephone or to PBX trunk lines only and FXO ports to Central Office CO PBX lines only Warning The MediaPack is supplied as a sealed unit and must only be serviced by qualified service personnel Warning Disconnect the MediaPack from the mains and from the Telephone Network Voltage TNV before servicing MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 14 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 1 Overview 1 1 1 2 Overview Introduction This document provides you with the information on installation configuration and operation of the MP 124 24 port MP 108 8 port MP 104 4 port MP 102 2 port MP 118 8 port MP 114 4 port and MP 112 2 port VoIP media gateways As these units have similar functionality with the exception of their number of channels and some minor features they are collectively referred to in the manual as the MediaPack Gateway Description The Medi
292. nding socket on 124 devices only the MDF Adaptor Block s rear An Octopus cable is not included with the MP 124 package RS 232 serial cable Protective earthing strap 3 Connect the wire pairs at the other end of the cable to a male 50 pin Telco connector Insert and fasten this connector to the female 50 pin Telco connector on the MP 124 rear panel labeled Analog Lines 1 24 5 Connect the telephone lines from the Adaptor Block to a fax machine modem or telephones by inserting each RJ 11 connector on the 2 wire line cords of the POTS phones into the RJ 11 sockets on the front of an MDF Adaptor Block as shown in Figure 3 8 on page 32 For detailed information on connecting the MP 1xx RS 232 port to your PC refer to Section 3 1 4 1 on page 33 Connect an earthed strap to the chassis protective earthing screw and fasten it securely according to the safety standards AC Power cable Connect the MP 1xx power socket to the mains Version 4 6 MP 124 Safety Notice To protect against electrical shock and fire use a 26 AWG min wire to connect analog FXS lines to the 50 pin Telco connector Figure 3 5 RJ 45 Ethernet Connector Pinout RJ 45 Connector and Pinout 12345678 Toe EX eue sepes connected 6 Rx 31 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Figure 3 6 RJ 11 Phone Connector Pinout RJ 11 Connector and Pinout 1234 1 Not connected 2 Tip 3 Ring 4 Not connected Figure 3 7 50 pin Tel
293. nds the Ready LED turns to green and the Control LED blinks for about 3 seconds 3 While the Control LED is blinking press shortly on the reset button located on the left side of the front panel the gateway resets a second time and is restored with factory default parameters username Admin password Admin 4 Reconnect the network cable Assign the MP 1xx IP address refer to Section 4 2 on page 41 Load your previously backed up ini file or the default ini file received with the software kit To load the in file via the Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 6 3 on page 135 Torestore the networking parameters of the MP 11x to their initial state take these 4 steps 1 Press in the Reset button uninterruptedly for a duration of more than six seconds the gateway is restored to its factory settings username Admin password Admin Assign the MP 11x IP address refer to Section 4 2 on page 41 Load your previously backed up ini file or the default ini file received with the software kit To load the in file via the Embedded Web Server refer to the MP 11x User s Manual 4 Press again on the Reset button this time for a short period Establishing a Serial Communications Link with the MediaPack Use serial communication software e g HyperTerminal to establish a serial communications link with the MediaPack via the RS 232 connection You can use this link to access the CLI
294. nect 2 Power down or when link is down or on network failure logical link disconnect Note To enable Lifeline switching on network failure LAN watch dog must be activated EnableLANWatchDog 1 DSPVersionTemplateNumber 0 Firmware DSP version supports PCM ADPCM G 723 and G 729A B Coders 1 Firmware DSP version supports PCM ADPCM 2 Same as 0 but with voice and energy detectors default 3 Same as 1 but with voice and energy detectors Usually DSP templates 2 or 3 should be used These templates are required for the FXO gateway Answer and Disconnect supervision features EnableDiagnostics Tests the correct functionality of the different hardware components on the gateway On completion of the test the gateway sends information on the test results of each hardware component to the Syslog server 0 No diagnostics default 1 Performs diagnostics Full test of DSPs PCM Switch LAN PHY and Flash 2 Performs diagnostics Full test of DSPs PCM Switch LAN PHY but partial test of Flash a quicker mode For detailed information refer to Section 13 1 on page 203 EnableParametersMonitoring Enables to view changes made on the fly to parameters via Web or SNMP 0 Deactivate default 1 Activate WatchDogStatus 0 Disable gateway s watch dog 1 Enable gateway s watch dog default DisableRS232 0 RS 232 serial port is enabled default 1 RS 232 serial port is disabled The RS 232 seri
295. net setup mode configured This way if users want to configure the gateway to work in a new network environment in which the current Ethernet setting of the gateway is invalid they should first modify this parameter in the current network so that the new setting holds next time gateway is restarted After reconfiguration has completed connect the gateway to the new network and restart it As a result the remote configuration process that takes place in the new network uses a valid Ethernet configuration NAT Network Address Translation Support Figure 9 1 below illustrates the supported NAT architecture Figure 9 1 NAT Functioning MediaPack If the remote gateway resides behind a NAT device it s possible that the MediaPack can activate the RTP RTCP T 38 streams to an invalid IP address UDP port To avoid such cases the MediaPack automatically compares the source address of the incoming RTP RTCP T 38 stream with the IP address and UDP port of the remote gateway If the two are not identical the transmitter modifies the sending address to correspond with the address of the incoming stream Version 4 6 179 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 9 3 9 4 9 5 The RTP RTCP and T 38 can thus have independent destination IP addresses and UDP ports Users can choose to disable the NAT mechanism by setting the ini file parameter DisableNAT to 1 The two parameters EnablelpAddrTranslation and EnableUdpPortTranslation e
296. nforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Ar o AudioCodes Ltd deklare ka MP 11x FXS Series atbilst Direktivas 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC b tiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem AudioCodes Ltd deklaruoja kad irenginys MP 11x FXS Series tenkina 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas sios direktyvos nuostatas Hawnhekk AudioCodes Ltd jiddikjara li dan MP 11x FXS Series jikkonforma mal htigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Dette produktet er i samhgrighet med det Europeiske Direktiv 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC AudioCodes Ltd deklarujemy z pelna odpowiedzialnoscia ze wyr b MP 11x FXS Series spelnia podstawowe wymagania i odpowiada warunkom zawartym w dyrektywie 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC AudioCodes Ltd declara que este MP 11x FXS Series est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC AudioCodes Ltd t mto vyhlasuje Ze MP 11x FXS Series sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC iuo AudioCodes Ltd deklaruoja kad is MP 11x FXS Series atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Direktyvos nuostatas Por medio de la presente AudioCodes Ltd declara que el MP 11x FXS Series cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cuale
297. ng For Dial Tone is disabled the FXO gateway immediately dials the phone number after seizing the PSTN PBX line without listening to dial tone Time to Wait before Dialing Determines the delay before the gateway starts dialing on the FXO line in the WaitForDialTime following scenarios 1 The delay between the time the line is seized and dialing is begun during the Note Replaces the obsolete establishment of an IPTel call parameter FXOWaitForDialTime Note Applicable only to FXO for single stage dialing when waiting for dial tone IsWaitForDialTone is disabled 2 For call transfer The delay after hook flash is generated and dialing is begun The valid range in milliseconds is 0 to 20000 20 seconds The default value is 1000 1 second Ring Detection Timeout Note Applicable only to MP 10x F XO gateways for Tel gt IP calls FXOBetweenRingTime The Ring Detection timeout is used differently for normal and for automatic dialing If automatic dialing is not used and if Caller ID is enabled then the FXO gateway seizes the line after detection of the second ring signal allowing detection of caller ID sent between the first and the second rings If the second ring signal doesn t arrive for Ring Detection Timeout the gateway doesn t initiate a call to IP When automatic dialing is used the FXO gateway initiates a call to IP when ringing signal is detected The FXO line is seized only if the remote IP party answers the
298. ng is trapuser SNMP community string up to 19 chars Default community string for read public for set amp get private IP address in dotted format notation for the computer that is used as the first SNMP Manager The SNMP Manager is a device that is used for receiving SNMP Traps Note 1 To enable the device to send SNMP Traps set the ini file parameter SNMPManagerlsUsed to 1 Note 2 If you want to use more than one SNMP manger ignore this parameter and use the parameters SNMPManagerTablelP x instead 125 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 6 2 Configuring the Channel Settings From the Channel Settings page you can define e Voice Settings refer to Section 5 6 2 1 below e Fax Modem CID Settings refer to Section 5 6 2 2 on page 128 e RTP Settings refer to Section 5 6 2 3 on page 130 e Hook Flash Settings refer to Section 5 6 2 4 on page 132 These parameters are applied to all MediaPack channels Note that several Channels Settings parameters can be configured per call using profiles refer to Section 5 5 5 on page 86 Note 1 Those parameters contained within square brackets are the names used to configure the parameters via the ini file Note 2 Channel parameters are changeable on the fly Changes take effect from next call 5 6 2 1 Configuring the Voice Settings gt Toconfigure the Voice Settings parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the Voice Settings
299. ng the arrow sign gt to the right of the SNMP Managers Table label the SNMP Managers Table screen is displayed Figure 5 30 3 Configure the SNMP Managers parameters according to Table 5 31 below MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 112 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Click the Submit button to save your changes Click the Close Window button 6 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Figure 5 30 SNMP Managers Table Screen MP Managers Table IP Address Trap Port Trap Enable SNMP Manager ooo Enable x SNMP Manager booo Enable SNMP Manager nono Enable gt SNMP Manager nono Enable v SNMP Manager nono Enable gt If you clear a checkbox and click Submit all settings in the same row revert to their defaults Table 5 31 SNMP Managers Table Parameters Web Parameter Name ini File Parameter Name Checkbox Up to five parameters each determines the validity of the parameters IP SNMPManagerlsUsed x address and port number of the corresponding SNMP Manager used to receive SNMP traps Checkbox cleared 0 Disabled default Checkbox selected 1 Enabled IP Address Up to five IP addresses of remote hosts that are used as SNMP Managers SNMPManagerTablelP x The device sends SNMP traps to these IP addresses Enter the IP address in dotted f
300. ng to the selected coder N A Controlled internally by the gateway according to the selected coder N A Controlled internally by the gateway according to the selected coder N A Use the ini file parameter RFC2833PayloadType instead N A Use the ini file parameter RFC2833PayloadType instead RTP redundancy packet payload type according to RFC 2198 The range is 96 127 The default is 104 Applicable if RTP Redundancy Depth 1 Determines the fax bypass RTP dynamic payload type The valid range is 96 to 120 The default value is 102 Determines whether Silence Indicator SID packets that are sent and received are according to RFC 3389 Disable 0 G 711 SID packets are sent in a proprietary method default Enable 1 SID comfort noise packets are sent with the RTP SID payload type according to RFC 3389 Applicable to G 711 and G 726 coders Ignore analog signals 0 Hook flash isn t transferred to the remote side default RFC 2833 analog signal relay 1 Hook flash is transferred via RFC 2833 131 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 6 2 4 Configuring the Hook Flash Settings gt Toconfigure the Hook Flash Settings parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the Hook Flash Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Channel Settings gt Hook Flash Settings option the Hook Flash Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 39 Hook Flash Settings Screen Hook Flash Settin
301. nges and may not uniquely identify the device Note 3 The server certificate can also be loaded via ini file using the parameter HTTPSCertFileName 12 1 4 Client Certificates By default Web servers using SSL provide one way authentication The client is certain that the information provided by the Web server is authentic When an organizational PKI is used two way authentication may be desired both client and server should be authenticated using X 509 certificates This is achieved by installing a client certificate on the managing PC and loading the same certificate in base64 encoded X 509 format to the MP 11x Trusted Root Certificate Store The Trusted Root Certificate file should contain both the certificate of the authorized user and the certificate of the CA Since X 509 certificates have an expiration date and time the MP 11x must be configured to use NTP Section 9 5 on page 180 to obtain the current date and time Without a correct date and time client certificates cannot work Toinstall a client certificate take these 6 steps 1 Before continuing set HTTPSOnly 0 to ensure you have a method of accessing the device in case the client certificate doesn t work Restore the previous setting after testing the configuration Version 4 6 197 July 2005 r 12 2 12 2 1 AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 2 Access the following URL case sensitive https host name or IP address SSLCertificateSR the Cer
302. nitoring password Default username User Default password User The first time a browser request is made the user is requested to provide his Administrator or Version 4 6 45 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 3 Monitoring username and password to obtain access Subsequent requests are negotiated by the browser on behalf of the user so that the user doesn t have to re enter the username and password for each request but the request is still authenticated the Embedded Web Server uses the MD5 authentication method supported by the HTTP 1 1 protocol For details on changing the Administrator and Monitoring username and password refer to Section 5 6 5 on page 137 Note that the password and username can be a maximum of 19 case sensitive characters To reset the Administrator and Monitoring username and password to their defaults enable the ini file parameter ResetWebPassword Limiting the Embedded Web Server to Read Only Mode Users can limit access to the Embedded Web Server to read only mode by changing the ini file parameter DisableWebConfig to 1 In this mode all Web screens regardless to the access level used Administrator or Monitoring are read only and cannot be modified In addition the following screens cannot be accessed Quick Setup Change Password Reset Save Configuration Software Upgrade Wizard Load Auxiliary Files Configuration File
303. nt group and if that channel is not available select the next lower channel e Number Cyclic Ascending 5 First select the gateway port according to the called number called number is defined in the Endpoint Phone Number table If the called number isn t found then select the next available channel in ascending cyclic order Note that if the called number is found but the port associated with this number is busy the call is released The default method is By Phone Number Gateway H 323 ID used for registration to the Gatekeeper RRQ when GWRegistrType 1 or 2 for Gatekeeper admission ARQ and call initialization when SourceEncodeType 1 or 2 You can enter a string up to 25 characters long No 0 The gateway doesn t open an H 245 channel when making a Fast Start connection default After Connect Message 1 The gateway opens an H 245 channel immediately after the Fast Start connection is established Before Connect Message 2 Early Media The gateway opens an H 245 channel as soon as it can This option applies to Normal and Fast Start The opening of an H 245 channel may be needed for relaying DTMF digits over H 245 channel during a call No 0 Voice channel is opened after an Alert message is sent default IsFSOpenMediaOnConnect Yes 1 Voice channel is opened after the call is answered and a Connect message is sent After a Setup message is received the gateway can immediately ope
304. nt of time in 100 msec units an RTP packet isn t received after which a call is disconnected The valid range is 1 to 1000 The default value is 100 10 seconds Note 1 Applicable only if DisconnectOnBrokenConnection 1 Note 2 Currently this feature works only if Silence Suppression is disabled Yes 1 The FXO gateway disconnect calls in which silence occurs in both call directions for more than 120 seconds No 0 Call is not disconnected when silence is detected default The silence duration can be set by the FarEndDisconnectSilencePeriod parameter default 120 Note To activate this feature set DSP Template to 2 or 3 Duration of Silence period in seconds for call disconnection The range is 10 to 28800 8 hours The default is 120 seconds Note Applicable to gateways that use DSP templates 2 or 3 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 64 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 5 Advanced Parameters General Parameters continues on pages 63 to 66 Parameter Silence Detection Method FarEndDisconnectSilenceM ethod CDR and Debug CDR Server IP Address CDRSyslogServerIP CDR Report Level CDRReportLevel Debug Level GwDebugLevel Misc Parameters Progress Indicator to IP ProgressIndicator2IP Enable Busy Out EnableBusyOut Default Release Cause DefaultReleaseCause Delay After Reset sec GWAppDelayTime Max Number
305. o save configuration changes to the non volatile flash memory refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 e Reset Use this menu to remotely reset the gateway Note that you can choose to save the gateway configuration to flash memory before reset refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 When positioning your curser over a parameter name or a table for more than 1 second a short description of this parameter is displayed Note that those parameters that are preceded with an exclamation mark are not changeable on the fly and require reset Saving Changes To save changes to the volatile memory RAM press the Submit button changes to parameters with on the fly capabilities are immediately available other parameter are updated only after a gateway reset Parameters that are only saved to the volatile memory revert to their previous settings after hardware reset When performing a software reset i e via Web or SNMP you can choose to save the changes to the non volatile memory To save changes so they are available after a power fail you must save the changes to the non volatile memory flash When Save Configuration is performed all parameters are saved to the flash memory To save the changes to flash refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Entering Phone Numbers in Various Tables Phone numbers entered into various tables on the gateway such as the Tel to IP routing table must be entered without any formatting characters For example if you wi
306. oIP gateway may not function until the entry is corrected and a BootP reset is applied Gateway Enter the IP address for the data network gateway used on this subnet that you want to apply to the VoIP gateway The data network gateway is a device such as a router that is used in the data network to interface this subnet to the rest of the enterprise network TFTP Server IP This field contains the IP address of the TFTP utility that is used for file transfer of software and initialization files to the gateway When creating a new client this field is populated with the IP address used by the BootP Tool If a different TFTP utility is to be used change the IP address in this field to the IP address used by the other utility Boot File This field specifies the file name for the software cmp file that is loaded by the TFTP utility to the VoIP gateway after the VoIP gateway receives the BootReply message The actual software file is located in the TFTP utility directory that is specified in the BootP Preferences window The software file can be followed by command line switches For information on available command line switches refer to Section B 11 6 on page 246 Note 1 Once the software file loads into the gateway the gateway begins functioning from that software In order to save this software to non volatile memory only the cmp file i e the compressed firmware file can be burned to your device s flash memory the fb flag must be add
307. od se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Danish Undertegnede AudioCodes Ltd erklaerer herved at felgende udstyr MP 124 overholder de vaesentlige krav og evrige relevante krav i direktiv 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Dutch Hierbij verklaart AudioCodes Ltd dat het toestel MP 124 in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC English Hereby AudioCodes Ltd declares that this MP 124 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Estonian K esolevaga kinnitab AudioCodes Ltd seadme MP 124 vastavust direktiivi 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele Finnish AudioCodes Ltd vakuuttaa taten etta MP 124 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC oleellisten vaatimusten ja sita koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen French Par la pr sente AudioCodes Ltd d clare que l appareil MP 124 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC German Hiermit erkl rt AudioCodes Ltd dass sich dieser diese dieses MP 124 in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC befindet BMWi Greek ME THN MAPOYSZA AudioCod
308. odulation modulation e Bypass using a high bit rate coder to pass the signal e Transparent passing the signal in the current voice coder When the fax relay mode is enabled distinction between fax and modem is not immediately possible at the beginning of a session The channel is therefore in Answer Tone mode until a distinction is determined The packets being sent to the network at this stage are T 38 complaint fax relay packets 8 3 2 Configuring Fax Relay Mode When FaxTransportMode 1 relay mode then on detection of fax the channel automatically switches from the current voice coder to answer tone mode and then to T 38 compliant fax relay mode When fax transmission has ended the reverse switching from fax relay to voice is performed This mode switching automatically occurs at both the local and remote endpoints Users can limit the fax rate using the FaxRelayMaxRate parameter and can enable disable ECM fax mode using the FaxRelayECMEnable parameter When using T 38 mode the user can define a redundancy feature to improve fax transmission over congested IP network This feature is activated by FaxRelayRedundancyDepth and EnhancedFaxRelayRedundancyDepth parameters Although this is a proprietary redundancy scheme it should not create problems when working with other T 38 decoders Note T 38 mode currently supports only the T 38 UDP syntax 8 3 3 Configuring Fax Modem ByPass Mode When VxxTransportType
309. ollowing CDR fields are supported Table 8 1 Supported CDR Fields Field Name Description Cid Port Number Callld H 323 SIP Call Identifier Trunk N A BChan N A Conld H 323 SIP Conference ID TG Trunk Group Number EPTyp Endpoint Type Orig Call Originator IP Tel Sourcelp Source IP Address Destlp Destination IP Address TON Source Phone Number Type NPI Source Phone Number Plan SrcPhoneNum Source Phone Number TON Destination Phone Number Type NPI Destination Phone Number Plan DstPhoneNum Destination Phone Number DstNumBeforeMap Destination Number Before Manipulation Durat Call Duration Coder Selected Coder Intrv Packet Interval Rtplp RTP IP Address Port Remote RTP Port TrmSd Initiator of Call Release IP Tel Unknown TrmReason Termination Reason Fax Fax Transaction during the Call InPackets Number of Incoming Packets OutPackets Number of Outgoing Packets PackLoss Number of Incoming Lost Packets Uniqueld unique RTP ID SetupTime Call Setup Time ConnectTime ReleaseTime Call Connect Time Call Release Time RTPdelay RTP Delay RTPjitter RTP Jitter RTPssrc Local RTP SSRC RemoteRTPssrc Remote RTP SSRC RedirectReason Redirect Reason TON Redirection Phone Number Type NPI Redirection Phone Number Plan RedirectPhonNum MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Redirection Phone Number 172 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 8 Telephony Capabilities 8 12 Configuration Examples 8 12 1 Establishing a Call betwee
310. ons e n m represents a range of numbers e single dot represents repetition e x represents any single digit e T represents a dial timer configured by TimeBetweenDigits parameter e S should be used when a specific rule that is part of a general rule is to be applied immediately For example if you enter the general rule x T and the specific rule 11x you should append S to the specific rule 11xS For example 11xS OOT 1 7 xxx 8xxxxxxx XXXXXXX XX 9 1 XXXXXXXXXX 9011X T MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 60 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 4 DTMF amp Dialing Parameters continues on pages 59 to 61 Parameter Hook flash Option HookFlashOption Enable Special Digits IsSpecialDigits Version 4 6 Description Supported hook flash Transport Type method by which hook flash is sent and received You can select Not Supported 0 Hook flash indication isn t sent default H 245 User Input 1 Send H 245 User Input indication message in a basic string H 245 Signal Method 2 Send H 245 User Input indication message in a signal structure Q 931 Info 3 Sending hook flash as an exclamation mark in Q 931 Info message RFC 2833 4 RFC 2833 Note FXO gateways support receiving of RFC 2833 hook flash signals Disable 0 or terminate number collection default Enable 1 if you want to allow and
311. ontains the address of the TFTP server from which the firmware cmp and ini files are loaded e DNS server IP address primary and secondary Optional parameters that contain the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers These parameters are available only in DHCP and from Boot version 1 92 e Syslog server IP address An optional parameter that is sent to the MediaPack only if configured This parameter is available only in DHCP e Firmware file name An optional parameter that contains the name of the firmware file to be loaded to the gateway via TFTP e inifile name An optional parameter that contains the name of the ini file to be loaded to the gateway via TFTP DHCP Support When the gateway is configured to use DHCP DHCPEnable 1 it attempts to contact the enterprise s DHCP server to obtain the networking parameters IP address subnet mask default gateway and primary secondary DNS server These network parameters have a time limit After the time limit expires the gateway must renew its lease from the DHCP server Note that if the DHCP server denies the use of the gateway s current IP address and specifies a different IP address according to RFC 1541 the gateway must change its networking parameters If this happens while calls are in progress they aren t automatically rerouted to the new network address since this function is beyond the scope of a VoIP gateway Therefore administrators a
312. option the Security Settings screen is displayed MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 118 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Figure 5 35 Security Settings Screen Security Settings Require Secured Web Connection HTTPS Disable HTTP and HTTF RADIUS Settings Enable RADIUS Access Control Disable Use RADIUS for Web Telnet Login Disable 4A RADIUS Authentication Server IP Address ooo RADIUS Authentication Server Port gb RADIUS Shared Secret GE o 2 Configure the Security Settings according to Table 5 36 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 36 Network Settings Security Settings Parameters Parameter Description Secured Web Connection Determines the protocol types used to access the Embedded Web Server HTTPSOnly HTTP and HTTPS 0 default HTTPS only 1 unencrypted HTTP packets are blocked RADIUS Settings EnableRADIUS Enables disables the RADIUS application Enable RADIUS Access Control Disable 0 RADIUS application is disabled default Enable 1 RADIUS application is enabled Note In the current version RADIUS is used only for HTTP authentication CDR over RADIUS isn t supported WebRADIUSLogin Uses RADIUS queries for Web and Telnet interface authentication Use RADIUS for Web Telnet Disable 0
313. ored e A Carriage Return must be the final character of each line e The number of spaces before and after is not relevant e fthere is a syntax error in the parameter name the value is ignored e Syntax errors in the parameter value field can cause unexpected errors because parameters may be set to the wrong values e Sub section names are optional e String parameters representing file names for example CallProgressTonesFileName must be placed between two inverted commas e The parameter name is NOT case sensitive the parameter value is not case sensitive except for coder names e Theinifile should be ended with one or more carriage returns The ini File Example Figure 6 2 shows an example of an ini file for the VoIP gateway Figure 6 2 H 323 ini File Example Channel Params DJBufferMinDelay 75 RTPRedundancyDepth 1 IsGatekeeperUsed 1 GatekeeperIP 192 168 122 179 DefaultNumber 101 MaxDigits 3 CoderName g7231 90 IsFastConnectUsed 1 Phone of each endpoint Channel2Phone 0 101 Channel2Phone 1 102 EnableSyslog 0 Files CallProgressTonesFilename CPUSA dat FXSLoopCharacteristicsFileName coeff dat SaveConfiguration 1 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 156 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 7 Using BootP DHCP 7 7 1 7 2 Using BootP DHCP The MediaPack uses the Bootstrap Protocol BootP and the Dynamic Host
314. ored if the parameter H323IDString is configured For detailed information on gateway registration with a Gatekeeper refer to Section 8 5 on page 167 Note In the current release IP Tel routing according to H 323 port ID isn t supported gt To configure the H 323 port ID table take these 5 steps 1 Open the H 323 Port ID screen Protocol Management menu Endpoint Settings submenu gt H 323 Port ID option the H 323 Port ID screen is displayed Figure 5 21 H 323 Port ID Screen H 323 Port ID Gateway Port H 323 Port ID Port 1 ID Port 2 ID Port 3 ID 2 Inthe H 323 Port ID field enter the H 323 ID string that is assigned to the gateway s port in the field to the left of this field You can enter a string up to 20 characters long Repeat step 2 for each gateway port Click the Submit button to save your changes 5 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 21 H 323 Port ID ini File Parameter Parameter Name in ini File Parameter Format PortName_x PortName_ lt port gt lt H 323 Port ID string gt For example PortName_0 Port ID 1 Note 1 The numbering of channels starts with 0 Note 2 This parameter can appear up to eight times for MP 108 and up to 24 times for MP 124 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 96 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 8 2 Automatic D
315. ormat notation for example 108 10 1 255 Note The first entry out of the five replaces the obsolete parameter SNMPManagerlP Trap Port Up to five parameters used to define the Port numbers of the remote SNMP SNMPManagerTrapPort x Managers The device sends SNMP traps to these ports Note The first entry out of the five replaces the obsolete parameter SNMPTrapPort The default SNMP trap port is 162 The valid SNMP trap port range is 100 to 4000 Trap Enable Up to five parameters each determines the activation deactivation of sending SNMPManagerTrapSendingEnable_x traps to the corresponding SNMP Manager Disable 0 Sending is disabled Enable 1 Sending is enabled default Version 4 6 113 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 6 1 4 Configuring the Web and Telnet Access List Use this screen to define up to ten IP addresses that are permitted to access the gateway s Web and Telnet interfaces Access from an undefined IP address is denied This security feature is inactive the gateway can be accessed from any IP address when the table is empty To manage the Web amp Telnet access list take these 4 steps 1 Open the Web amp Telnet Access List screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings Web amp Telnet Access List option the Web amp Telnet Access List screen is displayed Figure 5 31 Web amp Telnet Access List Screen Web amp Telnet Access List Delete Row Authorized IP
316. ort ID table isn t configured the endpoints are represented as strings In this mode don t configure the H323IDString parameter if you do the gateway only registers with H323IDString and the H 323 Port IDs endpoints are ignored gt E 164 and H323 ID 2 The gateway registers the endpoints using E 164 and H 323 ID formats In this mode the H323IDString if defined is added to the Registration Request once if not defined each endpoint registers twice in E 164 format and H 323 ID format using the H 323 Port ID table or if this table isn t defined as a string gt NPI TON from Table 3 N A in this mode gt NPI TON and H323 ID 4 N A in this mode For detailed information on the H 323 Port ID table refer to Section 5 5 8 1 on page 96 ThroughPacket The gateway supports a proprietary method to aggregate RTP streams from several channels to reduce the bandwidth overhead caused by the attached Ethernet IP UDP and RTP headers and to reduce the packet data transmission rate This option reduces the load on network routers and can typically save 50 e g for G 723 on IP bandwidth ThroughPacket is accomplished by aggregating payloads from several channels that are sent to the same destination IP address into a single IP packet ThroughPacket can be applied to the entire gateway or using IP Profile to specific IP destinations refer to Section 5 5 5 3 on page 90 Note that ThroughPacket must be
317. oss calculated according to previous calls is detected or when a DNS host name is not resolved For detailed information on Alternative Routing refer to Section 8 6 on page 168 When a release reason that is defined in the Reasons for Alternative Tel to IP Routing table is received For detailed information on the Reasons for Alternative Routing Tables refer to Section 5 5 4 5 on page 85 Tip Tel to IP routing can be performed either before or after applying the number manipulation rules To control when number manipulation is done set the Tel to IP Routing Mode parameter described in Table 5 12 gt To configure the Tel to IP Routing table take these 6 steps 1 Open the Tel to IP Routing screen Protocol Management menu gt Routing Tables submenu gt Tel to IP Routing option the Tel to IP Routing screen is displayed shown in Figure 5 12 Version 4 6 79 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 In the Tel to IP Routing Mode field select the Tel to IP routing mode refer to Table 5 12 In the Routing Index drop down list select the range of entries that you want to edit 2 3 4 Configure the Tel to IP Routing table according to Table 5 12 5 Click the Submit button to save your changes 6 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Figure 5 12 Tel to IP Routing Table Screen Dest Phone Prefix Source Phone Prefix Dest IP Add
318. ote Applicable only to FXS gateways MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 108 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 6 Advanced Configuration Use this menu to set the gateway s advanced configuration parameters for advanced users only Note Those parameters contained within square brackets are the names used to configure the parameters via the ini file 5 6 1 Configuring the Network Settings From the Network Settings you can e Define the IP Settings refer to Section 5 6 1 1 below e Define the Application Settings refer to Section 5 6 1 2 on page 111 e Define the SNMP Managers Table refer to Section 5 6 1 3 on page 112 e Define the Web amp Telnet Access List refer to Section 5 6 1 4 on page 114 e Define the RTP Settings refer to Section 5 6 1 5 on page 115 e Define the IP Routing Table refer to Section 5 6 1 6 on page 116 e View the Ethernet Port Information refer to Section 5 6 1 7 on page 118 e Define the Security Settings refer to Section 5 6 1 8 on page 118 5 6 1 1 Configuring the IP Settings Toconfigure the IP Settings parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the IP Settings screen Advanced Configuration menu gt Network Settings gt IP Settings option the IP Settings screen is displayed Figure 5 28 IP Settings Screen IP Networking Mode Single IP Network IP Address 10 13 77 9 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway Addre
319. other gateway functionalities Silence Suppression Disable 0 Silence Suppression disabled default EnableSilenceCompression Enable 1 Silence Suppression enabled Enable without adaptation 2 A single silence packet is sent during silence period The parameter SCE is used to applicable only to G 729 maintain backward compatibility Silence Suppression is a method conserving bandwidth on VoIP calls by not sending packets when silence is detected Echo Canceler EnableEchoCanceller Off 0 Echo Canceler disabled The parameter ECE is used to On 1 Echo Canceler enabled default maintain backward compatibility DTMF Transport Type Determines the method DTMF digits are handled DTMFTransportType Note If TxDTMFOption or RxDTMFOption parameters are used then this parameter TransportType is set internally to the right value and the current value is ignored DTMF Mute 0 DTMF digits are erased from the voice stream and not relay to the remote end DTMF is still sent in out of band signaling if you select Yes for the Enable DTMF over H 245 parameter on the Protocol Definition screen DTMF Transparent 2 DTMF tones are left in the voice stream RFC 2833 Relay DTMF 3 DTMF digits are erased from the voice stream and relayed to the remote end using RFC 2833 standard default MF Transport Type MFTransportType NA DTMF Volume 31 to 0 dB DTMF gain control value in dB DTMFVolume The valid range is
320. oviding a good starting point when configuring an MediaPack FXO gateway This ini file can then be converted to a dat file that can be loaded to the gateway using the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion utility To use this wizard an MediaPack FXO gateway connected to your PBX with 2 physical phone lines is required This gateway must be configured with factory default settings and shouldn t be used for phone calls during the operation of the wizard Note that firmware version 4 2 and above is required on the gateway D 2 2 Installation The CPTWizard can be installed on any Windows 2000 or Windows XP based PC Windows compliant networking and audio peripherals are required for full functionality To install the CPTWizard copy the files from the supplied installation kit to any folder on your PC No further setup is required approximately 5 MB of hard disk space are required D 2 3 Initial Settings gt To start the CPTWizard take these 5 steps 1 Execute the CPTWizard exe file the wizard s initial settings screen is displayed Figure D 6 Initial Settings Screen fe AudioCodes Call Progress Tones Wizard Welcome to the AudioCodes Call Progress Tones Wizard e JY AudioCodes Please enter the IP address of an MP 10x FXO Gateway 10 31 4 49 Select two active ports to be used and enter their phone numbers below Port f Phone Number 2001 Port 2 Phone Number 2002 Invalid phone number E666 Enter the
321. pears on the top of screens and contains submenu options e Main action frame the main area of the screen in which information is viewed and configured e Corporate logo AudioCodes corporate logo For information on how to remove this logo refer to Section 10 5 on page 188 e Control Protocol the MediaPack control protocol Main Menu Bar The main menu bar of the Web Interface is divided into the following 7 menus e Quick Setup Use this menu to configure the gateway s basic settings for the full list of configurable parameters go directly to Protocol Management and Advanced Configuration menus An example of the Quick Setup configuration is described in Section 4 3 on page 43 e Protocol Management Use this menu to configure the gateway s control protocol parameters and tables refer to Section 5 5 on page 49 e Advanced Configuration Use this menu to set the gateway s advanced configuration parameters for advanced users only refer to Section 5 5 11 on page 107 e Status amp Diagnostics Use this menu to view and monitor the gateway s channels Syslog messages hardware software product information and to assess the gateway s statistics and IP connectivity information refer to Section 5 7 on page 138 e Software Update Use this menu when you want to load new software or configuration files onto the gateway refer to Section 5 8 on page 145 e Save Configuration Use this menu t
322. q Hz the frequency of the modulated signal for AM tones valid range from 1 Hz to 128 Hz Signal Level dBm the level of the tone for AM tones AM Factor steps of 0 02 the amplitude modulation factor valid range from 1 to 50 Recommended values from 10 to 25 When the same frequency is used for a continuous tone and a cadence tone the Signal On Time parameter of the continues tone must have a value that is greater than the Signal On Time parameter of the cadence tone Otherwise the continues tone is detected instead of the cadence tone The tones frequency should differ by at least 40 Hz from one tone to other defined tones For example to configure the dial tone to 440 Hz only define the following text Figure 16 2 Defining a Dial Tone Example Tone Tone High Low High Dial CALL PROGRESS TONE 1 Low Freq Hz 440 First Signal On Time 10msec 300 the dial tone is detected after 3 sec lakes Second Signal On Time 10msec 0 Second Signal Off Time 10msec 0 tone Type 1 Form 1 continuous Freq Hz 0 req Level dBm 10 10 dBm Freq Level dBm 32 use 32 only if a single tone is required Signal Off Time 10msec 0 16 1 2 Format of the Ringing Definition Section in the ini File The ringing definition is only applicable to MediaPack FXS gateways Using the ringing section of this configuration file the user can create a single ringing pattern
323. r ID option KeyCLIRDeact After the sequence is pressed a confirmation tone is heard Hotline Activate Keypad sequence that activates the delayed hotline option KeyHotLine To activate the delayed hotline option from the telephone e Dial the preconfigured sequence number on the keypad a dial tone is heard e Dial the telephone number to which the phone automatically dials after a configurable delay terminate the number with a confirmation tone is heard Deactivate Keypad sequence that deactivates the delayed hotline option KeyHotLineDeact After the sequence is pressed a confirmation tone is heard Version 4 6 71 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 3 Configuring the Manipulation Tables The VoIP gateway provides four Number Manipulation tables for incoming and outgoing calls These tables are used to modify the destination and source telephone numbers so that the calls can be routed correctly The Manipulation Tables are e Destination Phone Number Manipulation Table for IP gt Tel calls e Destination Phone Number Manipulation Table for Tel IP call e Source Phone Number Manipulation Table for IP Tel calls e Source Phone Number Manipulation Table for Tel gt IP calls Number manipulation can be performed either before or after a routing decision is made For example you can route a call to a specific hunt group according to its original number and then you can remove add a prefix to that number before it is routed
324. r IP Address CDR Report Level Debug Level Misc Parameters Progress Indicator to IP Not Configured Enable Busy Out Disable Default Release Cause B Delay After Reset sec o e o Max Number of Active Calls Max Call Duration sec Enable LAN Watchdog Disable 7 Enable Calls Cut Through Disable MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 62 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Configure the general parameters under Advanced Parameters according to Table 5 5 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 5 Advanced Parameters General Parameters continues on pages 63 to 66 Parameter Signaling DiffServ ControllPDiffServ IP Security SecureCallsFromIP Filter Calls to IP FilterCalls2IP Enable Digit Delivery to Tel EnableDigitDelivery Enable Digit Delivery to IP EnableDigitDelivery2IP Version 4 6 Description Defines the value of the DiffServ field in the IP header for the signaling session The valid range is 0 to 63 The default value is 0 No 0 Gateway accepts all H 323 calls default Yes 1 Gateway accepts H 323 calls only from IP addresses defined in the Tel to IP routing table The gateway rejects all calls from unknown IP addresses For detailed information on the Tel
325. r all srCommunityTable rows are currently empty 1 Adda row to the snmpTargetAddrTable with these values Name mgr0 TagList MGR Params v2cparams 2 Add a row to the tgtAddressMaskTable table with these values Name mgr0 tgtAddressMask 255 255 255 255 0 The agent doesn t allow creation of a row in this table unless a corresponding row exists in the snmpTargetAddrTable 3 Setthe value of the TransportLabel field on each non TrapGroup row in the srCommunityTable to MGR gt To add a subsequent Trusted Manager take these 2 steps The following procedure assumes that there is at least one configured read write community There are currently one or more Trusted Managers The taglist for columns for all rows in the srCommunityTable are currently set to MGR This procedure must be performed from one of the existing Trusted Managers 1 Add a row to the snmpTargetAddrTable with these values Name mgrN TagList MGR Params v2cparams where N is an unused number between 0 and 4 2 Add a row to the tgtAddressMaskTable table with these values Name mgrN tgtAddressMask 255 255 255 255 0 An alternative to the above procedure is to set the tgtAddressMask column while you are creating other rows in the table gt To delete a Trusted Manager not the final one take this step The following procedure assumes that there is at least one configured read write community There are currently two or more Trusted Managers The taglist for
326. r each unit that is to be supported enter parameters into the tool to set up the network configuration information and initialization file names Each unit is identified by a MAC address For information on how to configure add delete and edit units refer to Section B 11 on page 243 gt To load the software and configuration files take these 4 steps 1 Create a folder on your computer that contains all software and configuration files that are needed as part of the TFTP process Set the BootP and TFTP preferences refer to Section B 10 Add client configuration for the VoIP gateway that you want to initialize by the BootP refer to Section B 11 1 4 Reset the VoIP gateway either physically or remotely causing the device to use BootP to access the network and configuration information MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 238 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual B The BootP TFTP Configuration Utility B 7 BootP TFTP Application User Interface Figure B 1 shows the main application screen for the BootP TFTP utility Figure B 1 Main Screen fll AudioCodes BootP TFTP Server File Services Edit Help jala e v e Date Time Status New IP File Client Name Client Info 15 12 2003 10 22 30 100 OK D TFTPLoad MP108h323 ini 15 12 2003 10 22 15 100 OK D TFTPLoad ramMP108_H323 cmp 15 12 2003 10 22 10 100 OK D TFTPLoad TP1610Sip ini 15 12 2003 10 22 10 100 OK D TFTPLoad TP1610Sip ini 15 12 2003 10 22 10 Cl
327. rd Note Your current access level password is the default password For security reasons you are recommended to change your password 2 Inthe User Name and New Password fields enter the new username and the new password respectively Note that the username and password of both levels can be a maximum of 19 case sensitive characters In the Confirm Password field reenter the new password To apply the new username and password to the Administrator level Click the button Change Administrator Password the new username and password are applied and the Enter Network Password screen appears shown in Figure 5 1 on page 46 Enter the updated username and password in the Enter Network Password screen To apply the new username and password to the Monitoring level Click the button Change Monitoring Password the new username and password are applied Version 4 6 137 July 2005 3 AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 7 5 7 1 5 7 1 1 Status amp Diagnostics Use this menu to view and monitor the gateway s channels Syslog messages hardware software product information and to assess the gateway s statistics and IP connectivity information Gateway Statistics Use the screens under Gateway Statistics to monitor real time activity such as IP Connectivity information call details and call statistics including the number of call attempts failed calls fax calls etc Note The Gateway Statistics
328. rd SNMP objects usually supported at least in part by all network devices e The private SNMP branch Contains those extended SNMP objects defined by network equipment vendors e The experimental and directory SNMP branches Also defined within the internet root directory these branches are usually devoid of any meaningful data or objects The tree structure described above is an integral part of the SNMP standard though the most pertinent parts of the tree are the leaf objects of the tree that provide actual management data regarding the device Generally SNMP leaf objects can be partitioned into two similar but slightly different types that reflect the organization of the tree structure e Discrete MIB Objects Contain one precise piece of management data These objects are often distinguished from Table items below by adding a 0 dot zero extension to their names The operator must merely know the name of the object and no other information e Table MIB Objects Contain multiple sections of management data These objects are distinguished from Discrete items above by requiring a dot extension to their names that uniquely distinguishes the particular value being referenced The dot extension is the instance number of an SNMP object For Discrete objects this instance number is zero For Table objects this instance number is the index into th
329. re Name 1041M Flash Version Loaded Files 192 Call Progress Tones File Name usa_tones_11 dat FXS Coefficient File Name 14 1 fxs16khz dat gt To delete any of the loaded files take these 3 steps 1 Press the Delete button to the right of the files you want to delete Deleting a file takes effect only after the MediaPack is reset Click the Reset button on the main menu bar the Reset screen is displayed Select the Burn option and click the Reset button The MediaPack is reset and the files you chose to delete are discarded Version 4 6 145 July 2005 I AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 8 5 8 1 Software Update The Software Update menu enables users to upgrade the MediaPack software by loading a new cmp file along with the ini and a suite of auxiliary files or to update the existing auxiliary files The Software Update menu comprises two submenus e Software Update Wizard refer to Section 5 8 1 below e Auxiliary Files refer to Section 5 8 2 on page 150 Note When upgrading the MediaPack software you must load the new cmp file with all other related configuration files Software Upgrade Wizard The Software Upgrade Wizard guides users through the process of software upgrade selecting files and loading them to the gateway The wizard also enables users to upgrade software while maintaining the existing configuration Using the wizard obligates users to load and burn
330. re advised to configure DHCP servers to allow renewal of IP addresses Note If the gateway s network cable is disconnected and reconnected a DHCP renewal is Version 4 6 157 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 performed to verify that the gateway is still connected to the same network When DHCP is enabled the gateway also includes its product name e g MP 118 FXS or MP 104 FXO in the DHCP option 60 Vendor Class Identifier The DHCP server can use this product name to assign an IP address accordingly Note After power up the gateway performs two distinct DHCP sequences Only in the second sequence DHCP option 60 is contained If the gateway is reset from the Web SNMP only a single DHCP sequence containing option 60 is sent If DHCP procedure is used the new gateway IP address allocated by the DHCP server must be detected Note If during operation the IP address of the gateway is changed as a result of a DHCP renewal the gateway is automatically reset gt To detect the gateway s IP address follow one of the procedures below e Starting with Boot version 1 92 the gateway can use a host name in the DHCP request The host name is set to acl_nnnnn where nnnnn stands for the gateway s serial number the serial number is equal to the last 6 digits of the MAC address converted from Hex to decimal If the DHCP server registers this host name to a DN
331. red EN55022 1998 Class B EN55024 1998 EN61000 3 2 1995 including amendments A1 1998 A2 1998 A14 2000 EN61000 3 3 1995 EN60950 1 2001 Manufacturer s Name AudioCodes Ltd Manufacturer s Address 1 Hayarden Street Airport City Lod 70151 Israel Type of Equipment Analog VoIP System Model Numbers MP 11x FXS x may represent 2 4 8 I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards gt Signature 11 February 2005 Airport City Lod Israel Date Day Month Year Location I Zusmanovich Compliance Engineering Manager Czech Danish Dutch English Estonian Finnish French German Greek Hungarian Icelandic Italian Latvian Lithuanian Maltese Norwegian Polish Portuguese Slovak Slovene Spanish Swedish AudioCodes Ltd t mto prohla uje Ze tento MP 11x FXS series je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Undertegnede AudioCodes Ltd erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr MP 11x FXS Series overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Hierbij verklaart AudioCodes Ltd dat het toestel MP 11x FXS Series in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Hereby AudioCodes Ltd declares that this MP 11x FXS
332. represents all the addresses between 10 8 8 10 to 10 8 8 99 The manipulation rules are applied to any incoming call whose e Destination number prefix matches the prefix defined in the Destination Number field e Source number prefix matches the prefix defined in the Source Prefix field e Source IP address matches the IP address defined in the Source IP field if applicable Note that number manipulation can be performed using a combination of each of the above criteria or using each criterion independently Note For available notations that represent multiple numbers refer to Section 5 5 3 1 on page 75 Num of stripped digits e Enter the number of digits that you want to remove from the left of the telephone number prefix For example if you enter 3 and the phone number is 5551234 the new phone number is 1234 e Enter the number of digits in brackets that you want to remove from the right of the telephone number prefix Note A combination of the two options is allowed e g 2 3 Prefix Suffix to add e Prefix Enter the number string you want to add to the front of the phone number For example if you enter 9 and the phone number is 1234 the new number is 91234 e Suffix Enter the number string in brackets you want to add to the end of the phone number For example if you enter 00 and the phone number is 1234 the new number is 123400 Note You can enter a prefix and a suffix in the same field e g 9
333. ress Profile ID Status foto zz p TE ssa p tS a 100 E de lll E F T m Error F iz 013777 d ok A a 9 m A HM 9 Table 5 12 Tel to IP Routing Table Parameter Description Tel to IP Routing Mode Route calls before manipulation 0 Tel gt IP calls are routed before the number RouteModeTel2IP manipulation rules are applied default Route calls after manipulation 1 Tel gt IP calls are routed after the number manipulation rules are applied Note Not applicable if Gatekeeper is used Destination Phone Prefix Each entry in the Destination Phone Prefix fields represents a called telephone number prefix The prefix can be 1 to 19 digits long An asterisk represents all numbers Source Phone Prefix Each entry in the Source Phone Prefix fields represents a calling telephone number prefix The prefix can be 1 to 19 digits long An asterisk represents all numbers Any telephone number whose destination number matches the prefix defined in the Destination Phone Prefix field and its source number matches the prefix defined in the adjacent Source Phone Prefix field is sent to the IP address entered in the IP Address field Note that Tel to IP routing can be performed according to a combination of source and destination phone prefixes or using each independently Note 1 An additional entry of the same prefixes can be assigned to enable alternative routing Note 2
334. ress Tones ini file is complete use the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion utility to create a loadable Call Progress Tones dat file After loading this file to the gateway repeat the automatic detection procedure discussed above and verify that the gateway detects all four Call Progress Tones correctly MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 260 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual E SNMP Traps Appendix E SNMP Traps E 1 This section provides information on proprietary SNMP traps currently supported by the gateway There is a separation between traps that are alarms and traps that are not logs Currently all have the same structure made up of the same 10 varbinds Variable Binding 1 3 6 1 4 1 5003 9 10 1 21 1 The source varbind is composed of a string that details the component from which the trap is being sent forwarded by the hierarchy in which it resides For example an alarm from an SS7 link has the following string in its source varbind acBoard 1 SS7 0 SS7Link 6 In this example the SS7 link number is specified as 6 and is part of the only SS7 module in the device that is placed in slot number 1 in a chassis and is the module to which this trap relates For devices where there are no chassis options the slot number of the gateway is always 1 Alarm Traps The following tables provide information on alarms that are raised as a result of a generated SNMP trap The component name described in each of the
335. rop down list select the coder group you want to assign to that Profile You can select the gateway s default coders refer to Section 5 5 1 3 on page 57 or one of the coder groups you defined in the Coder Group Settings screen refer to Section 5 5 5 1 on page 86 Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the second to fifth Tel Profiles optional Click the Submit button to save your changes To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 17 ini File Tel Profile Settings Description TelProfile Profile ID Profile Name gt lt Preference gt lt Coder Group ID IsFaxUsed gt lt DJBufMinDelay gt DJBufOptFactor gt lt IPDiffServ gt lt ControllPDiffServ gt lt DtmfVolume gt lt InputGain gt lt VoiceVolume gt lt EnableReversePolarity gt lt EnableCurrentDisconnect gt lt EnableDigitDelivery gt lt ECE gt For example TelProfile_1 FaxProfile 1 2 0 10 5 22 33 2 22 34 1 0 1 1 TelProfile 2 ModemProfile 0 10 13 0 0 0 1 1 Not configured the default value of the parameter is used Common parameter used in both IP and Tel profiles Note This parameter can appear up to 4 times ID 1 to 4 89 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 5 3 IP Profile Settings Use the IP Profile Settings screen to define up to four different IP Profiles These Profiles are used in the Tel to IP and IP to Hunt Group Routing tables
336. roup x or ChannelList don t include a phone number The parameter is used as a starting number for the list of channels comprising all hunt groups in the gateway Time in seconds that the gateway waits between digits dialed by the user When the Inter digit Timeout expires the gateway attempts to dial the digits already received The valid range is 1 to 10 seconds The default value is 4 seconds Time in seconds that the dial tone is played The default time is 16 seconds FXS gateway ports play the dial tone after phone is picked up while FXO gateway ports play the dial tone after port is seized in response to ringing Note 1 During play of dial tone the gateway waits for DTMF digits Note 2 Dial Tone Duration is not applicable when Automatic Dialing is enabled Duration in seconds of the Hotline dial tone If no digits are received during the Hotline dial tone duration the gateway initiates a call to a preconfigured number set in the automatic dialing table The valid range is 0 to 60 The default time is 16 seconds Applicable to FXS and FXO gateways Digit map pattern If the digit string dialed number has matched one of the patterns in the digit map the gateway stops collecting digits and starts to establish a call with the collected number The digit map pattern contains up to 52 options separated by a vertical bar The maximum length of the entire digit pattern is limited to 152 characters Available notati
337. row to the right of the entry field and select the template that you want to use The values provided by the template are automatically entered into the parameter fields on the right side of the Client Configuration Window To use the template parameters leave the check box next to that parameter selected The parameter values appear in gray text To change a parameter to a different value unselect the check box to the right of that parameter This clears the parameter provided by the template and enables you to edit the entry Clicking the check box again restores the template settings Click Apply to save this entry to the list of clients or click Apply amp Reset to save this entry to the list of clients and send a reset message to that gateway to immediately implement the settings Note To use Apply amp Reset you must enable ARP Manipulation in the Preferences window Also you must have administrator privileges for the computer you are using Deleting Clients 3 To delete a client from the BootP Tool take these 3 steps Select the client that you wish to delete by clicking on the line in the window for that client Click the Delete Current Client button E9 A warning pops up To delete the client click Yes Editing Client Parameters gt 1 2 3 4 To edit the parameters for an existing client take these 4 steps Select the client that you wish to edit by clicking on the line in the window for that client Parameters
338. rrectly In this case the following message is displayed To troubleshoot blocked access to Internet Explorer take these 2 steps 1 Delete all cookies from the Temporary Internet files If this does not clear up the problem the security settings may need to be altered refer to Step 2 2 In Internet Explorer Tools Internet Options select the Security tab and then select Custom Level Scroll down until the Logon options are displayed and change the setting to Prompt for username and password and then restart the browser This fixes any issues related to domain use logon policy 5 4 Getting Acquainted with the Web Interface Figure 5 2 shows the general layout of the Web Interface screen Figure 5 2 MediaPack Web Interface Ta d AudioCodes MP 108 FXS Quick Setup Ei Coders Advanced Configuration Status amp Diagnostics Software Update 3rd Coder Save Configuration Ath Coder Resat 5th Coder The Web Interface screen features the following components e Title bar contains three configurable elements corporate logo a background image and the product s name For information on how to modify these elements refer to Section 10 5 on page 188 e Main menu bar always appears on the left of every screen to quickly access parameters submenus submenu options functions and operations Version 4 6 47 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 e Submenu bar ap
339. s 24 Minutes p Syslog Settings Syslog Server IP Address 10 13 2 27 Enable Syslog Enable SNMP Settings SNMP Managers Table o gt Enable SNMP Enable Trap Manager Host Name Telnet Settings Embedded Telnet Server Disable Telnet Server TCP Port Telnet Server Idle Timeout Configure the Application Settings according to Table 5 30 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 30 Network Settings Application Settings Parameters Parameter Description NTP Settings For detailed information on NTP refer to Section 9 5 on page 180 NTP Server IP Address IP address in dotted format notation of the NTP server NTPServerlP The default IP address is 0 0 0 0 the internal NTP client is disabled NTP UTC Offset Defines the UTC Universal Time Coordinate offset in seconds from the NTP NTPServerUTCOffset server The default offset is 0 The offset range is 43200 to 43200 seconds NTP Update Interval Defines the time interval in seconds the NTP client requests for a time update NTPUpdatelnterval The default interval is 86400 seconds 24 hours The range is 0 to 214783647 seconds Note It isn t recommended to be set beyond one month 2592000 seconds Version 4 6 111 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 5 30 Network Settings Application Settings Parameters Parame
340. s programmable frequency amp amplitude 15 frequencies in the range 300 to 1980 Hz 1 or 2 cadences per tone up to 2 sets of ON OFF periods Programmable 32 dB to 31 dB in steps of 1 dB Programmable 32 dB to 31 dB in steps of 1 dB 229 July 2005 r i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Table 17 1 MP 1xx Selected Technical Specifications continues on pages 229 to 231 Fax and Modem Transport Modes Real time Fax Relay Fax Transparency Modem Transparency Protocols VoIP Signaling Protocol Communication Protocols Line Signaling Protocols Processor Control Processor Control Processor Memory Signal Processors Interfaces FXS Telephony Interface FXO Telephony Interface Network Interface RS 232 Interface Lifeline MP 10x FXS Special order option Connectors amp Switches Rear Panel 24 Analog Lines MP 124 8 Analog Lines MP 108 4 Analog Lines MP 104 2 Analog Lines MP 102 Ethernet RS 232 Front Panel Reset Physical MP 10x Enclosure Dimensions MP 124 Enclosure Dimensions Group 3 real time fax relay up to 14400 bps with auto fallback Tolerant network delay up to 9 seconds round trip delay T 30 PSTN and T 38 IP compliant real time fax CNG tone detection amp Relay per T 38 Answer tone CED or AnsAm detection amp Relay per T 38 Automatic fax bypass pass through to G 711 ADPCM or NSE bypass mode Automatic switching pass through to PCM ADPCM or NSE bypass mode for mo
341. s BroadSoft s BroadWorks in client server mode the application server controls all supplementary services and keypad features by itself the gateway s supplementary services must be disabled 8 1 1 Call Hold and Retrieve Active calls can be put on hold by pressing the phone s hook flash button The party that initiates the hold is called the holding party the other party is called the held party After a successful hold the held party should hear Held Tone and the holding party should hear Dial Tone A retrieve can be performed only by the holding party while the call is held and active The holding party performs the retrieve by pressing the hook flash After a successful retrieve the voice should be connected again 8 1 2 Consultation Alternate Version 4 6 The consolation feature is relevant only for the holding party applicable only to the MediaPack FXS gateway After holding a call by pressing hook flash the holding party hears dial tone and can now initiate a new call which is called a consultation call At the stage of hearing dial tone or dialing to the new destination before completing the dialing the user can retrieve the held call by pressing hook flash The held call can t be retrieved while hearing Ringback tone After the consultation call is connected the user can switch between the held and active call by pressing the hook flash 161 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 8 1 3
342. s Manual Reader s Notes 40 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 4 Getting Started 4 Getting Started The MediaPack is supplied with default networking parameters show in Table 4 1 below and with an application software already resident in its flash memory with factory default parameters Before you begin configuring the gateway change its default IP address to correspond with your network environment refer to Section 4 2 and learn about the configuration methods available on the MediaPack refer to Section 4 1 below For information on quickly setting up the MediaPack with basic parameters using a standard Web browser refer to Section 4 3 on page 43 Table 4 1 MediaPack Default Networking Parameters FXS or FXO Default Value FXS 10 1 10 10 FXO 10 1 10 11 MediaPack default subnet mask is 255 255 0 0 default gateway IP address is 0 0 0 0 4 1 Configuration Concepts Users can utilize the MediaPack in a wide variety of applications enabled by its parameters and configuration files e g Call Progress Tones CPT The parameters can be configured and configuration files can be loaded using e Astandard Web Browser described and explained in Section 5 on page 45 e A configuration file referred to as the ini file For information on how to use the inifile refer to Section 6 on page 155 e An SNMP browser software refer to Section 15 on page 209 e The embedded Command Line
343. s Manual 224 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 gt User s Manual 16 Configuration Files First Signal Off Time 10 msec Signal Off period in 10 msec units for the first cadence on off cycle for cadence tones For burst tones this parameter defines the off time required after the burst tone ends and the tone detection is reported For continuous tones this parameter is ignored Second Signal On Time 10 msec Signal On period in 10 msec units for the second cadence on off cycle Can be omitted if there isn t a second cadence Second Signal Off Time 10 msec Signal Off period in 10 msec units for the second cadence on off cycle Can be omitted if there isn t a second cadence Third Signal On Time 10 msec Signal On period in 10 msec units for the third cadence ON OFF cycle Can be omitted if there isn t a third cadence Third Signal Off Time 10 msec Signal Off period in 10 msec units for the third cadence ON OFF cycle Can be omitted if there isn t a third cadence Forth Signal On Time 10 msec Signal On period in 10 msec units for the forth cadence ON OFF cycle Can be omitted if there isn t a fourth cadence Forth Signal Off Time 10 msec Signal Off period in 10 msec units for the forth cadence ON OFF cycle Can be omitted if there isn t a fourth cadence Carrier Freq Hz the frequency of the carrier signal for AM tones Modulation Fre
344. s all numbers Source Phone Prefix Each entry in the Source Phone Prefix fields represents a calling telephone number prefix The prefix can be 1 to 49 digits long An asterisk represents all numbers Source IP Address Each entry in the Source IP Address fields represents the source IP address of an IP gt Tel call obtained from the Setup message Note The source IP address can include the x wildcard to represent single digits For example 10 8 8 xx represents all the addresses between 10 8 8 10 to 10 8 8 99 Any H 323 incoming call whose destination number matches the prefix defined in the Destination Phone Prefix field and its source number matches the prefix defined in the adjacent Source Phone Prefix field and its source IP address matches the address defined in the Source IP Address field is assigned to the hunt group entered in the field to the right of these fields Note that IP to hunt group routing can be performed according to any combination of source destination phone prefixes and source IP address or using each independently Note For available notations that represent multiple numbers used in the prefix columns refer to Section 5 5 3 1 on page 75 Hunt Group ID In each of the Hunt Group ID fields enter the hunt group ID to which calls that match these prefixes are assigned Profile ID Enter the number of the IP profile that is assigned to the routing rule MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 82 Documen
345. s restricted and the value in the Presentation field is ignored Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each VoIP gateway port Click the Submit button to save your changes 6 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 23 Caller ID ini File Parameter Parameter Name in ini File Parameter Format CallerDisplayInfoX CallerDisplayInfo channel Caller ID string Restriction 0 Not restricted default 1 Restricted For example CallerDisplaylnfoO Susan C 0 CallerDisplayInfo2 Mark M 1 Note 1 The numbering of channels starts with O Note 2 This parameter can appear up to eight times for MP 108 and up to 24 times for MP 124 Version 4 6 99 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 8 4 Generate Caller ID to Tel The Generate Caller ID to Tel table is used to enable or disable per port the Caller ID generation for FXS gateways and detection for FXO gateways If a port isn t configured its Caller ID generation detection is determined according to the global parameter EnableCallerID described in Table 5 6 Toconfigure the Generate Caller ID to Tel Table take these 5 steps 1 Open the Generate Caller ID to Tel screen Protocol Management menu gt Endpoint Settings Generate Caller ID to Tel option the Generate Caller ID to Tel screen is displayed Figure 5 24 MediaPack FXS Generate Caller ID to Tel Screen Generate Caller
346. s the limits for an SELV circuit under normal operating conditions and on which over voltages from Telecommunication Networks are possible Circuit whose normal operating voltages exceeds the limits for an SELV circuit under normal operating conditions and is not subjected to over voltages from Telecommunication Networks Safety extra low voltage circuit FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Version 4 6 271 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 F 4 MP 11x FXS Declaration of Conformity Application of Council Directives 73 23 EEC including amendments 89 336 EEC including amendments Standards to which Conformity is Decla
347. s two SNMP Research International MIBs SR COMMUNITY MIB and TGT ADDRESS MASK MIB These MIBs are used in the configuration of SNMPv2c community strings and trusted managers In addition to the standard MIBs the complete series contains several proprietary MIBs Version 4 6 acBoard MIB This proprietary MIB contains objects related to configuration of the device and channels as well as to run time information Through this MIB users can set up the device configuration parameters reset the device monitor the device s operational robustness and Quality of Service during run time and receive traps Note The acBoard MIB is still supported but is being replaced by five newer proprietary MIBs The acBoard MIB has the following groups boardConfiguration boardInformation channelConfiguration channelStatus Y NW ON ON V reset gt acTrap As noted above five new MIBs cover the device s general parameters Each contains a Configuration subtree for configuring related parameters In some there also are Status and Action subtrees The 5 MIBs are AC ANALOG MIB AC CONTROL MIB AC MEDIA MIB AC PSTN MIB AC SYSTEM MIB Other proprietary MIBs are o o G ME mE 213 July 2005 r fA AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 e acGateway MIB This proprietary MIB contains objects related to configuration of the device when applied as a SIP or H 323 media gateway only This MIB complements the other proprietary MIBs The acGatew
348. sable 0 The allowed values are 0 disable or no and 1 enable or yes e snmpManagerlp Default 0 0 0 0 This is known as SNMPManagerTablelP in the ini file and is the IP address of the manager e SnmpManagerTrapPort Default 162 The valid port range for this is 100 4000 e snmpManagerTrapSendingEnable Default Enable 1 The allowed values are 0 disable and 1 enable Each of these MIB objects is independent and can be set regardless of the state of snmpManagerlsUsed If the parameter IsUsed is set to 1 the IP address for that row should be supplied in the same SNMP PDU Using the SNMPTargetMIB To add a trap destination e Addarow to the snmpTargetAddrTable with these values Name trapN TagList AC TRAP Params v2cparams where N is an unused number between 0 and 4 All changes to the trap destination configuration take effect immediately gt To delete a trap destination e Remove the appropriate row from the snmpTargetAddrTable To modify a trap destination You can change the IP address and or port number for an existing trap destination The same effect can be achieved by removing a row and adding a new row e Modify the IP address and or port number for the appropriate row in the snmpTargetAddrTable To disable a trap destination e Change TagList on the appropriate row in the snmpTargetAddrTable to the empty string gt To enable a trap destination e Change TagList on t
349. screens doesn t refresh automatically To view updated information re access the screen you require IP Connectivity The IP Connectivity screen provides you with an online read only network diagnostic connectivity information on all destination IP addresses configured in the Tel to IP Routing table Note This information is available only if the parameter AltRoutingTel2IPEnable described in Table 5 11 is set to 1 Enable or 2 Status Only Note The information in columns Quality Status and Quality Info per IP address is reset if two minutes elapse without a call to that destination gt To view the IP connectivity information take these 2 steps 1 Set AltRoutingTel2IPEnable to 1 or 2 2 Open the IP Connectivity screen Status amp Diagnostics menu gt Gateway Statistics submenu gt IP Connectivity the IP Connectivity screen is displayed Figure 5 43 Figure 5 43 IP Connectivity Screen IP Connectivity IP Address Host Name Connectivity Connectivity Method Status Quality Status Quality Info DNS Status 10 13 77 7 10 13 77 7 CON_OK QOS UNKNOWN PL percent DELAY msec 0 DNS_DISABLE quU s Eris 103779 CON OK QOS UNKNOWN PL percent 0 DELAY msec 0 DNS_DISABLE 10 13 77 18 10 13 77 18 CON FAIL QOS_UNKNOWN PL percent 0 DELAY msec 0 DNS_DISABLE 1 2 3 4 doron_pe CON FAIL OS_UNKNOWN PL percent 0 DELAY msec 0 DNS_RESOLVED 10 13 2
350. second repetition of the ini file parameter GatekeeperlP GatekeeperlP IP ID Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 2 Gatekeeper Parameters continues on pages 54 to 56 Parameter Third Gatekeeper IP Address GatekeeperlP Or GatekeeperlP IP ID Third Gatekeeper ID GatekeeperlP UseRedundantGKOnRRJ Use Redundant Gatekeeper on RRJ Fallback to Internal Routing IsFallbackUsed PreferRouteTable Prefer Routing Table Enable RAI EnableRAI RAI High Threshold RAlHighThreshold RAI Low Threshold RAlLowThreshold RAI Loop Time RAlLoopTime Version 4 6 Description IP address or domain name of the second redundant Gatekeeper you are using Enter the IP address in dotted format notation for example 192 10 1 255 Note 1 This parameter is available only if you select Yes in the Gatekeeper Redundancy field Note 2 When using a domain name you must enter a Primary DNS server or alternatively define this name in the Internal DNS Table ini file note 1 The IP address of the second redundant Gatekeeper is defined by the third repetition of the ini file parameter GatekeeperlP ini file note 2 Use this parameter to define the ID of the second redundant Gatekeeper GatekeeperlP IP ID String used to identify the second redundant Gatekeeper Used in Registration Request RRQ messages The default value is an empty string Note
351. set without administrator privileges on the computer results in an error message ARP Manipulation Enable must also be turned on in the Preferences window e View Client Selecting this option or double clicking on the line in the log window opens the Client Configuration window If the MAC address indicated on the line exists in the client database it is highlighted If the address is not in the client database a new client is added with the MAC address filled out You can enter data in the remaining fields to create a new client entry for that client MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 240 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual B The BootP TFTP Configuration Utility B 10 Setting the Preferences The Preferences window Figure B 3 is used to configure the BootP Tool parameters Figure B 3 Preferences Screen x r BootP Server 3 rTFTP Server ARP Manipulation Enabled v Enabled r Reply Type On Interface Broadcast f iret o 10 13 2 66 ARF Type Directory Dynamic C Static D i Boot File Mask L Number of Timed Replies INI File Mask Timeout Maximum Retransmissions B 10 1 BootP Preferences ARP is a common acronym for Address Resolution Protocol and is the method used by all Internet devices to determine the link layer address such as the Ethernet MAC address in order to route Datagrams to devices that are on the
352. sh to enter the phone number 555 1212 it must be entered as 5551212 without the hyphen If the hyphen is entered the entry does not work The hyphen character is used in number entry only as part of a range definition For example the entry 20 29 means all numbers in the range 20 to 29 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 48 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 Protocol Management Use this menu to configure the gateway s H 323 parameters and tables Note Those parameters contained within square brackets are the names used to configure the parameters via the ini file 5 5 1 Protocol Definition Parameters Use this submenu to configure the gateway s specific H 323 protocol parameters 5 5 1 1 General Parameters Use this screen to configure general H 323 parameters gt To configure the general parameters under Protocol Definition take these 4 steps 1 Open the General Parameters screen Protocol Management menu gt Protocol Definition submenu gt General Parameters option the General Parameters screen is displayed Figure 5 3 Protocol Definition General Parameters Screen Connection Mode Normal A Channel Select Mode By Phone Number H 323 ID l Open H 245 No z Open Media on Connect No x Send Media Information on Connect No z Enable Annex D T 38 Fax Relay Disate D
353. slation is required e g Tel to IP Routing table Gatekeeper IP Address Two different IP addresses can be assigned to the same hostname If the hostname isn t found in this table the gateway communicates with an external DNS server Assigning two IP addresses to hostname can be used for alternative routing using the Tel to IP Routing table Note that when the DNS table is used to resolve Gatekeeper domain names only the first IP address is used gt To configure the internal DNS table take these 7 steps 1 Openthe Internal DNS Table screen Protocol Management menu gt Routing Tables submenu gt Internal DNS Table option the Internal DNS Table screen is displayed Figure 5 14 Internal DNS Table Screen Internal DNS Table DNS Name First IP Address Second IP Address 1 DomainName com 10 8214 10 13 2 95 m B BN E B DWdBB 2 Inthe DNS Name field enter the hostname to be translated You can enter a string up to 31 characters long In the First IP Address field enter the first IP address that the hostname is translated to In the Second IP Address field enter the second IP address that the hostname is translated to Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each Internal DNS Table entry Click the Submit button to save your changes 7 To save the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 14
354. sportType 2 V22ModemTransportType 2 In this configuration both T 30 and V 34 faxes work in Bypass mode Or FaxTransportMode 1 Relay V34ModemTransportType 2 Modem bypass V32ModemTransportType 2 V23ModemTransportType 2 V22ModemTransportType 2 8 3 4 2 In this configuration T 30 fax uses T 38 Relay mode while V 34 fax uses Bypass mode Using Relay Mode for both T 30 and V 34 Faxes In this scenario V 34 fax machines are compelled to use their backward compatibility with T 30 faxes as a T 30 machine the V 34 fax can use T 38 Relay mode Refer to the following configuration FaxTransportMode 1 Relay V34ModemTransportType 0 Transparent V32ModemTransportType 0 V23ModemTransportType 0 V22ModemTransportType 0 8 4 Both T 30 and V 34 faxes use T 38 Relay mode This configuration forces the V 34 fax machine to operate in the slower T 30 mode Redundant Gatekeeper Implementation The redundant Gatekeeper mechanism IsRedundantGKUsed 1 similar to the Alternate Gatekeeper procedure described in para 7 2 6 in the H 323 standard provides MediaPack gateways with Gatekeeper redundancy options This mechanism allows the gateway to use up to two additional Gatekeepers as a backup in the event of a primary Gatekeeper failure The redundant Gatekeeper mechanism is identical to the Alternate Gatekeeper mechanism with the exceptions that all Alternate Gatekeeper fields i
355. squiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC H rmed intygar AudioCodes Ltd att denna MP 11x FXS Series st r verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 272 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual F Regulatory Information Safety Notice Installation and service of this unit must only be performed by authorized qualified service personnel The protective earth terminal on the back of the MP 11x FXS must be permanently connected to protective earth Telecommunication Safety The safety status of each port on the gateway is declared and detailed in the table below Ports Safety Status Ethernet 100 Base TX SELV FXS ODP P N s TNV 3 FXS TNV 2 TNV 3 Circuit whose normal operating voltages exceeds the limits for an SELV circuit under normal operating conditions and on which over voltages from Telecommunication Networks are possible SELV Safety extra low voltage circuit FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
356. ss 10 13 01 DNS Settings DNS Primary Server IP DNS Secondary Server IP DHCP Settings Enable DHCP NAT Settings NAT IP Address 2 Configure the IP Settings according to Table 5 29 3 Click the Submit button to save your changes 4 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Version 4 6 109 July 2005 AudioCodes bi Parameter IP Networking Mode IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address DNS Settings DNS Primary Server IP DNSPriServerlP DNS Secondary Server IP DNSSecServerlP DHCP Settings Enable DHCP DHCPEnable NAT Settings NAT IP Address StaticNatIP MediaPack H 323 Table 5 29 Network Settings IP Settings Parameters Description N A IP address of the gateway Enter the IP address in dotted format notation for example 10 8 201 1 Note 1 A warning message is displayed after pressing the button Submit if the entered value is incorrect Note 2 After changing the IP address and pressing the button Submit a prompt appears indicating that for the change to take effect the gateway is to be reset Subnet mask of the gateway Enter the subnet mask in dotted format notation for example 255 255 0 0 Note 1 A warning message is displayed after pressing the button Submit if the entered value is incorrect Note 2 After changing the subnet mask and pressing the button Sub
357. ss of the first redundant Gatekeeper e GatekeeperlP P address of the second redundant Gatekeeper Users can use the Alternate Gatekeeper mechanism AlternativeGKUsed described in para 7 2 6 in the H 323 standard instead of the redundant Gatekeeper mechanism The Alternative and Redundant mechanisms mustn t be used simultaneously MediaPack Registration with a Gatekeeper The MediaPack supports three different methods of registration with a Gatekeeper Registration with Prefixes The gateway registers with a Gatekeeper using prefixes range of numbers To register with prefixes 1 Configure the Registration Prefixes Table refer to Section 5 5 6 on page 92 2 Set the GWRegistrType parameter Table 5 2 according to your requirements gt E 164 0 The gateway registers the prefixes using E 164 format default gt H323 ID 1 The gateway registers the prefixes using H 323 ID format prefixes are represented as strings In this mode don t configure the H323IDString parameter if you do the gateway only registers with H323lDString and the prefixes are ignored gt E 164 and H323 ID 2 The gateway registers the prefixes using E 164 and H 323 ID formats In this mode the H323IDString if defined is added once to the Registration Request if not defined each prefix registers twice in E 164 format and H 323 ID format as a string gt NPI TON from Table 3 The gateway registers the prefixes using Type of Number
358. ss the Web Interface Refer to Section 5 6 5 on page 137 for details on how to change the username and password Once the gateway is configured correctly back up your settings by making a copy of the VoIP gateway configuration ini file and store it in a directory on your PC This saved file can be used to restore configuration settings at a future time For information on backing up and restoring the gateway s configuration refer to Section 5 6 3 on page 135 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 44 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 Configuring the MediaPack The Embedded Web Server is used both for gateway configuration including loading of configuration files and for run time monitoring The Embedded Web Server can be accessed from a standard Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer Netscape Navigator etc Specifically users can employ this facility to set up the gateway configuration parameters Users also have the option to remotely reset the gateway and to permanently apply the new set of parameters 5 1 Computer Requirements To use the Embedded Web Server the following is required e Acomputer capable of running your Web browser e A network connection to the VoIP gateway e One of the following compatible Web browsers gt Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 0 and higher gt Netscape Navigator version 7 2 and higher Note The browser mu
359. st be Java script enabled If java script is disabled access to the Embedded Web Server is denied 5 2 Protection and Security Mechanisms Access to the Embedded Web Server is controlled by the following protection and security mechanisms e Dual access level username and password refer to Section 5 2 1 below e Read only mode refer to Section 5 2 2 below e Disabling access refer to Section 5 2 3 below e Secured HTTP connection HTTPS refer to Section 12 1 1 on page 195 MP 11x only e Limiting access to a predefined list of IP addresses refer to Section 5 6 1 4 on page 114 e Managed access using a RADIUS server refer to Section 12 2 on page 198 MP 11x only 5 2 4 Dual Access Level Username and Password To prevent unauthorized access to the Embedded Web Server two levels of security are available Administrator also used for Telnet access and Monitoring Each employs a different username and password Users can access the Embedded Web Server as either Administrator all Web screens are read write and can be modified Default username Admin Default password Admin e Monitoring all Web screens are read only and cannot be modified In addition the following screens cannot be accessed Reset Save Configuration Software Upgrade Wizard Load Auxiliary Files Configuration File and Regional Settings The Change Password screen can only be used to change the mo
360. t LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Parameter Parameter Name in ini File PSTNPrefix Version 4 6 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 13 IP to Hunt Group Routing Table Description Parameter Format PSTNPrefix a b c d e a Destination Number Prefix b Hunt Group ID c Source Number Prefix d Source IP address obtained from the Setup message e IP Profile ID Selection of hunt groups for IP to Tel calls is according to destination number source number and source IP address Note 1 To support the in call alternative routing feature users can use two entries that support the same call but assigned it with a different hunt groups The second entree functions as an alternative selection if the first rule fails as a result of one of the release reasons listed in the AltRouteCauselP2Tel table Note 2 An optional IP ProfilelD 1 to 4 can be applied to each routing rule Note 3 The Source IP Address can include the x wildcard to represent single digits For example 10 8 8 xx represents all IP addresses between 10 8 8 10 to 10 8 8 99 Note 4 For available notations that represent multiple numbers refer to Section 5 5 3 1 on page 75 Note 5 This parameter can appear up to 24 times 83 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 5 4 4 Internal DNS Table The internal DNS table similar to a DNS resolution translates hostnames into IP addresses This table is used when hostname tran
361. t 1 offhook listens to the dial tone Sets port 1 and port 2 offhook dials the number of port 2 listens to the busy tone Sets port 1 offhook dials the number of port 2 listens to the Ringback tone Sets port 1 offhook dials an invalid number listens to the reorder tone BE qx ode Ee on The wizard then analyzes the recorded Call Progress Tones and displays a message specifying the tones that were detected by the gateway and analyzed by the wizard correctly At the end of a successful detection operation the detected Call Progress Tones are displayed in the Tones Analyzed pane refer to Figure D 8 Version 4 6 257 July 2005 my X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 Figure D 8 Recording Screen after Automatic Detection lll AudioCodes Call Progress Tones Wizard l 2 xj Automatic Manual r Automatic tone detection and analysis Start Automatic Configuration Automatic analysis complete Tones analyzed 4 of 4 The gateway correctly detected 4 of 4 tones Tones analyzed Dial Tone auto 350 Busy Tone aut 480 Ringing Tone 450 Reorder Tone 480 AudioCodes Cancel 6 All four Call Progress Tones are saved as standard A law PCM at 8000 bits per sample in the same directory as the CPTWizard exe file is located with the following names gt cpt recorded dialtone pcm gt cpt recorded busytone pcm gt cpt recorded ringtone pcm cpt recorded invalidtone pcm Note 1 If the
362. t den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet BMWi Greek ME THN MAPOYZA AudioCodes Ltd AHAQNEI OTI MediaPack FXO ZYMMOPQOONETAI NPOX TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIZ AOINE ZXETIKEX AIATAZEIX THX OAHMIAZ 1999 5 EK Hungarian Alul rott AudioCodes Ltd nyilatkozom hogy a MediaPack FXO megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak Icelandic ki etta er samr mi vi tilskipun Evr pusambandsins 1999 5 Italian Con la presente AudioCodes Ltd dichiara che questo MediaPack FXO conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latvian Ar o AudioCodes Ltd deklar ka MediaPack FXO atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lithuanian AudioCodes Ltd deklaruoja kad irenginys MediaPack FXO tenkina 1999 5 EB Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas sios direktyvos nuostatas Maltese Hawnhekk AudioCodes Ltd jiddikjara li dan MediaPack FXO jikkonforma mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Norwegian Dette produktet er i samh righet med det Europeiske Direktiv 1999 5 Polish AudioCodes Ltd deklarujemy z pelna odpowiedzialnoscia ze wyr b MediaPack FXO spelnia podstawowe wymagania i odpowiada warunkom zawartym w dyrektywie 1999 5 EC Por
363. t recommended to keep a Message Log session open for a prolonged period refer to the Note below For prolong debugging use an external Syslog server refer to Section 13 2 on page 203 Refer to the Debug Level parameter GwDebugLevel described in Table 5 5 to determine the Syslog logging level gt To activate the Message Log take these 4 steps 1 Inthe General Parameters screen under Advanced Parameters submenu accessed from the Protocol Management menu set the parameter Debug Level to 5 This parameter determines the Syslog logging level in the range 0 to 5 where 5 is the highest level 2 Open the Message Log screen Status amp Diagnostics menu gt Message Log the Message Log screen is displayed and the Log is activated Figure 5 48 Message Log Screen Log is Activated 21d 23h 48m 23s lgr flow 380 0 0FF HOOK EV 21d 23h 48m 23s lgr flow 381 E 0 0FF_HOOK_EV 21d 23h 48m 23s lgr psbrdif 352 DigitMap for channel O Not Activated 21d 23h 48m 23s lgr psbrdif 383 0 PSOSBoardInterface PlayTone Called Tone DIAL TON Zld 23h 48m 23s Short line was detected going to Active Low Code 36010 CID 0 3 Select the messages copy them and paste them into a text editor such as Notepad Send this txt file to our Technical Support for diagnosis and troubleshooting 4 Toclear the screen of messages click on the submenu Message Log the screen is cleared and new messages begin appear
364. te Name du De ee We v b Version 4 6 Template Name sts e Peepe Subnet ss s fo fo Gatewy fho fs fo fi SevelP 10 3 fe e Boot File exce H INI File in OK Apply To create a new template take these 4 steps Click on the Add New Template button ggg Fill in the default parameter values in the parameter fields Click Apply to save this new template Click OK when you are finished adding templates To edit an existing template take these 4 steps Select the template by clicking on its name from the list of templates in the window Make changes to the parameters as required Click Apply to save this new template Click OK when you are finished editing templates To delete an existing template take these 3 steps Select the template by clicking its name from the list of templates in the window Click on the Delete Current Template button w A warning pop up message appears To delete the template click Yes Note that if this template is currently in use the template cannot be deleted 247 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 248 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual C RTP RTCP Payload Types and Port Allocation Appendix C RTP RTCP Payload Types and Port Allocation RTP Payload Types are defined in RFC 3550 and RFC 3551 We have added new payload types to enable advanced use of other coder types These types are reporte
365. tekeeper on the PC Start MP 108 gateways and load the configuration ini file Make a call from one endpoint to the other p os m mw m 54 EB s y Display the Gatekeeper log messages to show the Gatekeeper activities 8 12 3 Using Gateway with NetMeeting In this demo a call can be made from an endpoint in one gateway to NetMeeting Toconfigure ini file parameters take these 7 steps 1 Configure endpoint numbers of the MP 108 FXS gateway 101 108 2 Configure NetMeeting IP address using prefix definition Prefix 200 NetMeeting IP address Start MP 108 gateway and load the configuration ini file Set default number for NetMeeting to MP 108 calls DefaultNumber 7101 or any other number 102 to 108 Start MP 108 gateway and load the configuration ini file Make a call from any MP 108 endpoint to NetMeeting by dialing 200 Make a call from NetMeeting to IP address of MP 108 The phone connected to port 1 of the MP 108 then rings 8 12 4 Remote IP Extension between FXO and FXS This application explains how to implement remote extension via IP using MP 108 FXO and MP 108 FXS gateways In this configuration PBX incoming calls are routed to the Remote Extension via the MP 108 FXO and MP 108 FXS gateways Requirements e One MP 108 FXO gateway e One MP 108 FXS gateway e Analog phones POTS e PBX one or more PBX loop start lines e LAN Connect the MP 108 FXO ports directly to the PBX lines
366. ter Description Syslog Settings Syslog Server IP address IP address in dotted format notation of the computer you are using to run the SyslogServerlP Syslog Server The Syslog Server is an application designed to collect the logs and error messages generated by the VoIP gateway Note The default UDP Syslog port is 514 For information on the Syslog server refer to Section 13 2 on page 203 Enable Syslog Enable 1 Send the logs and error message generated by the gateway to the EnableSyslog Syslog Server If you select Enable you must enter an IP address in the Syslog Server IP address field Disable 0 Logs and errors are not sent to the Syslog Server default Note 1 Syslog messages may increase the network traffic Note 2 Logs are also sent to the RS 232 serial port for information on establishing a serial communications link with the MediaPack refer to Section 10 2 on page 183 Note 3 To configure the Syslog logging levels use the parameter Debug Level SNMP Settings For detailed information on the SNMP parameters that can only be configured via the ini file refer to Table 5 39 on page 125 For detailed information on developing an SNMP based program to manage your devices refer to Section 15 on page 209 SNMP Managers Table Refer to Section 5 6 1 3 on page 112 Enable SNMP Enable 0 SNMP is enabled default DisableSNMP Disable 1 SNMP is disabled and no traps are sent Trap Manager Host Name
367. terminated by the remote party the gateway plays a reorder tone for TimeForReorderTone seconds and is then ready to answer the next incoming call without onhooking the phone The waiting call is automatically answered by the gateway when the current call is terminated EnableCallWaiting 1 Note This option is applicable only to FXS gateways MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 66 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 5 2 2 Supplementary Services 5 Configuring the MediaPack Use this screen to configure parameters that are associated with supplementary services For detailed information on the supplementary services refer to Section 8 1 on page 161 gt To configure the supplementary services parameters take these 4 steps 1 Open the Supplementary Services screen Protocol Management menu gt Advanced Parameters submenu gt Supplementary Services option the Supplementary Services screen is displayed Figure 5 8 Supplementary Services Parameters Screen Supplementary Services Enable Hold Hold Format Enable Transfer Transfer Prefix Enable 0 0 0 0 Enable Enable Call Forward Enable Enable Call Waiting Disable Enable Name Identification Disable Number of Call Waiting Indications Time Between Call Waiting Indications Time Before Waiting Indication Waiting Beep Duration Enable Caller ID Caller ID Type
368. th options is allowed C String to add as prefix or if in brackets are used as suffix A combination of both options is allowed d Number of remaining digits from the right e H 225 Q 931 Number Plan f H 225 Q 931 Number Type g Destination number prefix h Calling number presentation 0 to allow presentation 1 to restrict presentation The b to f and h manipulation rules are applied if the called and calling numbers match the a and g conditions The manipulation rules are executed in the following order b d and c Parameters can be skipped by using the sign for example SourceNumberMapTel2IP 01 2 972 0 0 1 SourceNumberMapTel2IP 03 2 667 0 0 22 1 SourceNumberMapIP2Tel Manipulate the destination number for IP to Tel calls NumberMapIP2Tel a b c d e f g a Source number prefix b Number of stripped digits from the left or if brackets are used from the right A combination of both options is allowed C String to add as prefix or if brackets are used as suffix A combination of both options is allowed d Number of remaining digits from the right e Not in use should be set to f Not in use should be set to g Destination number prefix The b to d manipulations rules are applied if the called and calling numbers match the a and g conditions The manipulation rules are executed in the following order b d and c
369. the correct 12 or 16 kHz coefficient file must be used for both FXS and FXO gateways To enable this feature configure SendMetering2IP 1 Version 4 6 193 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 194 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 12 Security MP 11x Only 12 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 1 1 Version 4 6 Security MP 11x Only This section describes the security mechanisms and protocols implemented on the MP 11x The following list specifies the available security protocols and their objectives e SSL Secure Socket Layer TLS Transport Layer Security The SSL TLS protocols are used to provide privacy and data integrity between two communicating applications over TCP IP They are used to secure the following applications Web access HTTPS and Telnet access refer to Section 12 1 below e RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS server is used to enable multiple user management on a centralized platform refer to Section 12 2 on page 198 SSL TLS MP 11x Only SSL also known as TLS is the method used to secure the MP 11x Embedded Web Server and Telnet server The SSL protocol provides confidentiality integrity and authenticity between two communicating applications over TCP IP Specifications for the SSL TLS implementation e Supports transports SSL 2 0 SSL 3 0 TLS 1 0 e Supports ciphers DES RC4 compatible e Authen
370. the gateway to use the same port for both RTP and T 38 packets set the parameter T38UseRTPPort to 1 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 250 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual D Accessory Programs and Tools Appendix D Accessory Programs and Tools D 1 The accessory applications and tools shipped with the device provide you with friendly interfaces that enhance device usability and smooth your transition to the new VoIP infrastructure The following applications are available e TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility refer to Section D 1 below e Call Progress Tones Wizard refer to Section D 1 3 on page 254 TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility Use the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility to e Create a loadable Call Progress Tones file refer to Section D 1 1 on page 252 e Encode decode an ini file refer to Section D 1 2 on page 253 e Create a loadable Prerecorded Tones file refer to Section D 1 3 on page 254 Figure D 1 TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility Opening Screen TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility R2 4 Version 4 6 251 July 2005 X AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 D 1 1 Converting a CPT iniFile to a Binary dat File For detailed information on creating a CPT ini file refer to Section 16 1 on page 223 1 To convert a CPT ini file to a binary dat file take these 10 steps Execute the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility DConvert240
371. the telephony interface configuration information for the VolP gateway This information includes telephony interface characteristics such as DC and AC impedance feeding current and ringing voltage This file is specific to the type of telephony interface that the VolP gateway supports In most cases you have to load this type of file Call Progress Tones This is a region specific telephone exchange dependent file that contains the Call Progress Tones levels and frequencies that the VolP gateway uses The default CPT file is U S A Prerecorded Tones The dat PRT file enhances the gateway s capabilities of playing a wide range of telephone exchange tones that cannot be defined in the Call Progress Tones file gt To load an auxiliary file to the gateway take these 8 steps 1 Open the Auxiliary Files screen Software Upgrade menu gt Load Auxiliary Files the Auxiliary Files screen is displayed Click the Browse button that is in the field for the type of file you want to load Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to load Click the file and click the Open button the name and path of the file appear in the field beside the Browse button 5 Click the Send File button that is next to the field that contains the name of the file you want to load An exclamation mark in the screen section indicates that the file s loading doesn t take effect on the fly e g CPT file 6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each
372. tication X 509 certificates CRLs are not supported Embedded Web Server Configuration For additional security you can configure the Embedded Web Server to accept only secured HTTPS connections by changing the parameter HTTPSOnly to 1 described in Table 5 36 on page 119 You can also change the port number used for the secured Web server by default 443 by changing the ini file parameter HTTPSPort described in Table 5 37 on page 120 Using the Secured Embedded Web Server Tousethe secured Embedded Web Server take these 3 Steps 1 Access the MP 11x using the following URL https host name or IP address Depending on the browser s configuration a security warning dialog may be displayed The reason for the warning is that the MP 11x initial certificate is not trusted by your PC The browser may allow you to install the certificate thus skipping the warning dialog the next time you connect to the MP 11x If you are using Internet Explorer click View Certificate and then Install Certificate The browser also warns you if the host name used in the URL is not identical to the one listed in the certificate To solve this add the IP address and host name ACL_nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the MP 11x to your hosts file located at etc hosts on UNIX or C Windows System32 Drivers ETC hosts on Windows then use the host name in the URL e g https ACL_280152 The figure below is an example of a host file 1
373. tificate Signing Request screen is displayed Figure 12 2 To load the Trusted Root Certificate file locate the trusted root certificate loading section Click Browse and navigate to the file click Send File When the operation is completed set the ini file parameter HTTPSRequireClientCertificates 1 6 Save the configuration Section 5 9 on page 152 and restart the MP 11x When a user connects to the secure Web server e Ifthe user has a client certificate from a CA listed in the Trusted Root Certificate file the connection is accepted and the user is prompted for the system password e f both the CA certificate and the client certificate appear in the Trusted Root Certificate file the user is not prompted for a password thus providing a single sign on experience the authentication is performed using the X 509 digital signature e If the user doesn t have a client certificate from a listed CA or doesn t have a client certificate at all the connection is rejected The process of installing a client certificate on your PC is beyond the scope of this document For more information refer to your Web browser or operating system documentation and or consult your security administrator The root certificate can also be loaded via ini file using the parameter HTTPSRootFileName RADIUS Login Authentication MP 11x Only Users can enhance the security and capabilities of logging to the gateway s Web and Telnet embedded
374. timusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen French Par la pr sente AudioCodes Ltd d clare que l appareil MediaPack FXS Series est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC German Hiermit erkl rt AudioCodes Ltd dass sich dieser diese dieses MediaPack FXS Series in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC befindet BMWi Greek ME THN lIAPOY A AudioCodes Ltd AHAQNEI OTI MediaPack FXS Series 2YMMOP ONETAI NPOZ TIZ OYXIOAEIX ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIZ AOITTEZ ZXETIKEZ AIATAZEIX TH2Z OAHMIAZ 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Hungarian Alulirott AudioCodes Ltd nyilatkozom hogy a MediaPack FXS Series megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC iranyelv egy b eldirasainak Icelandic ki betta er samr mi vi tilskipun Evr pusambandsins 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Italian Con la presente AudioCodes Ltd dichiara che questo MediaPack FXS Series conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC Latvian Ar o AudioCodes Ltd deklar ka MediaPack FXS Series atbilst Direkt vas 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lithuanian AudioCodes Ltd deklaruoja kad irenginys MediaPack FXS Series tenkina 89 336 EEC 73 2
375. to IP Routing table refer to Section 5 5 4 2 on page 79 Recommended When Gatekeeper is used set this parameter to No leaving the Gatekeeper to determine whether to accept or reject H 323 calls Don t Filter 0 Disable the Filter Calls To IP service default Filter 1 Enable the Filter Calls To IP service If the Filter Calls To IP feature is enabled then when a Gatekeeper is used the gateway first checks the Tel gt IP routing table before making a call through the Gatekeeper If the number is not allowed number isn t listed or a Call Restriction routing rule IP 0 0 0 0 is applied the call is released Disable 0 Disabled default Enable 1 Enable Digit Delivery feature for MediaPack FXO amp FXS The digit delivery feature enables sending of DTMF digits to the gateway s port after the line is offhooked FXS or seized FXO For IP Tel calls after the line is offhooked seized the MediaPack plays the DTMF digits of the called number towards the phone line Note 1 The called number can also include the characters p 1 5 seconds pause and d detection of dial tone If the character d is used it must be the first digit in the called number The character p can be used several times For example the called number can be as follows d1005 dpp699 p9p300 To add the d and p digits use the usual number manipulation rules Note 2 To use this feature with FXO gateways configure the gat
376. to RFC 3389 Valid only if EnableStandardSIDPayloadType is set to 1 MP 11x only The valid values are 0 default 4 6 8 and 10 Sets the four wire to two wire worst case Hybrid loss the ratio between the signal level sent to the hybrid and the echo level returning from the hybrid 0 7 6 dB default 1 9dB 2 0dB 3 3dB 18 to 3 corresponding to 18 dBm to 3 dBm in 1 dB steps Default 12 dBm fax gain control 0 DTMF event is reported on the start of a detected DTMF digit 1 DTMF event is reported on the end of a detected DTMF digit default The parameter is used for out of band dialing H 245 user input message or H 225 keypad facility MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 132 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 44 Channel Settings ini File Parameters continues on pages 132 to 134 ini File Parameter Name DTMFDigitLength DTMFinterDigitinterval TestMode ModemBypassPayloadT ype DetFaxOnAnswerTone FaxModemBypassBasic RtpPacketinterval NSEMode NSEPayloadType BellModemTransportTy pe BellcoreCallerlDTypeOn eSubStandard ETSICallerlIDTypeOneSu bStandard ETSIVMWITypeOneStan dard Version 4 6 Valid Range and Description Time in msec for generating DTMF to PSTN side The default value is 100 msec The valid range is 0 to 32767 Time in msec between generated DTMFs to PSTN side The default value is 100 msec The valid range is 0
377. to associate different Profiles to routing rules Toconfigure the IP Profile settings take these 9 steps 1 Open the IP Profile Settings screen Protocol Management menu gt Profile Definitions submenu gt IP Profile Settings option the IP Profile Settings screen is displayed 2 Figure 5 18 IP Profile Settings Screen IP Profile Settings Profile ID Profile Name Profile Parameters Profile Preference Is Fax Used Jitter Buffer Minimum Delay msec Jitter Buffer Frame Error Delay Opt Factor RTP IP Diff Serv Signaling DiffServ Silence Suppression Enable RTP Redundancy Depth o Coder Group Default Coder Group 2 Inthe Profile ID drop down list select the IP Profile you want to edit up to four IP Profiles can be configured 3 Inthe Profile Name field enter a name that enables you to identify the Profile intuitively and easily 4 Inthe Profile Preference drop down list select the preference 1 10 of the current Profile The preference option is used to determine the priority of the Profile If both IP and Tel profiles apply to the same call the coders and other common parameters of the preferred Profile are applied to that call If the Preference of the Tel and IP Profiles is identical the Tel Profile parameters are applied Note If the coder lists of both IP and Tel Profiles apply to the same call an intersection of the cod
378. to convert it the modified ini file into binary format using the TrunkPack Downloadable Conversion Utility For the description of the procedure on how to convert CPT ini file to a binary dat file refer to Section D 1 1 on page 252 Note that only the dat file can be loaded to the MediaPack gateway To load the Call Progress Tones dat file to the MediaPack use the Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 8 2 on page 150 or the ini file refer to Section 5 8 2 1 on page 151 16 1 1 Format of the Call Progress Tones Section in the ini File Users can create up to 32 different Call Progress Tones each with frequency and format attributes The frequency attribute can be single or dual frequency in the range of 300 Hz to 1980 Hz or an Amplitude Modulated AM In total up to 64 different frequencies are supported Only eight AM tones in the range of 1 to 128 kHz can be configured the detection range is limited to 1 to 50 kHz Note that when a tone is composed of a single frequency the second frequency field must be set to zero The format attribute can be one of the following e Continues e g dial tone a steady non interrupted sound Only the First Signal On time should be specified All other on and off periods must be set to zero In this case the parameter specifies the detection period For example if it equals 300 the tone is detected after 3 seconds 300 x 10 msec The minimum detection time is 100 msec e C
379. tone or to cut through the voice channel to listen to remote Call Progress Tones messages Supports detection FXO and generation FXS of Caller ID signal NTT Bellcore ETSI Indian Danish Brazilian British and Swedish standards and interworking it to H 323 network Supports Caller ID restriction Privacy Supports routing of IP gt Tel calls to predefined hunt groups Supports a configurable channel select mode per hunt group Supports various number manipulation rules for P gt Tel and Tel gt IP called and calling numbers Supports H 245 round trip delay When activated the gateway periodically generates H 245 round trip delay requests Note that the vulnerability of the MediaPack was evaluated to H 323 messages per NISCC Vulnerability Advisory 006489 H323 refer to uniras gov uk and to kb cert org Version 4 6 For more updated information on the gateway s supported features refer to the latest MediaPack H 323 Release Notes 19 July 2005 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Reader s Notes 20 MediaPack H 323 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 2 MediaPack Physical Description 2 MediaPack Physical Description This section provides detailed information on the hardware the location and functionality of the LEDs buttons and connectors on the front and rear panels of the MP 1xx refer to Section 2 1 below and MP 11x Section 2 2 on page 25 gateways For detailed information on installing the
380. top shelf wall mount or 19 inch rack mount with side brackets Maximum operating voltage range 90 264 VAC Nominal operating voltage range 100 250 VAC 0 5A 47 63 Hz FCC part 68 amp CE CTR21 ASIF S003 FXS UL 60950 1 FCC part 15 Class B CE Mark EN 60950 1 EN 55022 EN 55024 Gateway configuration using Web browser CLI or ini files SNMP v2c Syslog per RFC 3164 Local RS 232 terminal Web Management via HTTP Telnet 17 2 MP 11x Specifications Table 17 2 MP 11x Functional Specifications continues on pages 231 to 233 Channel Capacity Available Ports MP 11x FXS Functionality FXS Capabilities Additional Features Polarity Reversal Wink Version 4 6 MP 112R 2 ports MP 114 4 ports MP 118 8 ports The MP 112R differs from the MP 114 and MP 118 Its configuration excludes the RS 232 connector the Lifeline option and outdoor protection Short or Long Haul Automatic Detection REN2 Up to 10 km 32 800 feet using 24 AWG line REN5 Up to 3 5 km 11 400 feet using 24 AWG line Note The lines were tested under the following conditions ring voltage greater than 30 Vrms offhook loop current greater than 20 mA all lines ring simultaneously MP 11x includes lightning and high voltage protection for outdoor operation The following standards are supported EN61000 4 5 EN55024 and UL60950 Caller ID generation Bellcore GR 30 CORE Type 1 using Bell 202 FSK modulation ETSI Type 1 NTT Denmark
381. tors e Detailed Self Test Mode Detailed self test mode is run when initialization of the gateway is completed and if the configuration parameter EnableDiagnostics is set to 1 or 2 when set to 1 flash is tested thoroughly when set to 2 flash is partially tested In this mode the media gateway tests all hardware components memory DSP etc outputs the status of the test results to Syslog and ends the test The gateway doesn t process calls while in Detailed self test mode When you are finished running the detailed test you must disable it EnableDiagnostics 0 and reset the gateway 13 2 Syslog Support Syslog protocol is an event notification protocol that enables a machine to send event notification messages across IP networks to event message collectors also known as Syslog servers Syslog protocol is defined in the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF RFC 3164 standard Since each process application and operating system was written independently there is little uniformity to Syslog messages For this reason no assumption is made on the contents of the messages other than the minimum requirements of its priority Syslog uses UDP as its underlying transport layer mechanism The UDP port that was assigned to Syslog is 514 The Syslog message is transmitted as an ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange message The message starts with a leading lt less than character followed by a number wh
382. ts were sent if there s when either BootP reply is received or still no reply the gateway loads from number of retries is reached flash 1 1 BootP retry 1 second 1 4 DHCP packets 2 2 BootP retries 3 second 2 5 DHCP packets 3 3 BootP retries 6 second default 3 6 DHCP packets default 4 10 BootP retries 30 second 4 7 DHCP packets 5 20 BootP retries 60 second 5 8 DHCP packets 6 40 BootP retries 120 second 6 9 DHCP packets 7 100 BootP retries 300 second 7 10 DHCP packets 15 BootP retries indefinitely 15 18 DHCP packets Enables the Selective BootP mechanism 1 Enabled 0 Disabled default The Selective BootP mechanism available from Boot version 1 92 enables the gateway s integral BootP client to filter unsolicited BootP DHCP replies accepts only BootP replies that contain the text AUDC in the vendor specific information field This option is useful in environments where enterprise BootP DHCP servers provide undesired responses to the gateway s BootP requests Note When working with DHCP DHCPEnable 1 the selective BootP feature must be disabled The interval between the device s startup and the first BootP DHCP request that is issued by the device 1 1 second default 2 3 second 3 6 second 4 30 second 5 60 second Note This parameter only takes effect from the next reset of the device 122 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Man
383. tuguese AudioCodes Ltd declara que este MediaPack FXO est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 CE Slovak AudioCodes Ltd t mto vyhlasuje Ze MediaPack FXO sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 ES Slovene iuo AudioCodes Ltd deklaruoja kad is MediaPack FXO atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Spanish Por medio de la presente AudioCodes Ltd declara que el MediaPack FXO cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Swedish H rmed intygar AudioCodes Ltd att denna MediaPack FXO star verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Safety Notice Installation and service of this unit must only be performed by authorized qualified service personnel The protective earth terminal on the back of the MediaPack must be permanently connected to protective earth Industry Canada Notice This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment technical specifications This is confirmed by the registration numbers The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a declaration of conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry
384. ual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 37 Board ini File Parameters continues on pages 120 to 123 ini File Parameter Name Valid Range and Description ExtBootPReqEnable 0 Disable default 1 Enable extended information to be sent in BootP request If enabled the device uses the vendor specific information field in the BootP request to provide device related initial startup information such as board type current IP address software version etc For a full list of the vendor specific Information fields refer to Section 7 3 on page 158 The BootP TFTP configuration utility displays this information in the Client Info column refer to Figure B 1 Note This option is not available on DHCP servers Version 4 6 123 July 2005 i AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 5 6 1 10 Automatic Updates Parameters For detailed information on the automatic update mechanism refer to Section 10 3 on page 184 Table 5 38 Automatic Updates Parameters ini File Parameter Name CmpFileURL IniFileURL IniFileTemplateURL PrtFileURL CptFileURL FXOCoeffFileURL FXSCoeffFileURL AutoUpdateCmpFile AutoUpdateFrequency AutoUpdatePredefinedTime ResetNow MediaPack H 323 User s Manual Description Specifies the name of the cmp file and the location of the server IP address or FQDN from which the gateway loads a new cmp file and updates itself The cmp file can be loaded using TFTP HTTP or HTTPS MP 11x only For
385. ult Used for IP gt MP 10x FXO gateways calls If two stage dialing is enabled then the FXO gateway seizes one of the PSTN PBX lines without performing any dial the remote user is connected over IP to PSTN PBX and all further signaling dialing and Call Progress Tones is performed directly with the PBX without the gateway s intervention If one stage dialing is enabled then the FXO gateway seizes one of the available lines according to Channel Select Mode parameter and dials the destination phone number received in Setup message Use the Waiting For Dial Tone parameter to specify whether the dialing should come after detection of dial tone or immediately after seizing of the line 104 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack Table 5 27 FXO Parameters continues on pages 104 to 106 Parameter Description Waiting For Dial Tone No 0 Don t wait for dial tone IsWaitForDialTone Yes 1 Wait for dial tone default Used for IP MediaPack FXO gateways when One Stage Dialing is enabled If wait for dial tone is enabled the FXO gateway dials the phone number to the PSTN PBX line only after it detects a dial tone Note 1 The correct dial tone parameters should be configured in the Call Progress Tones file Note 2 It can take the gateway 1 to 3 seconds to detect a dial tone according to the dial tone configuration in the Call Progress Tones file If Waiti
386. uly 2005 my Gl AudioCodes MediaPack H 323 gt Toconfigure the IP to Hunt Group Routing table take these 6 steps 1 Open the IP to Hunt Group Routing screen Protocol Management menu gt Routing Tables submenu gt IP to Hunt Group Routing option the IP to Hunt Group Routing table screen is displayed Figure 5 13 IP to Hunt Group Routing Table Screen Dest Phone Prefix Source Phone Prefix Source IP Address Hunt Group ID Profile ID F l F 0 8 In the IP to Tel Routing Mode field select the IP to Tel routing mode refer to Table 5 13 In the Routing Index drop down list select the range of entries that you want to edit up to 24 entries can be configured Configure the IP to Hunt Group Routing table according to Table 5 13 Click the Submit button to save your changes 6 Tosave the changes so they are available after a power fail refer to Section 5 9 on page 152 Table 5 13 IP to Hunt Group Routing Table Parameter Description IP to Tel Routing Mode Route calls before manipulation 0 P gt Tel calls are routed before the RouteModelP2Tel number manipulation rules are applied default Route calls after manipulation 1 P gt Tel calls are routed after the number manipulation rules are applied Destination Phone Prefix Each entry in the Destination Phone Prefix fields represents a called telephone number prefix The prefix can be 1 to 49 digits long An asterisk represent
387. unctioning of the MediaPack or an error condition with a probable cause and a solution or workaround e Front and rear panel indicator LEDs on the MediaPack The location and functionality of the MP 1xx front panel LEDs is shown in Section 2 1 1 2 on page 22 The location and functionality of the MP 1xx rear panel LEDs is shown in Sections 2 1 2 and 23 The location and functionality of the MP 11x front panel LEDs is shown in Table 2 7 on page 25 e Self Testing on hardware initialization refer to Section 13 1 below e Error notification messages via the following interfaces gt Syslog Log messages can be viewed using an external Syslog server refer to Section 13 2 on page 203 or on the Message Log screen in the Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 7 3 on page 144 Note that the Message Log screen is not recommended for prolong debugging RS 232terminal For information on establishing a serial communications link with the MediaPack refer to Section 10 2 on page 183 13 1 Self Testing The MediaPack features two self testing modes rapid and detailed e Rapid Self Test Mode Rapid self test mode is run each time the media gateway completes the initialization process This is a short test phase in which the only errors detected and reported are failure in initializing hardware components All Status and Error reports in this self test phase are reported through the Syslog as well as indicated by the LED Status Indica
388. ure The range is 1 to 20 The default value is 20 Transmission delay in msec at which the IP connection is considered a failure The range is 100 to 1000 The default value is 250 msec MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 78 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 4 2 Tel to IP Routing Table The Tel to IP Routing Table is used to route incoming Tel calls to IP addresses This routing table associates a called calling telephone number s prefixes with a destination IP address or with an FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name When a call is routed through the VoIP gateway Gatekeeper isn t used the called and calling numbers are compared to the list of prefixes on the IP Routing Table up to 50 prefixes can be configured Calls that match these prefixes are sent to the corresponding IP address If the number dialed does not match these prefixes the call is not made When using a Gatekeeper you do not need to configure the Tel to IP Routing Table However if you want to use fallback routing when communication with Gatekeepers is lost or to use the Filter Calls to IP and IP Security features or to assign IP profiles you need to configure the IP Routing Table Note that for the Tel to IP Routing table to take precedence over a Gatekeeper for routing calls set the parameter PreferRouteTable to 1 The gateway checks the Destination IP Address field in the Tel to IP Routin
389. version 4 6 Each MIB is composed of a list of single MIB objects each relates to a separate attribute within a gauge or a counter All counters and gauges provide the current time value only gt acPerfMediaGateway a generic type of PM MIB that covers e Control protocol e RTP stream e System packets statistics gt acPerfMediaServices Media services devices specific performance MIB gt acPerfH323SIPGateway holds statistics on Tel to IP and vice versa New format The following MIBs feature an identical structure Each includes two major sub trees gt Configuration sub tree enables configuration of general attributes of the MIB and specific attributes of the monitored objects gt Data sub tree The monitoring results are presented in tables Each table includes one or two indices When there are two indices the first index is a sub set in the table e g trunk number and the second or a single where there is only one index represents the interval number present 0 previous 1 and the one before 2 The MIBs are gt acPMMedia for media voice related monitoring e g RTP DSP s gt acPMControl for Control Protocol related monitoring e g connections commands gt acPMSystem for general system related monitoring The log trap acPerformanceMonitoringThresholdCrossing non alarm is sent out every time the threshold of a Performance Monitored object is crossed The severity field is
390. warded number when XferPrefix Reroute Transfer message is received as a result of the Transfer Forward process Note 1 The number manipulation rules apply to the called number before it is sent in the Setup message Note 2 The xferprefix parameter can be used to apply different manipulation rules to differentiate the transferred forwarded number from the original dialed number Enable Call Forward Disable 0 Disable the Call Forward service default EnableForward Enable 1 Enable Call Forward service H 450 3 For FXS gateways a Call Forward table must be defined to use the Call Forward service To define the Call Forward table refer to Section 5 5 8 4 on page 100 Note To use the H 450 Supplementary Services the gateways at both ends must support these services Enable Call Waiting Disable 0 Disable the Call Waiting service default EnableCallWaiting Enable 1 Enable the Call Waiting service If enabled when an FXS gateway receives a call on a busy endpoint it responds with an Alert message with H 450 06 The gateway plays a call waiting indication signal When hook flash is detected the gateway switches to the waiting call The gateway that initiated the waiting call plays a Call Waiting Ringback tone to the calling party Note 1 The gateway s Call Progress Tones file must include a call waiting Ringback tone caller side and a call waiting tone called side FXS only Note 2 The
391. were previously stored in flash memory Note that these are NOT the files you loaded in the previous Wizard steps gt Click Back the Load a cmp File screen is reverted to refer to Figure 5 51 gt Click Next the Load an ini File screen opens refer to Figure 5 53 Loading a new ini file or any other auxiliary file listed in the Wizard is optional Note that as you progress the file type list on the left indicates which file type loading is in process by illuminating green until FINISH Figure 5 53 Load an ini File Screen Load a INI file from your computer to the device D Browse SendFie Iv Use existing configuration Device will revert to default configuration if no configuration is chosen 6 Inthe Load an ini File screen you can now choose to either gt Click Browse and navigate to the ini file the check box Use existing configuration by default checked becomes unchecked Click Send File the ini file is loaded to the MediaPack and you re notified as to a successful loading gt Ignore the Browse button its field remains undefined and the check box Use existing configuration remains checked by default gt Ignore the Browse button and uncheck the Use existing configuration check box no ini file is loaded the MediaPack uses its factory preconfigured values You can now choose to either Click Cancel the MediaPack resets utilizing the
392. witch Use a second standard Ethernet cable to connect the MediaPack to another port on the same network hub switch Use an Ethernet cross over cable for the MP 1xx or a standard Ethernet cable for the MP 11x to directly connect the network interface on your PC to the MediaPack 2 Change your PC s IP address and subnet mask to correspond with the MediaPack factory default IP address and subnet mask shown in Table 4 1 For details on changing the IP address and subnet mask of your PC refer to Windows Online Help Start gt Help 3 Access the MediaPack Embedded Web Server refer to Section 5 3 on page 46 4 Inthe Quick Setup screen shown in Figure 4 1 set the MediaPack IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address fields under IP Configuration to correspond with your network IP settings If your network doesn t feature a default gateway enter a dummy value in the Default Gateway IP Address field 5 Click the Reset button and click OK in the prompt the MediaPack applies the changes and restarts Tip Record and retain the IP address and subnet mask you assign the MediaPack Do the same when defining new username or password If the Embedded Web Server is unavailable for example if you ve lost your username and password use the BootP TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol configuration utility to access the device reflash the load and reset the password refer to Appendix B
393. with 550 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 and 559 However if you enter 55 in entry 1 and 551 in entry 2 the VolP gateway applies rule 1 to all numbers that start with 55 including numbers that start with 551 5 5 3 2 Numbering Plan and Type of Number Numbers are classified by their Numbering Plan Indication NPI and their Type of Number TON The MediaPack supports all NPI TON classifications used in the standard A short list of the most important NPI TON values are as follows Table 5 10 NPI TON values NPI TON Description A valid classification but one that has no information about the Unknown 0 Unknown 0 numbering plan A public number in E 164 format but no information on what kind of E 164 number A public number in complete international E 164 format For example 16135551234 A public number in complete national E 164 format For Unknown 0 International 1 E 164 Public 1 National 2 example 6135551234 A public number in complete E 164 format representing a local Subscriber 4 subscriber For example 5551234 Unknown 0 A private number but with no further information about the numbering plan pivare Level 1 Regional 2 A private number with a location For example 3932200 Level 0 Regional 4 A private local extension number For example 2200 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 76 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 5 Configuring the MediaPack 5 5 4 Configuring the
394. write community string v2admin take these 2 steps If v2admin is being used as the trap community string follow the procedure for changing the trap community string See below Delete the srCommunityTable row with a CommunityName of v2admin and GroupName of ReadWriteGroup To change the only read write community string from v2admin to v2mgr take these 4 steps Follow the procedure above to add a read write community string to a row for v2mgr Set up the EM so that subsequent set requests use the new community string v2mgr If v2admin is being used as the trap community string follow the procedure to change the trap community string see below Follow the procedure above to delete a read write community name in the row for v2admin To change the trap community string take these 2 steps The following procedure assumes that a row already exists in the srCommunityTable for the new trap community string The trap community string can be part of the TrapGroup ReadGroup or ReadWriteGroup If the trap community string is used solely for sending traps recommended it should be made part of the TrapGroup 1 2 Add a row to the vacmSecurityToGroupTable with these values SecurityModel 2 SecurityName the new trap community string GroupName TrapGroup ReadGroup or ReadWriteGroup The SecurityModel and SecurityName objects are row indices Note You must add GroupName and RowStatus on the same set Modify the Se
395. ws a media path to be established using H 225 without having to start the full H 245 protocol session In some situations you need to use fast start in order to cut through the voice path before the called party answers the call ini file note The single Web parameter is represented by two ini file parameters Port allocation algorithm for IP to Tel calls You can select one of the following methods e By phone number 0 Select the gateway port according to the called number called number is defined in the Endpoint Phone Number table e Cyclic Ascending 1 Select the next available channel in an ascending cycle order Always select the next higher channel number in the hunt group When the gateway reaches the highest channel number in the hunt group it selects the lowest channel number in the hunt group and then starts ascending again e Ascending 2 Select the lowest available channel Always start at the lowest channel number in the hunt group and if that channel is not available select the next higher channel e Cyclic Descending 3 Select the next available channel in descending cycle order Always select the next lower channel number in the hunt group When the gateway reaches the lowest channel number in the hunt group it selects the highest channel number in the hunt group and then start descending again e Descending 4 Select the highest available channel Always start at the highest channel number in the hu
396. x directly to the network using a standard RJ 45 Ethernet cable For connector s pinout refer to Figure 3 15 on page RJ 45 Ethernet 38 cable Note that when assigning an IP address to the MP 11x using HTTP under step 1 in Section 4 2 1 you may be required to disconnect this cable and re cable it differently RJ 11 two wire Connect the RJ 11 connectors on the rear Ensure that the FXS ports are telephone cords panel of the MP 11x to fax machine modem connected to the correct devices or phones refer to Figure 3 6 otherwise damage can occur For detailed information on setting up the Lifeline refer to the procedure under Lifeline Section 3 2 5 2 on page 39 F For detailed information on connecting the MP 1xx RS 232 port to your PC refer to HERRE Seceani Section 3 2 5 1 on page 38 AC Power cable Connect the MP 11x power socket to the mains Figure 3 15 RJ 45 Ethernet Connector Pinout RJ 45 Connector and Pinout 12345678 Tx 4 5 7 8 Tx not Rx connected Rx Figure 3 16 RJ 11 Phone Connector Pinout RJ 11 Connector and Pinout 1234 1 Not connected 2 Tip 3 Ring 4 Not connected 3 2 5 1 Connecting the MP 11x RS 232 Port to Your PC Using a standard RS 232 straight cable not a cross over cable with DB 9 connectors connect the MP 11x RS 232 port using a DB 9 to PS 2 adaptor to either COM1 or COM2 RS 232 communication port on your PC The pinout of the PS 2 connector is shown below in F
397. y to skip ARQ messages for incoming or outgoing calls General The MediaPack gateways are identified by Country Code 0xB5 and Manufacturers Code 0x28 in H 323 messages Supports H 323 Annex D T 38 real time fax Supports H 450 Call Hold Call Transfer Call Forwarding Call waiting Message Waiting Indication and Name Identification supplementary services H 450 1 H 450 2 H 450 3 H 450 4 H 450 6 H 450 7 and H 450 8 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 18 Document LTRT 65105 MediaPack H 323 User s Manual 1 Overview Supports the following coders gt G 711 A law 64 kbps 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 msec gt G 711 p law 64 kbps 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 msec gt G 723 1 5 3 6 3 kbps 30 60 90 msec gt G 726 16 24 32 40 kbps 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 msec gt G 729A B 8 kbps 10 20 30 40 50 60 msec Supports DTMF negotiation Supports DTMF and hook flash signal out of band through H 245 channel using Alphanumeric or Signal field Supports DTMF and hook flash signal in band according to RFC 2833 including negotiation of payload type Supports DTMF and hook flash signal out of band using H 225 Q 931 Keypad facility messages Supports reopening of logical channel and implementation of third party reroute Supports configuration of H 323 Port Range Supports H 225 Q 931 Progress Indicator parameter for Fast Connect enabling playing of local Ringback

LTRT-65105 MediaPack H.323 User`s Manual Ver 4.6

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents